SLS AMG Roadster (2014) - Car Mercedes-Benz - Free user manual and instructions
Find the device manual for free SLS AMG Roadster (2014) Mercedes-Benz in PDF.
User questions about SLS AMG Roadster (2014) Mercedes-Benz
0 question about this device. Answer the ones you know or ask your own.
Ask a new question about this device
Download the instructions for your Car in PDF format for free! Find your manual SLS AMG Roadster (2014) - Mercedes-Benz and take your electronic device back in hand. On this page are published all the documents necessary for the use of your device. SLS AMG Roadster (2014) by Mercedes-Benz.
USER MANUAL SLS AMG Roadster (2014) Mercedes-Benz
natural_image
Two Mercedes-Benz SLS 6301 cars displayed in a studio setting, no visible text or symbols on the vehicles themselves.SLS AMG
GT Coupe and GT Roadster Operator's Manual
Mercedes-Benz
Symbols
Registered trademarks:
- Bluetooth ^ is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG Inc.
• DTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. - Dolby and MLP are registered trademarks of DOLBY Laboratories.
- BabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are registered trademarks of Daimler AG.
- HomeLink ^ is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls.
- iPod ^ and iTunes ^ are registered trademarks of Apple Inc.
- Logic7 ^ is a registered trademark of Harman International Industries.
- Microsoft® and Windows media® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
- SIRIUS is a registered trademark of Sirius XM Radio Inc.
- HD Radio is a registered trademark of iBiquity Digital Corporation.
- Gracenote ^ is a registered trademark of Gracenote, Inc.
- ZAGATSurvey® and related brands are registered trademarks of ZagatSurvey, LLC.
In this Operator's Manual you will find the following symbols:
WARNING
Warning notes make you aware dangers which could pose a threat to your health or life, or to the health and life of others.
Environmental note
Environmental notes provide you with information on environmentally aware actions or disposal.
Notes on material damage alert you to dangers that could lead to damage to your vehicle.
i Practical tips or further information that could be helpful to you.
This symbol indicates an instruction that must be followed.
Several of these symbols in succession indicate an instruction with several steps.
(▷ page) This symbol tells you where you can find more information about a topic.
This symbol indicates a warning or an instruction that is continued on the next page.
Display This font indicates a display in the multifunction display/COMAND display.
Parts of the software in the vehicle are protected by copyright © 2005
The FreeType Project http://www.freetype.org. All rights reserved.
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz
We urge you to read this Operator's Manual carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehicle before driving. For your own safety and a longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and warning notices in this manual. Ignoring them could result in damage to the vehicle or personal injury to you or others.
Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow instructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
The equipment or product designation of your vehicle may vary depending on:
- Model
- Order
- Country specification
- Availability
Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas:
- Design
- Equipment
- Technical features
The equipment in your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations.
The following are integral components of the vehicle:
- Operator's Manual
- Maintenance Booklet
• Equipment-dependent supplements
Keep printed copies of the documents in the vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass the documents on to the new owner.
The technical documentation team at Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant motoring.
Opening and closing 61
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 83
Lights and windshield wipers 95
Climate control 105
Driving and parking 117
On-board computer and displays .... 149
Stowage and features 199
Maintenance and care 217
Breakdown assistance 231
Wheels and tires 247
Technical data 277
1, 2, 3 ...
12 V socket
see Sockets
4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ....
A
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Display message 165
Function/notes 54
Warning lamp 192
Activating/deactivating cooling
with air dehumidification 10
ADAPTIVE BRAKE 58
Additional speedometer 158
Additives (engine oil) 282
Adjusting lumbar support 86
Air bags
Display message 171
Front air bag (driver, front
passenger) 40
Head bag 42
Important safety notes 38
Knee bag 41
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp 42
Safety guidelines 37
Side impact air bag 41
Air-conditioning system
see Climate control
Air filter (display message) 1
AIRSCARF
Switching on/off 88
AIRSCARF vents
Setting the blower output 114
Air vents
Important safety notes 113
Setting 113
Setting the blower output of the AIRSCARF vents 1 1
Setting the center air vents 114
Setting the side air vents 114
Switching AIRSCARF on/off 88
Alarm system
see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
AMG
Adaptive sport suspension system 140
Button for AMG menu 128
E-SELECT lever. 121
55 Menu (on-board computer) 161
SETUP 128
SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-gear sport transmission 121
Anti-lock braking system
see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Anti-theft alarm system
see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Ashtray 203
ASSYST PLUS service interval
display
Hiding service messages 222
Service messages 222
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Activating/deactivating 58
Function 58
Switching off the alarm 58
Audio menu (on-board computer) .... 154
Audio system
see separate operating instructions
Authorized Centers
see Qualified specialist workshop
Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
see Qualified specialist workshop
Authorized workshops
see Qualified specialist workshop
AUTO lights
Display message 174
Automatic headlamp mode 96
B
BAS (Brake Assist System) 55
Battery
Display message 185
Battery (SmartKey)
4 Checking 65
Important safety notes 64
Replacing 65
Battery (vehicle)
Charging 239
Display message 178
Important safety notes 236
Jump starting 240
Blind Spot Assist
Activating/deactivating 157
Display message 181
Notes/function 145
Brake Assist
see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Brake fluid
Display message 169
Notes 283
Brake lamps (display message) ..... 174
Brakes
ABS 54
BAS 55
Brake fluid (notes) 283
Display message 165
Display messages 165
Driving tips 135
High-performance brake system .... 137
Important safety notes 135
Maintenance 136
Warning lamp 190, 192
Breakdown
see Flat tire
see Towing away/tow-starting
Bulbs
see Replacing bulbs
C
California
Important notice for retail customers and lessees 20
Calling up a malfunction
see Display messages
Capacities
see Technical data
Car
see Vehicle
Care
Car wash 223
Display 229
Exhaust pipe 228
Exterior lights 228
Gear or selector lever 229
Matte finish 226
Notes 223
Paint 225
Plastic trim 229
Power washer 225
Rear view camera 228
Seat belt 230
Seat cover 230
Sensors 228
Soft top 226
Steering wheel 229
Trim pieces 229
Washing by hand 224
Wheels 225
Windows 227
Wiper blades 227
Wooden trim 229
Car wash (care) 223
CD player/CD changer (on-board
computer) 155
Center console
Lower section 31
Upper section 30
Central locking
Automatic locking (on-board computer) 159
Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ...... 62
Changing bulbs
License plate lighting 101
Charge maintenance socket 214
Children
In the vehicle 51
Restraint systems 51
Child seat
Special seat belt retractor 53
Top Tether 53
Cigarette lighter 203
Climate control
Automatic climate control (dual-zone) 107
Controlling automatically 110
Cooling with air dehumidification .. 108
Defrosting the windows 112
Defrosting the windshield 111
Important safety notes 106
Indicator lamp 110
Maximum cooling 111
Notes on using automatic climate control 108
Overview of systems 106
Problems with cooling with air dehumidification 110
Problem with the rear window defroster 113
Refrigerant 282
Refrigerant filling capacity 283
Setting the air distribution 110
Setting the airflow 111
Setting the air vents 113
Setting the temperature 110
Switching air-recirculation mode on/off 113
Switching on/off 108
Switching the MONO function on/off 111
Switching the rear window defroster on/off 112
Cockpit
Overview 26
see Instrument cluster
COMAND
see separate operating instructions
Combination switch 98
Consumption statistics (on-board computer) 153
Convenience closing feature 77
Convenience opening feature .... 76 see Opening/closing the side windows (all)
Coolant
Display message 177
Coolant (engine)
Checking the level 220
Important safety notes 283
Temperature (on-board computer) . 1 6
Cooling
see Climate control
Copyright 24
Crash-responsive emergency
lighting 100
Cruise control
Cruise control lever 139
Deactivating 140
Display message 180
Driving system 138
Function/notes 138
Important safety notes 138
LIM indicator lamp 139
Setting a speed 139
Storing and maintaining current speed 139
Cup holder
Center console 202
Important safety notes 202
Curb weight
see Technical data
Customer Assistance Center (CAC) ... 23
Customer Relations Department ..... 23
D
Dashboard
see Cockpit
see Instrument cluster
Data
see Technical data
Daytime running lamps
Display message 175
Switching on/off (on-board computer) 158
Switching on/off (switch) 96
Dealerships
see Qualified specialist workshop
Declarations of conformity 22
Delayed switch-off
Exterior lighting (on-board computer) 159 Interior lighting 159
Diagnostics connection 22
Digital speedometer 152
Display (cleaning instructions) ..... 229
Display messages
ASSYST PLUS service interval display. 222
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 164
Driving systems 180
Engine 177
General notes 163
Hiding (on-board computer) 164
Lights 173
Safety systems 170
Service interval display ..... 222
SmartKey 185
Tires 182
Vehicle 184
Distance recorder 152
see Odometer
see Trip odometer
Door control panel
Overview 33
Doors
Automatic locking (on-board
computer) 159
Automatic locking (switch) 70
Central locking/unlocking
(SmartKey) 6 2
Display message 184, 186
Emergency locking 71
Emergency unlocking 71
Important safety notes 68
Opening (from inside) 69
Draft stop 80
Drinking and driving 135
Drinks holder
see Cup holder
Drive program
Automatic 126
Manual 127
SETUP (on-board computer) ..... 161
Drive program display 12.
Driver's door
see Doors
Driving abroad
Mercedes-Benz Service 223
Symmetrical low beam 96
Driving lamps
see Daytime running lamps
Driving on flooded roads 13
Driving safety systems
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ..... 54
ADAPTIVE BRAKE 58
BAS (Brake Assist System) 55
EBD (electronic brake force distribution) 57
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) . 5
ETS (Electronic Traction System) ..... 55
Important safety information 54
Overview 54
Driving systems
AMG adaptive sport suspension
system 140
Blind Spot Assist 145
Cruise control 138
Display message 180
PARKTRONIC 141
Rear view camera 144
Driving tips
AMG ceramic high-performance
compound brake system 137
Brakes 135
Break-in period 118
Downhill gradient 135
Drinking and driving 135
Driving abroad 96
Driving in winter 137
Driving on wet roads 137
Exhaust check 135
Fuel 134
General 134
Hydroplaning 137
Icy road surfaces 137
Limited braking efficiency on
salted roads 136
Snow chains 251
Symmetrical low beam 96
Wet road surface 136
DVD audio (on-board computer) ..... 155
DVD video (on-board computer) ..... 155
E
EASY-ENTRY feature
Activating/deactivating 160
Function/notes 89
EASY-EXIT feature
Crash-responsive 90
Function/notes 89
Switching on/off 160
EBD (electronic brake force
distribution)
Display message 166
Function/notes 57
Electronic Stability Program
see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Electronic traction control system
see ETS 55
Emergency release
Driver's door 71
Trunk 74
Vehicle 71
Emergency Tensioning Devices
Function 50
Safety guidelines ..... 37
Emissions control
Service and warranty information .... 19
Engine
Display message 177
Engine number 279
Starting 120
Starting the engine with the
SmartKey 120
Starting with the KEYLESS-GO
start function 120
Switching off 132
Engine diagnostics warning lamp
Engine oil
Adding 220
Additives 282
Checking the oil level 219
Checking the oil level using the dipstick 219
Display message 178, 179
Filling capacity 282
Notes about oil grades 281
Notes on oil level/consumption .... 219
Temperature (on-board computer) . 1 6
Temperature gauge 150
Viscosity 282
E-SELECT lever 121
ESP® (Electronic Stability
Program)
Deactivating/activating 56
Display message 170
Function/notes 56
Important safety information 55
Warning lamp 193
Exhaust check 135
Exhaust pipe (cleaning instructions) 228
Exterior lighting
Setting options 96
see Lights
Exterior mirrors
Adjusting 90
Dipping (automatic) 91
Folding in/out (automatically) ..... 91
Folding in/out (electrically) ..... 91
Folding in when locking (on-board computer) 160
Out of position (troubleshooting) ..... 91
Setting 91
Storing settings (memory function) .. 92
Storing the parking position 92
F
Filler cap
see Fuel filler flap
First-aid kit 232
Flat tire
Preparing the vehicle 233
Raising the vehicle 270
TREFIT kit 233
Floormats 214
Fuel
Additives 281
Consumption statistics 153
Displaying the range 153
Driving tips 134
E10 280
Fuel gauge 27
Grade (gasoline) 280
Important safety notes 280
Problem (malfunction) 131
Refueling 129
Tank content/reserve fuel 280
Fuel filler flap, opening/closing ..... 129
Fuel level
Calling up the range (on-board computer) 153
Fuel tank
Capacity 280
Problem (malfunction) 131
Fuse box
Front-passenger footwell 245
Rear compartment 245
Fuses
Allocation chart 245
Before changing 245
Important safety notes 244
G
Garage door opener
Clearing the memory 214
Important safety notes 211
Opening/closing the garage door .. 214
Programming (button in the rear-view mirror) 212
Gasoline 280
Gear indicator 123
Gear or selector lever (cleaning guidelines) 229
Genuine parts 18
Glove box 200
H
Hazard warning lamps 98
Head bags 42
Headlamp cleaning system Notes 284
Headlamps
Adding fluid to cleaning system ..... 221
Cleaning system (capacity) ..... 284
Cleaning system (function) 99
Cleaning system (notes) 284
Fogging up 99
see Automatic headlamp mode
Head level heating (AIRSCARF) 88
Heating
see Climate control
High-beam headlamps
Switching on/off 98
High-beam headlamps (display message) 175
Hill start assist 12
Hood
Closing 2 1
Display message 184
Important safety notes 218
Opening 218
Hydroplaning 137
1
Ignition lock 119
see Key positions
Immobilizer 58
Indicator lamps
see Warning and indicator lamps
Instrument cluster
Overview 27
Settings 157
Warning and indicator lamps 28
Instrument cluster lighting 158
Interior lighting
Automatic control 99
Delayed switch-off (on-board computer) 159
Emergency lighting 100
Manual control 100
Overview 99
Reading lamp 99
3」
Jack
Storage location 232
Using 270
Jump starting (engine) 240
K
KEYLESS-GO start function
Display message 185
Start/Stop button 119
8 Starting the engine 120
Key positions
SmartKey 119
Kickdown 124
Driving tips 124
Knee bag 41
L
Lamps
see Warning and indicator lamps
Lap time (RACETIMER) 161
License plate lamp
Changing bulbs 101
License plate lamp (display
message) 175
Lighting
Light switch 96
Lights
Activating/deactivating the
interior lighting delayed switch-off . 1 5 9
Automatic headlamp mode ..... 96
Display message 173
Driving abroad 96
Hazard warning lamps 98
High beam flasher 98
High-beam headlamps 98
Low-beam headlamps 97
Parking lamps 97
Standing lamps 97
Switching the daytime running lamps on/off (on-board computer) 158
Switching the daytime running lamps on/off (switch) 96
Switching the exterior lighting delayed switch-off on/off (on-board computer) 159
Switching the surround lighting on/off (on-board computer) 159
Turn signals 98
see Replacing bulbs
LIM indicator lamp
Cruise control 139
Locking
see Central locking
Locking (doors)
Automatic 70
Emergency locking 71
From inside (central locking button) 70
Locking centrally
see Central locking
Low-beam headlamps
Display message 174
Setting for driving abroad (symmetrical) 96
Switching on/off 97
M
M+S tires 250
Malfunction message
see Display messages
Manual drive program 127
Matte finish (cleaning instructions) 226
mbrace
Call priority 208
Display message 173
Downloading destinations
(COMAND) 208
Emergency call 205
General notes 204
Locating a stolen vehicle 209
MB info call button 207
Remote vehicle locking 209
Roadside Assistance button 207
Search & Send 209
Self-test 205
System 205
Mechanical key
Function/notes 64
Locking vehicle 71
Unlocking the driver's door 71
Memory card (audio) 155
Memory function 92
Message memory (on-board
computer) 164
Messages
see Display messages
Mirrors
see Exterior mirrors
see Rear-view mirror
see Vanity mirror
Mobile phone
Menu (on-board computer) 155
Modifying the programming
(SmartKey) 63
MP3
Operation 155
see separate operating instructions
Multifunction display
Function/notes 152
Permanent display 158
Multifunction steering wheel
Operating the on-board computer . 1 5 1
Overview 29
N
Navigation
Menu (on-board computer) 153
On-board computer 153
see separate operating instructions
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle 118
0
Occupant Classification System (OCS)
Faults 46
Operation 42
System self-test 45
Occupant safety
Children in the vehicle 51
Important safety notes 36
OCS
Faults 46
Operation 4
System self-test 45
Odometer 152
On-board computer
AMG menu 161
Audio menu 154
Convenience submenu 160
Displaying a service message ..... 222
Display messages 163
Factory settings 160
Important safety notes 150
Instrument cluster submenu ..... 157
Lighting submenu 158
Menu overview 152
Message memory 164
Navigation menu 153
Operation 151
RACETIMER 161
Service menu 157
Settings menu 157
Standard display. 152
Telephone menu 155
Trip menu 152
Vehicle submenu 160
Video DVD operation 155
Opening and closing 68
Operating safety
Declaration of conformity 22
Important safety notes 21
Operating system
see On-board computer
Operator's Manual
Vehicle equipment 19
Outside temperature display ..... 150
Overhead control panel 32
P
Paint code number 278
Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 225
Panic alarm 36
Parcel net 201
Parking 131
Important safety notes 131
Position of exterior mirror, front-
passenger side 92
Rear view camera 144
see PARKTRONIC
Parking aid
see Exterior mirrors
see PARKTRONIC
Parking brake
Display message 166
Electric parking brake 133
Parking lamps
Switching on/off 97
PARKTRONIC
Deactivating/activating 143
Driving system 141
Function/notes 141
Problem (malfunction) 144
Range of the sensors 142
Warning display 142
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp 42
Plastic trim (cleaning instructions) . 2 2 9
Power washers 225
Power windows
see Side windows
Program selector 124
Protection of the environment
General notes 18
Pulling away 120
Q
Qualified specialist workshop 22
R
RACE START 125
RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 161
Radio
Selecting a station 154
see separate operating instructions
Radio-wave reception/
transmission in the vehicle
Declaration of conformity 22
Reading lamp 99
Rear spoiler
Display message 189
Extending/retracting 210
Problem 211
Rear view camera
Cleaning instructions 228
Function/notes 144
Rear-view mirror
Anti-glare (manual) 90
Dipping (automatic) 91
Rear window defroster
Problem (malfunction) 113
Switching on/off 112
Refrigerant (air-conditioning
system)
Important safety notes 282
Refueling
Fuel gauge 27
Important safety notes 129
Refueling process ..... 129
see Fuel
Remote control
Programming (garage door opener) 212
Replacing bulbs
Important safety notes 100
Reporting safety defects 23
Reserve (fuel tank)
see Fuel
Reserve fuel
Display message 179
Warning lamp 196
see Fuel
Restraint system
see SRS (Supplemental Restraint
System)
Reversing lamps (display message) 175
Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 20
Roof
see Soft top
Route
see Route guidance (navigation)
Route guidance (navigation) 153
S
Safety
Children in the vehicle 51
Child restraint systems 51
Occupant Classification System (OCS) 42
Safety system
see Driving safety systems
Seat belts
Belt force limiters 50
Cleaning 230
Correct usage 48
Emergency Tensioning Devices ..... 5 0
Fastening 49
Important safety guidelines 47
Releasing 49
Safety guidelines 37
Special seat belt retractor 53
Warning lamp 191
Warning lamp (function) 49
Seats
Adjusting (electrically) 86
Adjusting (manually) 86
Adjusting lumbar support 86
Cleaning the cover 230
Correct driver's seat position 84
Important safety notes 85
Seat heating problem 87
Storing settings (memory function) .. 92
Switching AIRSCARF on/off 88
Switching seat heating on/off 87
Selector lever
Positions 121
Sensors (cleaning instructions) ..... 228
Service interval display
Displaying service messages ..... 222
Hiding service messages 222
Notes 222
Service messages 222
Service menu (on-board computer) . 1 5 7
Service products
Brake fluid 283
Coolant (engine) 283
Engine oil 281
Fuel 280
Important safety notes 279
Notes 279
Refrigerant (air-conditioning Opening/closing (SmartKey) 80
system) 282 Opening/closing (with soft-top
Washer fluid 284 switch) 79
Settings
Factory (on-board computer) 160 Relocking 80
On-board computer 157 wind screen 80
Setting the air distribution 11Soft-top switch 79
Setting the airflow 111 Specialist workshop 22
SETUP (on-board computer) 161Speed, controlling
Shift ranges 127 see Cruise control
Side impact air bag 4\$peedometer
Side marker lamp (display message) .... 176 Activating/deactivating the additional speedometer .... 158
Side windows
Cleaning 227 In the Instrument cluster 2
Convenience closing feature ..... 77 Selecting the unit of measurement 157
Convenience opening feature ..... 76 see Instrument cluster
Important safety information ...... 75 SPORT handling mode
Opening/closing 75 Warning lamp 193
Opening/closing (all) 76 SRS
Problem (malfunction) 78 see SRS (Supplemental Restraint
artKey 68 System)
Changing the battery .... 65 SRS (Supplemental Restraint
Changing the programming .... 63 System)
Checking the battery 65 Display message 173
Convenience closing feature .... 77 Introduction .... 37
Convenience opening feature 76 Warning lamp 194
Display message 185 Warning lamp (function) 37
Door central locking/unlocking ..... 62 Standing lamps
Loss ..... 66 Display message ..... 176
Mechanical key 64 Switching on/off 97
Opening/closing soft top 80 Starting (engine) 120
Positions (ignition lock) .... 119 Steering wheel Problem (malfunction) .... 66 Adjusting (electrically) .... 89
Starting the engine 120 Button overview 29
Unlocking/locking vehicle 68 Buttons (on-board computer) 151
SmartKey positions Cleaning 229
KEYLESS-GO start function 119 Important safety notes 88
Snow chains 251 Paddle shifters 125
Socket Storing settings (memory function) .. 92
Glove box 20 Stopwatch (RACETIMER) 161
Sockets Stowage areas .... 200
Center console .... 204 Stowage compartments Points to observe before use .... 203 Armrest (under) .... 201
Soft top Center console 201
Cleaning 226 Cup holders 202
Display message 184 Glove box 200
Important safety notes 78 Important safety information 200
Center console 201
Cup holders 202
Glove box 200
Important safety information ..... 200
wage compartments
Armrest (under) 201
Parcel net 201
Rear wall 201
Stowage space
Center console (rear) 201
Summer opening
see Convenience opening feature
Summer tires 250
Sun visor 202
Surround lighting (on-board
computer) 159
Suspension tuning
AMG adaptive sport suspension system 140
Switching air-recirculation mode
on/off 113
Switching off the alarm (ATA) ....
T
Tachometer 150
Tail lamps
Display message 175
Tail lamps (Display message) 175
Tank content
Fuel gauge 27
Technical data
Notes 278
Tires/wheels 273
TELEAID
Call priority 208
Display message 173
Downloading destinations (COMAND) 208
Emergency call 205
Locating a stolen vehicle 209
MB info call button 207
Remote vehicle locking 209
Roadside Assistance button 207
Search & Send 209
Self-test 205
System 205
Tele Aid
General notes 204
Telephone
Accepting a call 156
Menu (on-board computer) 155
Number from the phone book ..... 1 5
Redialing 157
Rejecting/ending a call 156
Temperature
Coolant (on-board computer) ..... 161
Engine oil 150
Engine oil (on-board computer) ..... 161
Outside temperature 150
Theft deterrent systems
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) 58
Immobilizer 58
Tow-away alarm 59
Time
see separate operating instructions
Timing (RACETIMER) 161
TREFIT kit 233
Tôre pressure
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 254
Checking manually 254
Display message 182
Maximum 254
Notes 253
Not reached (TREFIT) 235
Reached (TREFIT) 235
Recommended 251
Tire pressure monitoring system
Checking the tire pressure electronically 256
Function/notes 254
Restarting 257
Warning lamp 197
Warning message 257
Tires
Aspect ratio (definition) 267
Average weight of the vehicle occupants (definition) 266
Bar (definition) 266
Characteristics 266
Checking 249
Definition of terms 266
Direction of rotation 269
Display message 182
Distribution of the vehicle occupants (definition) 268
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) 2 6 5
DOT (Department of
^o Transportation) (definition) 266
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) (definition) 266
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
(definition) 267
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) (definition) 267
Important safety notes 248
Increased vehicle weight due to optional equipment (definition) ..... 266
Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) 267
Labeling (overview) 262
Load bearing index (definition) ..... 268
Load index 265
Load index (definition) 267
Maximum loaded vehicle weight (definition) 267
Maximum load on a tire (definition) 267
Maximum permissible tire pressure (definition) 267
Maximum tire load 265
Maximum tire load (definition) ..... 267
Optional equipment weight
(definition) 268
PSI (pounds per square inch)
(definition) 267
Replacing 268
Service life 250
Sidewall (definition) 268
Speed rating (definition) 267
Storing 269
Structure and characteristics
(definition) 266
Technical data 275
Temperature 262
TIN (Tire Identification Number) (definition) 268
Tire bead (definition) 268
Tire pressure (definition) 267
Tire pressures (recommended) ..... 266
Tire size (data) 273
Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity, speed rating 262
Tire tread 249
Tire tread (definition) 268
Total load limit (definition) 268
Traction 261
Traction (definition) 268
Tread wear 261
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards 261
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards (definition) 266
Unladen weight (definition) 267
Wear indicator (definition) 268
Wheel rim (definition) 266 see Flat tire
Top Tether 53
Tow-away alarm 59
Towing
Important safety guidelines 242
Installing the towing eye 243
Removing the towing eye 243
With the rear axle raised 243
Towing away
With both axles on the ground ..... 244
Transmission
Driving tips 124
Selector lever 121
Shift range 127
Transmission position display 123
Transmission positions 123
Transporting the vehicle 244
Trim pieces (cleaning instructions) . 2 2 9
Trip computer (on-board computer) 153
Trip odometer
Calling up 152
Trunk
Emergency release 74
Important safety guidelines 72
Locking separately 74
Opening (automatically from inside) 73
Trunk lid
Display message 184
Opening/closing 72, 73
Opening dimensions 284
Trunk load (maximum) 284 see Technical data
Turn signal (display message) ..... 174
Turn signals
Switching on/off 98
Type identification plate
see Vehicle identification plate
U
Unlocking
Emergency unlocking 71
From inside the vehicle (central unlocking button) 70
Upshift indicator 128
V
Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) ......
Vehicle
Correct use 23
Data acquisition 24
Display message 184
Equipment 19
Individual settings 157
Limited Warranty 23
Loading 258
Locking (in an emergency) 71
Locking (SmartKey) 62
Lowering 273
Maintenance 20
Parking for a long period 134
Pulling away 120
Raising 270
Reporting problems 23
Towing away 242
Transporting 244
Unlocking (in an emergency) 71
Unlocking (SmartKey) 62, 68
Vehicle data 284
Vehicle data 284
see Technical data
Vehicle dimensions 284
see Technical data
Vehicle emergency locking 71
Vehicle identification number see VIN
Vehicle identification plate 278
Vehicle tool kit 232
Vehicle weights
see Technical data
Video (DVD) 155
VIN 278
W
Warning and indicator lamps
ABS 192
Brakes 190, 192
Check Engine 195
Cruise control 139
ESP ^® 193
Fuel tank 196
Overview 28
2 0 2 Overview ...... 28
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp 42
Reserve fuel 196
Seat belt 191
SPORT handling mode 193
SRS 194
Tire pressure monitor 197
Warranty 278
Washer fluid
see Windshield washer system
Washer fluid (display message) ..... 185
Weight
see Technical data
Wheel bolt tightening torque 273
Wheel chock 269
Wheels
Checking 249
Cleaning 225
Important safety notes 248
Interchanging/changing 268
Mounting a new wheel 272
Mounting a wheel 269
Removing a wheel 271
Storing 269
Tightening torque 273
Wheel size/tire size 273
Windows
see Side windows
Windsshield washer system 221
Filling capacity 284
Notes 284
Windshield wipers
Problem (malfunction) 103
Replacing the wiper blades 102
Switching on/off 101
Winter driving
Important safety notes 250
Slippery road surfaces 137
Snow chains 251
Winter tires
M+S tires 250
Wiper blades
Cleaning 227
Important safety notes 102
Replacing 102
Wooden trim (cleaning instructions) 229
Workshops
see Qualified specialist workshop
Protection of the environment
General notes
Environmental note
Daimler's declared policy is one of comprehensive environmental protection.
The objectives are for the natural resources that form the basis of our existence on this planet to be used sparingly and in a manner that takes the requirements of both nature and humanity into account.
You too can help to protect the environment by operating your vehicle in an environmentally responsible manner.
Fuel consumption and the rate of engine, w transmission, brake and tire wear are affected by these factors:
- operating conditions of your vehicle
- your personal driving style
You can influence both factors. You should bear the following in mind:
Operating conditions:
- avoid short trips as these increase fuel consumption.
- always make sure that the tire pressures are correct.
- do not carry any unnecessary weight.
- remove roof racks once you no longer need them.
- a regularly serviced vehicle will contribute to environmental protection. You should therefore adhere to the service intervals.
- always have service work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Personal driving style:
- do not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine.
- do not warm up the engine when the vehicle is stationary.
- drive carefully and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front.
-
avoid frequent, sudden acceleration and braking.
-
change gear in good time and use each gear only up to 23 of its maximum engine speed.
- switch off the engine in stationary traffic.
- keep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consumption.
Environmental concerns and recommendations
Wherever the operating instructions require you to dispose of materials, first try to t_regenerate or re-use them. Observe the relevant environmental rules and regulations when disposing of materials. In this way you will help to protect the environment.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
Environmental note
Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned major assemblies and parts which are of the same quality as new parts. They are covered by the same Limited Warranty entitlements as new parts.
Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devices, as well as control units and sensors for these restraint systems, may be installed in the following areas of your vehicle:
- doors
- door pillars
- door sills
- seats
- cockpit
- instrument cluster
- center console
Do not install accessories such as audio systems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs or welding. You could impair the operating efficiency of the restraint systems.
Have aftermarket accessories installed at The original purchase agreement lists all a qualified specialist workshop. systems installed in your vehicle.
You could jeopardize the operating safety of your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels as well as accessories relevant to safety. Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
which have not been approved by Mercedes The Operator's Manual and Maintenance This could lead to malfunctions in safety- Booklet are important documents and should relevant systems, e.g. the brake system. Usee kept in the vehicle.
only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal quality. Only use tires, wheels and accessories that have been specifically approved for your vehicle.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to strict quality control. Every part has been specifically developed, manufactured or selected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts should therefore be used.
More than 300,000 different genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are available for Mercedes-Benz models.
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts for necessary service and repair work. In addition, strategically located parts delivery centers provide quick and reliable parts service.
Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) (▷ page 278) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benz parts.
Service and vehicle operation
Service and literature
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the warranties printed in the Service and Warranty Information booklet. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will exchange or repair any defective parts originally installed in the vehicle in accordance with the terms of the following warranties:
• New Vehicle Limited Warranty
z• Emission Systems Warranty
• Emission Performance Warranty
• California, Connecticut, Maine, Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island and Vermont Emission Control Systems Warranty
• State warranty enforcement laws (lemon laws)
Operator's Manual
Vehicle equipment
This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of going to print. Country-specific differences are possible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not feature all functions described here. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and functions. The equipment in your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations.
Information for customers in California
Under California law you may be entitled to replacement of your vehicle or a refund of purchase price or lease price, if after a reasonable number of repair attempts Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service facilities fail to one or more substantial defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered by its express warranty. During the period 18 months from original delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of 18,000 miles (approximately 29,000 km) on the odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, a reasonable number of repair attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if on more of the following occurs:
(1) the same substantial defect or malfunction results in a condition that likely to cause death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunction has been subject to report two or more times, and you have directed notified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in writing of the need for its repair,
(2) the same substantial defect or malfunction of a less serious nature than category (1) has been subject to repair four or more times and you have directly notified us in writing of the need for its repair, or
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason repair of the same or different substance defects or malfunctions for a cumulative total of more than 30 calendar days.
Please send your written notice to:
Customer Assistance Center
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
Maintenance
The Service and Warranty Booklet describes call the necessary maintenance work which should be done at regular intervals.
Always have the Service and Warranty Booklet with you when you bring the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The fix service advisor will record every service for you in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
Roadside Assistance
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program offers technical help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance Hotline are answered by our agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372)
(USA)
For additional information, refer to the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance" section in the Service and Warranty booklet (Canada). You will find both in your vehicle literature portfolio.
Change of address or change of ownership
In the event of a change of address, please send us the "Notification of Address Change" trial the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or Customer Service Center (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in contacting you in a timely manner should the need arise.
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave the entire literature in the vehicle so that it is available to the next owner.
If you have purchased a used car, please use the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or Customer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.
Vehicle operation outside the USA and Canada
If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign countries, please be aware that:
- service facilities or replacement parts may not be readily available.
- unleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalytic converter may not be available. Leaded fuel may cause damage to the catalytic converter.
- the fuel may have a considerably lower octane rating. Unsuitable fuel can cause engine damage.
Some Mercedes-Benz models are available for delivery in Europe through our European Delivery Program. For details, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to one of the following addresses.
In the USA
European Delivery Department
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
European Delivery Department
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Operating safety
in
Important safety notes
WARNING
If you do not have the prescribed service/maintenance work or any required repairs carried out, this can result in malfunctions or system failures. There is a risk of an accident. Always have the prescribed service/maintenance work as well as any required repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
WARNING
If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
WARNING
Modifications to electronic components, their software as well as wiring can impair their function and/or the function of other networked components. In particular, systems relevant to safety could also be affected. As a result, these may no longer function as intended and/or jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an accident and injury. Never tamper with the wiring as well as electronic components or their software. You should have all work to electrical and electronic equipment carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:
- the vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high curb or an unpaved road
- you drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a curb or a hole in the road
- a heavy object strikes the undercarriage or parts of the chassis
In situations like this, the body, the undercarriage, chassis parts, wheels or tires could be damaged without the damage being visible. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fall or, in the case of an accident, no longer withstand the strain they are designed to. If the underbody paneling is damaged, combustible materials such as leaves, grass or twigs can gather between the underbody and the underbody paneling. If these materials come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust system for an extended period, they can catch fire. In such cases, have the vehicle checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. If on continuing your journey you notice that driving safety is impaired, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. In such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Declarations of conformity
Vehicle components which receive and/or transmit radio waves
USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) These devices may not cause harmful interference, and 2) These devices must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment."
Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle comply with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) These devices may not cause interference, and (2) These devices must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device."
ailDiagnostics connection
The diagnostics connection is only intended for the connection of diagnostic equipment at a qualified specialist workshop.
WARNING
If you connect equipment to the diagnostics connection in the vehicle, it may affect the operation of the vehicle systems. As a result, the operating safety of the vehicle could be affected. There is a risk of an accident. Do not connect any equipment to a diagnostics connection in the vehicle.
WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. The operating and road safety of the vehicle is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter the driver's footwell. Install the floormats securely and as specified in order to ensure sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place floormats on top of one another.
If the engine is switched off and equipment on the diagnostics connection is used, the starter battery may discharge. Connecting equipment to the diagnostics connection can lead to emissions monitoring information being reset, for example. This may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of the next emissions test during the main inspection.
e Qualified specialist workshop
An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a qualified specialist workshop. It has the necessary specialist knowledge, tools and
qualifications to correctly carry out the work Canada
required on your vehicle. This is especially the Customer Relations Department
case for work relevant to safety.
Observe the notes in the Maintenance Booklet.
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 at
Always have the following work carried out an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:
• work relevant to safety
• service and maintenance work
- repair work
• alterations, installation work and modifications
• work on electronic components
Correct use
If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognize certain danger. Leave warning stickers in position.
Observe the following information when driving your vehicle:
• the safety notes in this manual
• the Technical Data section in this manua
- traffic rules and regulations
- laws and safety standards pertaining to motor vehicles
Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe me affect its safe operation, we urge you to contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the problem diagnosed and rectified. If the problem is not resolved, your satisfaction, please discuss the problem again with a Mercedes-Benz Center or contact us at one of the following addresses
In the USA
Customer Assistance Center
the Customer Relations Department
Reporting safety defects
USA only:
The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S.
Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966".
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go
to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Our Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street by SW., Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov
es. Limited Warranty
! Follow the instructions in this manual about the proper operation of your vehicle as well as about possible vehicle damage. Damage to your vehicle that arises from culpable contraventions against these instructions is not covered either by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by the • how far (if at all) the driver is depressing the New or Used-Vehicle Warranty. accelerator and/or brake pedal and
Data stored in the vehicle
Information about electronic data acquisition in the vehicle
(Including notice pursuant to California Code § 9951)
Please note that your vehicle is equipped v devices that can record vehicle systems da If your vehicle is equipped with mbrace (Canada: TELE AID), data is transmitted in event of an accident.
This information helps, for example, to test vehicle systems after an accident and to continually improve vehicle safety. Daimler AG can access these data and sub them:
• for safety research or vehicle diagnosis purposes
• with the consent of the vehicle owner
• on the instruction of prosecuting authorities
- for use in arbitration of disputes that involve Daimler AG, its subsidiaries or sales and service organizations
- as otherwise required or permitted by lawelectronic components is available. This vehicle is equipped with an event data following website:
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an is to record data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems
performed in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as during air bag deployment or when hitting a road obstacle. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
• how various systems in your vehicle are operating
- whether or not the driver and passenger seat belts are fastened
- how fast the vehicle is traveling This data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, can combine the EDR data with the type of personal identification data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, who have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Information on copyright
General information
its Information on license for free and open-source software used in your vehicle and its
lawelectronic components is available on the following website:
EDhttp://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource
Dashboard 26
Instrument cluster 27
Multifunction steering wheel 29
Center console 30
Overhead control panel 32
Door control panel 3:
Dashboard
text_image
Interior view of a Mercedes-Benz car dashboard with numbered component labels pointing to key parts.| Function Page | ||
| 1 | Cruise control lever 139 | |
| 2 | Steering wheel paddle shifters 125 | |
| 3 | Instrument cluster 27 | |
| 4 | Overhead control panel 32 | |
| 5 | PARKTRONIC display 142 | |
| 6 | Adjusts the steering wheel electrically | 89 |
| Function Page | ||
| 7 | Combination switch 98 | |
| 8 | Unlocks the trunk 73 | |
| 9 | Diagnostics connection 22 | |
| 10 | Opens the hood 218 | |
| 11 | Electric parking brake 133 | |
| 12 | Light switch 96 |
Instrument cluster
Overview
text_image
AMG PRND C 123,4 mile: 12657 ④ 10:54 20°F P54.32-8272-31| Function Page | ||
| 1 | Speedometer | |
| 2 | Upshift indicator 128 | |
| 3 | Tachometer 150 | |
| 4 | Engine oil temperature display | 150 |
| Function Page | ||
| 5 | Multifunction display 152 | |
| 6 | Fuel gauge |
At a glance
Warning and indicator lamps
text_image
1 2 3 4 5 6 BRAKE 150 80 40 20 220 240 70 123.4 mile: 12657 ⑧ 10:54 70°F P R N D C PARK PARK 12 11 10 P54.32-8273-31| Function Page | ||
| 1 | ESP® | 193 |
| 2 | Seat belts 191 | |
| 3 | Brakes (USA only) [1] Brakes (Canada only) | |
| 4 | High-beam headlamps 98 | |
| 5 | Low-beam headlamps 97 | |
| 6 | Turn signal 98 | |
| 7 | SRS 194 | |
| 8 | Check Engine | |
| 9 | ABS | 192 |
| Function Page | |
| 10 | Engine oil temperature 150 |
| 11 | Tire pressure 197 |
| 12 | Electric parking brake (USA only) (P) Electric parking brake (Canada only) |
| 13 | Reserve fuel 196 |
| 14 | SPORT handling mode 56 |
| 15 | ESP® OFF 55 |
Multifunction steering wheel
text_image
1 149.8 26.753 2 3 4 5 6 P46.10-31-17-31| Function Page | ||
| 1 | Multifunction display 152 | |
| 2 | COMAND with display; see the separate operating instructions | |
| 3 | Makes/accepts or rejects/ends a call 156+ - Increases/reduces the volumeMute | |
| 4 | Switches on the Voice Control System; see the separate operating instructions |
| Function Page | |
| 5 | Back or deactivates the Voice Control System |
| 6 | Selects a menu 151 Selects a submenu or scrolls through listsOK Confirms selections and hides display messages |
Center console
Upper section
text_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with numbered UI components and labeled controls| Function Page | ||
| 1 | Controls COMAND, see the separate operating instructions | |
| 2 | Adjusts AIRSCARF, left (Roadster only) 88 | |
| 3 | Retracts/extends rear spoiler (vehicles with AMG adaptive sport suspension system) 210 | |
| 4 | Hazard warning lamps 98 | |
| 5 | PARKTRONIC | 143 |
| Function Page | ||
| 6 | Adjusts AIRSCARF, right (Roadster only) 88 | |
| 7 | Seat heating, right 87 | |
| 8 | PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp 42 | |
| 9 | Operates dual-zone automatic climate control | 107 |
| 10 | Seat heating, left 87 |
Lower section
text_image
Diagram of car dashboard control panel with numbered components and a magnified inset showing the interior space.| Function Page | ||
| 1 | AMG E-SELECT selector lever 121 | |
| 2 | COMAND controller | |
| 3 | Stowage compartment 20112 V socket 203Ashtray 203Cigarette lighter 203 | |
| 4 | Stowage compartment with cup holder 201 | |
| 5 | Soft top switch (Roadster only) 79 | |
| 6 | Ignition lock (behind stowage space) 119 | |
| 7 | Calls up/stores AMG menu (SETUP) | 128 |
| Function Page | ||
| 8 | Adjusts AMG adaptive sport suspension system 140Retracts/extends rear spoiler (vehicles without AMG adaptive sport suspension system) 210 | |
| 9 | Activates/deactivates ESP®Activates/deactivates SPORT handling mode 56 | 56 |
| 10 | Start/Stop button | 119 |
| 11 | Selects the drive program | 126 |
| 12 | Parking lock button P | 121 |
Overhead control panel
text_image
Diagram of car interior with numbered component labels pointing to various parts of the dashboard and rearview.| Function Page | ||
| 1 | Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off | 99 |
| 2 | Switches the interior lighting on/off 100 | |
| 3 | Switches the automatic interior lighting control on/off | 99 |
| 4 | Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off | 99 |
| 5 | MB Info call button (mbrace system) | 207 |
| 6 | SOS SOS button (mbrace system) | 205 |
| Function Page | ||
| 7 | Rear-view mirror 90 | |
| 8 | Transmitter buttons for the garage door opener 212 | |
| 9 | Microphone for mbrace (emergency call system) telephone and the Voice Control System | |
| 10 | Roadside Assistance call button (mbrace system) 207 |
| Function Page | ||
| 7 | Rear-view mirror 90 | |
| 8 | Transmitter buttons for the garage door opener 212 | |
| 9 | Microphone for mbrace (emergency call system) telephone and the Voice Control System | |
| 10 | Roadside Assistance call button (mbrace system) 207 |
Door control panel
text_image
Diagram of a car interior showing labeled parts including a door, battery, and steering wheel with BMW logo| Function Page | ||
| 1 | Opens the door 69 | |
| 2 | Locks/unlocksthe vehicle 69 | |
| 3 | Selects the leftexterior mirror 90 | |
| 4 | Folds the exteriormirrors in/out electrically | 91 |
| Function Page | |
| 5 | Selects the right exterior mirror 90 |
| 6 | Adjusts the exterior mirrors 90 |
| 7 | Opens/closes the side windows 75 |
Useful information 36
Panic alarm 36
Occupant safety 36
Child restraint systems 5
Driving safety systems 54
Theft deterrent locking system .....
Useful information
This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.
i Please read the information on qualified specialist workshops (▷ page 22).
Panic alarm
text_image
① PAMC P80.00-2205-31▶ To activate: press PANIC button ① for approximately one second.
An alarm sounds and the exterior lightin flashes.
▶ To deactivate: press PANIC button ① again.
or
▶ Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock or
▶ Press the Start/Stop button.
The SmartKey must be in the vehicle.
Occupant safety
Important safety notes
WARNING
Modifications to or work improperly conducted on restraint system components or their wiring, as well as tampering with interconnected electronic systems, can lead to the restraint systems no longer functioning as intended.
Air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs), for example, could deploy inadvertently or fail to deploy in accidents although the deceleration threshold for air bag deployment is exceeded. Therefore, never modify the restraint systems. Do not tamper with electronic components or their software.
In this section, you will learn the most important facts about the restraint system components of the vehicle.
The restraint system consists of:
- Seat belts
- Child restraint systems
Additional protection is provided by:
• SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)
• Air bag system components with:
- PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
- Front-passenger seat with Occupant Classification System (OCS)
Although the systems are independent, their protective functions work in conjunction with each other. Not all air bags are always deployed in an accident.
For information on infants and children traveling with you in the vehicle restraint systems for infants and children, see "Children in the vehicle" (▷ page 51).
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) There is a malfunction if:
Introduction
SRS reduces the risk of occupants coming into contact with the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident. It can also reduce the effect of the forces to which occupants are subjected during an accident.
SRS consists of:
- the SRS warning lamp does not light up when the ignition is switched on
- the engine is running and the SRS warning lamp does not go out after a fe seconds
- the engine is running and the SRS warning lamp lights up again
• SRS warning lamp
- air bags
• air bag control unit (with crash sensors)
• Emergency Tensioning Devices
- seat belt force limiters
SRS warning lamp
WARNING
If SRS is malfunctioning, child restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at in the event of an accident with a high rate vehicle deceleration. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
Have SRS checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
SRS functions are checked regularly when you switch on the ignition and when the engine is running. Therefore, malfunctions can be detected in good time.
The SRS warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the engine is started.
The SRS components are in operational readiness when the 🐘️ SRS indicator lamp goes out while the engine is running.
Safety guidelines for seat belts, Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs) and air bags
WARNING
- Damaged seat belts or seat belts that have been subjected to stress in an accident must be replaced. Their anchoring points must also be checked. Only use seat belts installed or supplied by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
• Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling and regard for the environment. Check your national disposal guidelines. California residents, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.
• Air bags and ETDs are designed to function on a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETD that has deployed must be replaced.
• Do not pass seat belts over sharp edges. They could tear.
• Do not make any modification that could change the effectiveness of the seat belts.
- Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them. In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection.
- No modifications of any kind may be made to any components or wiring of the SRS.
- Do not change or remove any component or part of the SRS.
- Do not install additional trim material, seat covers, badges, etc. over the steering wheel hub, front-passenger front air bag
cover, outer sides of the seat backrests, door trim panels, or door frame trims.
- Do not install additional electrical/electronic equipment on or near SRS components and wiring.
- Keep area between air bags and occupants free of objects (e.g. packages, purses, umbrellas, etc.).
• Air bag system components will be hot after an air bag has inflated. Do not touch them. - Never place your feet on the instrument panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always keep both feet on the floor in front of the seat.
- Improper repair work on the SRS creates risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or causing unintended air bag deployment. Work on the SRS must therefore only be performed by qualified technicians. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
- For your protection and the protection of others, when scrapping the air bag unit or ETD, our safety instructions must be followed. These instructions are available from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
- Given the considerable deployment speed, required inflation volume, and the material of the air bags, there is the possibility of abrasions or other, potentially more serious injuries resulting from air bag deployment.
If you sell your vehicle, Mercedes-Benz strongly recommends that you inform the subsequent owner that the vehicle is equipped with SRS. Also, refer them to the applicable section in the Operator's Manual.
Air bags
Important safety notes
WARNING
Air bags are designed to reduce the potential of injury and fatality rates in certain situations:
- frontal impacts (driver's and front-passenger front air bags and knee bags) - side impacts (head bags and side impact air bags)
However, no system available today can completely eliminate injuries and fatalities. When the air bags are deployed, a small amount of powder temporarily comes out of the air bags. This powder generally does not constitute a health hazard and does not indicate that there is a fire in the vehicle. In order to prevent potential breathing difficulties, you should leave the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the vehicle, then get fresh air by opening a side window or door.
WARNING
In order to reduce the potential danger of injuries caused during the deployment of the front air bags, the driver and front passenger must always be correctly seated and wear their seat belts.
For maximum protection in the event of a collision, you must always be in the normal seat position with your back against the backrest. Fasten your seat belt and make sure that it is correctly positioned on your body.
As the air bag inflates with considerable speed and force, a proper seating position and correct positioning of the hands on the steering wheel will help to keep you at a s distance from the air bag. Occupants who a not wearing their seat belt, are not seated properly or are too close to the air bag can seriously injured or killed by an air bag as it inflates with great force instantaneously:
- sit with the seat belt fastened correctly and in a position that is as upright as possible with your back against the backrest.
- move the driver's seat as far back as possible, still permitting proper operation of vehicle controls. The distance from the center of the driver's chest to the center of the air bag cover on the steering wheel must be at least 10 inches(25 cm) or more. You should be able to accomplish this by adjusting the seat and steering wheel. If you have any difficulties, please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
- do not lean your head or chest close to the steering wheel or dashboard.
- only hold the steering wheel on the outside. Placing hands and arms inside the rim can increase the risk and potential severity of hand/arm injury when the driver front air bag inflates.
- adjust the front-passenger seat as far back as possible from the dashboard when the seat is occupied.
- Occupants, especially children, should never place their bodies or lean their heads in the area of the door or the seat where head bag or side impact air bag inflates. This could result in serious injuries or deaths should the head bag or side impact air bag be deployed. Always sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt properly and use an appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child.
If you sell your vehicle, it is important that you make the buyer aware of this safety information. Be sure to give the buyer this fOperator's Manual.
WARNING
There is a possibility of a head bag- or side impact air bag-related injury if occupants, especially children, are not properly seated or restrained when next to a head bag or side impact air bag that needs to deploy rapidly in a side impact in order to do its job.
To help avoid the possibility of injury, please follow these guidelines:
(1) Occupants, especially children, should never place their bodies or lean their heads in the area of the door or the seat where the head bag or side impact air bag inflates. This could result in serious injuries or death should the head bag or side impact air bag be deployed.
(2) Always sit as upright as possible, and use the seat belts properly. Make sure that children 12 years old and under use an appropriately infant restraint, toddler restraint or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child.
(3) Always wear seat belts properly.
If you believe that, even with the use of these guidelines, it would be safer for your passenger seat occupants to have the passenger side head bag or side impact air bag deactivated, then deactivation can be carried out upon your written request at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center at an additional cost.
Please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call the Customer Assistance Center (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372), or Customer Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100 for details.
Failure to follow these instructions can result The air bags are only deployed if the air bag in severe injuries to you or other occupants.control unit detects the need for deployment.
Only in the event of such a situation, will they are deployed:
air bags provide their supplemental protection.
The driver and passenger should always wear their seat belts. Otherwise it is not possible for the air bags to provide their supplement protection.
In case of other types of impacts and impacts below air bag deployment thresholds, air bags will not deploy. The driver and passenger
will then be protected to the extent possible by a properly fastened seat belt. A properly fastened seat belt is also needed to provide the best possible protection in a rollover. If the vehicle rolls over, the front air bags are generally not deployed. If the system detects high vehicle deceleration in a longitudinal direction, the front air bags are deployed.
Air bags provide additional protection; they are not, however, a substitute for seat bel All vehicle occupants must fasten their sea belts regardless of whether your vehicle is equipped with air bags or not.
It is important for your safety and that of passenger to have deployed air bags replaced and to have any malfunctioning air bags repaired. This will help to make sure the air bags continue to provide supplemental crash protection for occupants.
Front air bags
text_image
Interior view of a Mercedes-Benz car dashboard with labeled parts including steering wheel, dashboard, and infotainment system.Driver's air bag ① deploys in front of the steering wheel; front-passenger front air bag ② deploys in front of and above the box.
The front air bags increase protection for the driver's and front-passenger's head and chest.
• in the event of certain frontal impacts
- if the system determines that air bag
^ar deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt
• depending on whether the seat belt is being used
• independently of other air bags in the vehicle
• depending on whether the seat belt is being used • independently of other air bags in the vehicle
If the vehicle rolls over, the front air bags are generally not deployed. If the system detects high vehicle deceleration in a longitudinal direction, the front air bags are deployed.
Your vehicle has adaptive, two-stage front air bags. In the event of a collision, the air bag control unit evaluates the vehicle
deceleration. When the first deployment
threshold is reached, the front air bag is filled with enough propellant gas to reduce the risk of injuries. The front air bag is fully deployed if a second deployment threshold is exceeded within a few milliseconds.
The deployment of the front-passenger front air bag is also influenced by the weight category of the front passenger, which is determined by the Occupant Classification System (OCS) (▷ page 42).
The front air bags are not deployed in situations where a low impact severity is predicted. You will then be protected by the fastened seat belt.
The front-passenger front air bag will only be deployed if:
- the Occupant Classification System (OCS) has detected that the front-passenger seat is occupied
- the ☐PASS OFF indicator lamp on the center console is not lit
- the air bag control unit predicts a high-glove impact severity
Driver's/front-passenger knee bag
natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard and infotainment system (no visible text or symbols)Driver's knee bag ① deploys underneath steering column and front-passenger knee bag ② underneath the glove box. They deploy together with the front air bags. There are designed to operate together with the front air bags in frontal impacts if certain thresholds are exceeded. The knee bags operate at best in conjunction with correct positioned and fastened seat belts.
The driver and front-passenger knee bags enhance the level of protection against:
- knee injuries
- thigh injuries
- lower leg injuries
Side impact air bags
WARNING
The pressure sensors for side impact air by control are located in the doors. Do not modify any components of the doors or do trim panels including, for example, the addition of door speakers.
Improper repair work on the doors or the modification or addition of components to doors create a risk of rendering the side impact air bags inoperative or causing unintended air bag deployment. Work on the doors must therefore only be performed by qualified technicians. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
WARNING
Only use seat covers which have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model. Using other seat covers may interfere with or prevent the deployment of the side impact air bags. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for availability.
When deployed, the side impact air bags offer additional protection for the thorax of the vehicle occupants on the side of the vehicle on which the impact occurs. However, they do not protect the:
- head
- arms
natural_image
Interior view of a car showing seatbelt and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)Example: Coupe
Side impact air bags ① deploy next to the bagouter seat cushions.
The side impact air bags are deployed:
• on the side on which an impact occurs
- at the start of an accident with a high rate of lateral vehicle deceleration or acceleration, e.g. in a side impact
• independently of the use of the seat belt
• independently of the front air bags
• independently of the ETDs
If the vehicle rolls over, the side impact air bags are generally not deployed. They are deployed if the system detects high vehicle deceleration or acceleration in a lateral direction and determines that side impact air
bag deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt. Side impact air bags will not deploy in side impacts which do not exceed the system's preset deployment thresholds for lateral acceleration/deceleration. You will then be protected by the fastened seat belt. If the OCS detects that the front-passenger seat is not occupied and the front-passenger seat belt is not fastened (the belt tongue is not engaged in the seat belt buckle), the side impact air bag on the front-passenger side will not deploy. The side impact air bag on front-passenger side will deploy if the front-passenger seat belt is fastened, regardless of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied or not.
Head bags
The head bags enhance the level of protection for the head (but not chest or arms) of the vehicle occupants on the side of the vehicle on which the impact occurs.
natural_image
Interior view of a car showing the dashboard and side panel with directional arrows (no text or symbols)Example: Coupe
Headbags ① deploy in the side window and They are deployed:
• on the side on which an impact occurs
- at the start of an accident with a high of lateral vehicle deceleration or acceleration, e.g. in a side impact
- if the system determines that the vehicle occupants are offered additional protection to that provided by the seat b
• independently of the use of the seat belt
- independently of the ETDs - on the driver's side and passenger side, in the event of a vehicle rollover and if the system determines that air bag deployment can offer the vehicle occupants additional protection to that provided by the seat belt - independently of the front air bags
Head bags ① will not deploy in side impacts which do not exceed the system's preset deployment thresholds for lateral acceleration/deceleration. You will then be protected by the fastened seat belt. If the OCS has classified the front-passenger seat as unoccupied and the front-passenger of seat belt is not fastened, the head bag on the passenger side will not deploy. The head bag on the front-passenger side will deploy if the front-passenger seat belt is fastened, regardless of whether the front-passenger
seat is occupied or not.
Occupant Classification System (OCS)
How the Occupant Classification System works
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) categorizes the occupant on the front-passenger seat using a weight sensor. The front-passenger front air bag and the front-passenger knee bag are deactivated automatically for certain weight categories. The ✗PASS OFF AIR BAG indicator lamp shows you the current status. If the ✗PASS OFF indicator lamp lights up, the front-passenger front air bag and the front-passenger knee bag are disabled.
The system does not deactivate:
• the front-passenger side impact air bag
• the front-passenger head bag
• the Emergency Tensioning Devices
To be classified correctly, the front passeng must sit:
• with the seat belt fastened correctly
• in a position that is as upright as possib with their back against the seat backrest
• with their feet on the floor
If the front-passenger's weight is transferred to another object in the vehicle (e.g. by leaning on armrests), OCS may not be able approximate the occupant's weight category. In order to determine whether or not the front passenger has been detected, both the drive and the front passenger should observe the
i2 PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp.
If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover the seat cushion are damaged, have the necessary repair work carried out at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use seat accessories that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
WARNING
If the 📄2 🐘350 OFF indicator lamp lights up when the front-passenger seat is occupied by an adult or a larger person, ask the passenger to reposition themselves on the seat so that the 📄2 🐘350 OFF indicator lamp goes out.
In the event of a collision, the air bag contrunit will not allow front-passenger front airbag and front-passenger knee bag deployment when the OCS has classified the front-passenger occupant as weighing as much as or less than a typical 12-month-old child in a standard child restraint or if the front-passenger seat is classified as being unoccupied.
If OCS has detected that the front passenger weighs the same as or less than a typical 1 month-old child in a standard child restraint system, the PASS AIRBAC CFT indicator lamp lights up when the engine is started and remains I This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated.
If OCS determines that the front-passenger seat is unoccupied, the 2 PASS AIR BAG UP indicator lamp lights up once the engine has been started and remains lit. This shows that the front-passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bag are deactivated.
If OCS determines that the front passenger weighs more than a typical 12 month old child in a standard child restraint system and to classifies this as a small person (e.g. a teenager or small adult), the indicator lamp lights up for approximately 6 seconds when the engine is started.
Depending on occupant weight sensor readings from the seat, it will then remain illuminated or go out. If the ✗2 PASS AIR RAG OFF indicator lamp is illuminated, the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. With the ✗2 PASS AIR RAG OFF indicator lamp out, the front-passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bag are deactivated.
If the ☐PASS_OFF indicator lamp is illuminated, the front-passenger front air bag and the front-passenger knee bag are deactivated and are not deployed.
If the ☒ Pass OFF indicator lamp does not light up, the front-passenger air bag is enabled and will be deployed:
• in the event of certain frontal impacts
- if the impact exceeds a preset deployment threshold
• independently of the other air bags
If the front-passenger air bag is deployed, the rate of inflation is influenced by:
lit: the rate of vehicle deceleration as assessed by the air bag control unit
- the front passenger's weight category as determined by the OCS
For further information, see "Air bag display messages" (▷ page 171).
WARNING
Children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriate infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child.
The infant or child restraint must be properly secured with the vehicle's seat belt fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer's instructions.
Occupants, especially children, should always sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt properly and use an appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child.
Children can be killed or seriously injured by an inflating air bag. Note the following important information:
- Your vehicle is equipped with air bag technology designed to deactivate the front-passenger front air bag in your vehicle when the system senses the weight of a typical 12-month-old child or less along with the weight of a standard appropriate child restraint on the front-passenger seat.
- A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the front-passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the front-passenger front air bag inflates in a collision which could occur under some circumstances, even with the air bag technology installed in your vehicle.
- If you install a rear-facing child restraint on the front-passenger seat, make sure the indicator lamp is illuminated, indicating that the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. Should the indicator lamp not illuminate or go out while the restraint is installed, please check installation. Periodically check the
2 RASS OFF AIR BAG indicator lamp while driving to make sure the 2 RASS OFF AIR BAG indicator lamp is
illuminated. If the ☐F452 OFF indicator lamp goes out or remains out, do not transport a child on the front-passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the front-passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the front-passenger front air bag inflates.
- If you place a child in a forward-facing child restraint on the front-passenger seat:
- move the seat as far back as possible
- use the proper child restraint recommended for the age, size and weight of the child
- secure child restraint with the vehicle's seat belt according to the child seat manufacturer's instructions
- For children larger than a typical 12-month-old child, the front-passenger front air bag may or may not be activated.
If the driver's air bag deploys, this does not mean that the front-passenger front air bag will also deploy.
The OCS may have detected that the seat:
• is empty or occupied by a person with a weight of up to or less than that of a typical 12-month-old child seated in a standard
thechild restraint.
• is occupied by a small individual, such as a young teenager or a small adult.
• is occupied by a child in a child restraint system whose weight is greater than that of a typical 12-month-old child.
These are examples of when the OCS ^on deactivates the front-passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bag. Deactivation takes place although the collision fulfills the air criteria for deploying the driver's air bag.
text_image
PASS AIR BAG OFF P68.10-4167-31If the SmartKey has been removed from the ignition lock or the Start/Stop button has been set to position 0, the indicator lamp ① does not light up.
WARNING
If the red 🎨 SRS warning lamp in the instrument cluster and the 🎨 🎨 🎨 🎨 🎨 🎨 🎨 🎨 🎨 🎨 🎨 🎨 🎨 🎨 🎨 🎨 🎨 🎨 🎨 🎨 🎨 🎨 🎨 🎨 🎨 🎨 🎨 🎨 🎨 🎨 🎨 🎨 🎨 🎨
Only have the seat repaired or replaced at authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
In order to ensure proper operation of the bag system and OCS:
- Sit with the seat belt properly fastened in position that is as upright as possible with your back against the seat backrest.
- When seated, a passenger should not position him/herself in such a way as to cause the passenger's weight to be lifted from the seat cushion as this may result the OCS being unable to correctly approximate the passenger's weight category.
- Read and observe all warnings in this chapter.
System self-test
The ☒PASS OFF indicator lamp illuminates when you:
- turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock
- press the Start/Stop button once or twice. If an adult occupant is properly sitting on the passenger seat and the OCS classifies the occupant as an adult, the 2 PASS OFF indicator lamp illuminates and goes out again after approximately 6 seconds.
If the seat is not occupied and the OCS classifies the front passenger seat as being unoccupied, the 2 FADS AREA BAO OFF indicator lamp will illuminate and not go out.
WARNING
If the 2 indicator lamp does not illuminate, the system is not functioning. You must contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center before seating any child on the passenger seat.
For more information, see "Problems with the Occupant Classification System" (n page 46).
WARNING
Never place anything between seat cushion and child seat (e.g. a pillow), since it reduces the effectiveness of the OCS. The underside and rear side child restraint system must be placed entirely on the seat cushion and the backrest of the front-passenger seat backrest.
If necessary, adjust the tilt of the passenger in seat backrest.
An incorrectly mounted child seat could cause injuries to the child in case of an accident, instead of increasing protection for the child. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for installation of child restraint systems.
Problems with the occupant classification system
| Problem | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| The indicator lamp illuminates and remains illuminated. The person on the front-passenger seat: has the weight of a typical adult has been determined by the system not to be a child. | The OCS is malfunctioning. ▶ Have the OCS checked as soon as possible at an authori Mercedes-Benz Center. ▶ Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display (▷ page 171). |
WARNING
If the ☐PASS OFF indicator lamp illuminates and remains illuminated when the weight of a typical adult or someone larger than a small individual has been detected on the passenger seat, do not allow any occupant to use the passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
| Problem | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| The indicator lamp does not illuminate and/or does not remain illuminated.The front-passenger seat is:unoccupiedoccupied with a weight up to or less than a typical 12-month-old child in a standard child restraint system | The OCS is malfunctioning.Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and child seat.Check the installation of the child restraint system.Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight the seat.If the indicator lamp does not illuminate, have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Merce Benz Center. Do not transport a child on the front-passen seat as long as the OCS is not functioning.Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display (▶ page 171). |
WARNING
If the 2 FASS OF 3 indicator lamp does not illuminate or remains out with the weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a standard child restraint or less, or is unoccupied, on the front-passenger seat, do not transport a child on the front-passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
Exiting in an emergency (Coupe only
If the vehicle is lying on its roof after an accident, the hinge fasteners of the gullwing doors are released pyrotechnically. You will hear a bang if this is the case. After the fasteners have been released, the doors are forced outwards. Simultaneously, the door locks are unlocked. The SRS warning lamp lights up.
The hinge fasteners are only released when the control unit recognizes that certain conditions have been fulfilled, e.g. when the vehicle is in a stabilized position on its roof.
The doors can then be moved from the inside/outside by pulling the door handle.
Seat belts
Important safety notes
The use of infant or child restraints is by law in all 50 states, the District of Columbia, the U.S. territories and all Canadian provinces.
Even where this is not the case, all vehicle occupants should have their seat belts fastened when the vehicle is in motion.
i See "Children in the vehicle"
(▶ page 51) for further information on infants and children traveling in the vehicle as well as on child restraint systems.
WARNING
Always fasten your seat belt before driving o Always make sure your passenger is properly restrained. You and your passenger should always wear seat belts.
Failure to wear and properly fasten and position your seat belt considerably increases your risk of injuries and their likely severity in an accident.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries could be considerably more severe if you have not fastened your seat belt correctly. If you
hot fasten your seat belt, you are much more likely to collide with parts of the vehicle interior or be ejected from it. This may result in serious or fatal injury.
In the same crash, the possibility of serious or fatal injury is considerably reduced if you wear your seat belt properly. The air bags can only offer the intended protection if the occupants are wearing their seat belts properly.
WARNING
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat backrest in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous. You could slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under it, the seat belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a position that is as upright as possible and the seat belt is properly positioned on the body.
WARNING
Never let more people ride in the vehicle than there are seat belts available. Make sure everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate seat belt. Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time.
WARNING
Damaged seat belts or seat belts that have been subjected to stress in an accident must be replaced and their anchoring points must also be checked.
Only use seat belts which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Do not make any modifications to the seat belts. This can lead to unintended activation of the ETDs or to their failure to activate when necessary.
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them. In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection.
Have all work carried out only by qualified technicians. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Correct use of the seat belts
WARNING
USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY
- Seat belts can only work when used properly. Never wear seat belts in any other way than as described in this section, as that could result in serious injuries in the event of an accident.
- Each occupant should wear their seat belt at all times, because seat belts help reduce the likelihood of and potential severity of injuries in accidents, including rollovers. The integrated restraint system includes SRS (driver front air bag, knee bags, front-passenger front air bag, side impact air bags, head air bags), Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs) and seat belt force limiters. The system is designed to enhance the protection offered to properly belted occupants in certain frontal (front air bags, knee bags and ETDs) and side (side impact air bags, head air bags and ETDs) impacts which exceed preset deployment thresholds.
- Never wear the shoulder belt under your arm, across your neck or off your shoulder. In a frontal crash, your body would move too far forward. That would increase the chance of head and neck injuries. The seat belt would also apply too much force to the ribs or abdomen, which could severely injure internal organs such as your liver or spleen.
Adjust the seat belt so that the shoulder section is located as close as possible to the middle of the shoulder (it should not touch the neck).
- Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips and not across the abdomen. If the lap belt is positioned across your
abdomen, it could cause serious injuries in a crash.
- Never wear seat belts over rigid or breakable objects in or on your clothing, such as eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., as these might cause injuries. - Make sure the seat belt is always fitted snugly. Take special care of this when wearing loose clothing.
- Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time. Do not fasten a seat belt around a person and another person or other objects at the same time.
- Seat belts should not be worn twisted. In a crash, you would not have the full width of the seat belt to distribute impact forces. The twisted seat belt against your body could cause injuries.
- Pregnant women should also always use a lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion should be positioned as low as possible on the hips to avoid any possible pressure on the abdomen.
- Place the seat backrest in a position that is as upright as possible.
- Check your seat belt during travel to make sure it is properly positioned.
- Never place your feet on the instrument panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always keep both feet on the floor in front of the seat.
- When using a seat belt to secure infant restraints, toddler restraints, or children in booster seats, always follow the child seat manufacturer's instructions.
WARNING
Do not pass seat belts over sharp edges. They could tear.
Do not allow the seat belt to get caught in the door or in the seat adjustment mechanism. This could damage the seat belt.
Never attempt to make modifications to seat belts. This could impair the effectiveness of the seat belts.
Fastening seat belts
WARNING
Children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriately sized infant restraint, child restraint system, or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of child. For additional information, see the "Children in the vehicle" section.
A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and or the child is not properly secured in the restraint.
▶ Engage belt tongue ② in buckle ③.
▶ If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder section of the seat belt to tighten the belt across your body.
The seat belt on the front-passenger side is equipped with a special seat belt retractor to secure child restraint systems properly on the front-passenger seat. For further information on special seat belt retractors, see (▷ page 53).
For more information about releasing the seat belt with release button ④, see "Releasing seat belts" (▶ page 49).
text_image
Diagram of car seatbelt components with numbered labels and magnified inset showing internal connectorsExample: Coupe
▶ Adjust the seat and move the backrest an almost vertical position(▷ page 85).
▶ Pull the seat belt smoothly from belt sas guide ①.
▶ Without twisting it, guide the shoulder section of the seat belt across the middle of your shoulder and the lap section across your hips.
Releasing seat belts
▶ Press release button ④(▷ page 49) and guide belt tongue ②(▷ page 49) back towards belt sash guide ①(▷ page 49).
! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will be trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism. This could damage the door, the door trim panel and the seat belt. Damaged seat belts can no longer fulfill their protective function and must be replaced. Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Belt warning for the driver and front passenger
Regardless of whether the driver's and front-passenger seat belts have already been fastened, the seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds each time the engine is started. It then goes out once the driver and the front passenger have fastened their seat belts.
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened when the engine is started, an additional warning tone will sound. The warning tone switches off after approximately six seconds or once the driver's seat belt is fastened.
If after six seconds the driver or front passenger have not fastened their seat belts and the doors are closed:
Tensioning Device in the event of an accident, which will then need to be replaced.
- the □ seat belt warning lamp remains The ETDs tighten the seat belts in an accident, as long as either the driver's or front-pulling them close against the body. passenger's seat belt is not fastened The ETDs do not correct incorrect seat
- and if the vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph positions or incorrectly fastened seat belts. (25 km/h) once, the ☐ seat belt warning ETDs do not pull vehicle occupants back lamp lights up. Additionally, a warning tonewards the backrest.
sounds with increasing intensity for a maximum of 60 seconds or until the driver's and front passenger's seat belts are fastened.
Seat belt force limiters, when activated, are employed to help reduce the peak force exerted by the seat belts on occupants during a crash.
If the driver or front-passenger seat belt is unfastened while the vehicle is in motion, 坐 seat belt warning lamp lights up and warning tone sounds again.
The seat belt force limiters are synchronized with the front air bags, which take on a part of the deceleration force. Thus, the force exerted on the occupant is distributed over a
The warning tone ceases even if the driver greater area.
front-passenger seat belt has still not been. When the ignition is switched on, the ETDs fastened after 60 seconds. The □ seat belt cannot be triggered unless:
warning lamp stops flashing but remains lit.
After the vehicle comes to a standstill, the warning tone is reactivated and the belt warning lamp flashes again if the vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h).
The seat belt warning lamp only goes out if:
- the restraint systems are operational; see "SRS warning lamp" (▷ page 37) - the belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on each of the three-point seat belts
- the front-passenger seat is occupied and the belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on the front-passenger side
- both the driver and the front passenger have fastened their seat belts.
The ETDs are triggered depending on the type and severity of an accident:
or
• the vehicle is stationary and a door is o
- in the event of a head-on or rear-end collision, if the vehicle decelerates or accelerates rapidly in a longitudinal direction during the initial stages of the impact
For more information on the seat belt warning lamp, see "Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster, seat belt" (▷ page 191).
- in the event of a side impact, if the vehicle is subjected to high lateral acceleration/deceleration
Emergency Tensioning Devices, seat belt force limiters
- Coupe: in certain situations if the vehicle rolls over, and the system determines that it can provide additional protection
The seat belts are equipped with ETDs and seat belt force limiters.
- Roadster: if the vehicle rolls over
! If the co-driver's seat is unoccupied, do not insert the belt tongue into the buckle the co-driver's seat. This may otherwise lead to the triggering of the Emergency
If the Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs) are ^of triggered, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of smoke may also be released. Only
in rare cases will the bang affect your hearing with the weight of a standard appropriate. The smoke that is released generally does not child restraint on the front-passenger seat.
constitute a health hazard. The 🍒 SRS warning lamp lights up.
WARNING
Pyrotechnic ETDs that were activated must be replaced.
For your safety, when disposing of the pyrotechnic ETDs always follow our safety instructions. These are available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Child restraint systems
Children in the vehicle
Important safety notes
WARNING
Children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an appropriate infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child.
The infant or child restraint must be properly secured with the vehicle's seat belt fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer's instructions.
Occupants, especially children, should always sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt properly and use an appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child.
Children can be killed or seriously injured by an inflating air bag. Note the following important information:
- Your vehicle is equipped with air bag technology designed to deactivate the front-passenger front air bag in your vehicle when the system senses the weight of a typical 12-month-old child or less along
- A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the front-passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the front-passenger front air bag inflates in a collision which could occur under some circumstances, even with the air bag technology installed in your vehicle.
- If you install a rear-facing child restraint on the front-passenger seat, make sure the indicator lamp is illuminated, indicating that the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. Should the indicator lamp not illuminate or go out while the restraint is installed, please check installation. Periodically check the
PASS OFF indicator lamp while driving to make sure the PASS OFF indicator lamp is illuminated. If the PASS OFF indicator lamp goes out or remains out, do not transport a child on the front-passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the front-passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the front-passenger front air bag inflates.
- If you place a child in a forward-facing child restraint on the front-passenger seat:
- move the seat as far back as possible
- use the proper child restraint recommended for the age, size and weight of the child
- secure child restraint with the vehicle's seat belt according to the child seat manufacturer's instructions
- For children larger than a typical 12-month-old child, the front-passenger front air bag may or may not be activated.
WARNING
Infants and small children should never share a seat belt with another occupant. In the event of an accident, they could be crushed between the occupant and seat belt.
A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and or the child is not properly secured in the restraint.
hot, and the child could be burned on these parts.
Children that are too large for a child restra must travel in seats using normal seat belts.
WARNING
Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the
passenger compartment unless they are firmly secured in place.
Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo increases a child's risk of injury in the event of:
Position the shoulder belt across the chest and shoulder, not the face or neck. A boost seat may be necessary to achieve proper seat belt positioning for children over 41 lbs (18 kg) until they reach a height where a la shoulder belt fits properly without a booster seat.
, strong braking maneuvers
- sudden changes of direction
- an accident
When the child restraint is not in use, remove it from the vehicle or secure it with the seat belt to prevent the child restraint from becoming a projectile in the event of an accident.
an infant or child is traveling in the vehicle:
WARNING
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. Always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child restraint system, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. The children could:
- Secure the child with a child or infant seat restraint system appropriate to the age and weight of the child.
▶ Make sure that the infant or child is properly secured at all times while the vehicle is in motion.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you always properly secure all infants and children with a child or infant seat restraint system for the trip.
- injure themselves on parts of the vehicle
- be seriously or fatally injured through excessive exposure to extreme heat or c
- injure themselves or cause an accident with vehicle equipment that can be operated even if the SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock or removed from the vehicle, such as seat adjustment, steering wheel adjustment, or the memory function
The use of seat belts and infant and child restraint systems is required by law in:
- all 50 states
• the U.S. territories
• the District of Columbia
• all Canadian provinces - all 50 states
- the U.S. territories
- the District of Columbia
- all Canadian provinces
Infants and children must always be seated in an appropriate infant or child restraint system recommended for the size and weight of the child. The infant or child restraint system must be properly secured with a three-point seat belt in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
If children open a door, they could injure ot persons or get out of the vehicle and injure themselves or be injured by following traffic.
infant or child restraint systems must meet the following standards:
Do not expose the child restraint system to direct sunlight. The child restraint system's metal parts, for example, could become very
• U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225
• Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210.2
Confirmation that the child restraint systemActivating the special seat belt retractor:
corresponds to the standards can be found on an instruction label on the child restraint system. This confirmation can also be found in the installation instructions that are included with the child restraint system.
Always read and follow the manufacturer's instructions when using an infant or child restraint system or booster seat.
Observe the warning labels in the vehicle interior or on the infant or child restraint.
Special seat belt retractor
WARNING
If you release the seat belt when driving, the special seat belt retractor is deactivated.
The released seat belt cannot be engaged again while driving, because the inertia reel pulls in the seat belt a small distance. The child restraint system is no longer properly secured. There is an increased risk of serious injury or even fatal injury.
Always keep the seat belt of the activated special seat belt retractor engaged when driving.
The seat belt on the front-passenger side is equipped with a special seat belt retractor.
When enabled, the special seat belt retractor ensures that the seat belt does not slacken once the child seat is secured.
Installing a child restraint system:
▶ Always comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions.
▶ Pull the seat belt smoothly from the seat belt retractor.
▶ Engage the seat belt tongue in the belt buckle.
Pull the seat belt out fully and let the seat belt retractor retract it again.
While the seat belt is retracting, you should hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat belt retractor is activated.
Push down on the child restraint system to take up any slack.
Removing a child restraint system/ deactivating the special seat belt retractor:
▶ Always comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions.
▶ Press the seat belt release button and guide the belt tongue to the belt outlet. The special seat belt retractor is deactivated.
Installing child restraint systems
Observe the "Important safety notes" section ( page 51).
The Top Tether anchorage is installed behind the front-passenger seat.
text_image
1 ↑ P91.40-3149-31▶ Slide the front-passenger seat forward.
Remove cover ① from the Top Tether anchorage in the direction of the arrow.
text_image
P91.20-2245-31▶ Position Top Tether belt ④. Comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions when doing so.
▶ Hook Top Tether hook ③ into Top Tethe anchorage ②.
Ensure that:
- Top Tether hook ③ is hooked into Top Tether anchorage ② as shown.
- Top Tether belt ④ is not twisted.
When Top Tether hook ③ is connected, the child restraint system can be secured.
▶ Install the child restraint system.
▶ Tension Top Tether belt ④. Comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions when doing so.
The child restraint system with Top Tether belt ④ has been removed:
▶ Slide cover ① onto Top Tether anchorage ②.
Driving safety systems
Overview of driving safety systems
In this section, you will find information abo the following driving safety systems:
• ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
• BAS (Brake Assist System)
- ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
• EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)
• ADAPTIVE BRAKE
Important safety notes
If you fail to adapt your driving style or become distracted, the driving safety systems can neither reduce the risk of accident nor override the laws of physics. Driving safety systems are merely aids designed to assist driving. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully.
The driving safety systems described only work as effectively as possible when there is adequate contact between the tires and the road surface. Please pay special attention to the notes on tires, recommended minimum tire tread depths, etc. (▶ page 248).
In wintry driving conditions, always use winter tires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snow chains. Only in this way will the driving safety systems described in this section work as effectively as possible.
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Important safety notes
i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (▷ page 54).
WARNING
If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when braking. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely impaired. Additionally, further driving safety systems are deactivated. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents.
Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems, including driving safety systems, will also become inoperative. Observe the information
on the ABS warning lamp (▶ page 192) and The brakes will function as usual once you display messages which may be shown in the lease the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. instrument cluster (▶ page 165).
ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way
that the wheels do not lock when you bra
This allows you to continue steering the vehicle when braking.
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
General notes
ABS works from a speed of about
5 mph(8 km/h) upwards, regardless of ro
i Observe the "Important safety notes"
surface conditions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, even if you only brake gently.
d- section (▷ page 54).
The warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is swit on. It goes out when the engine is runnin
ESP® monitors driving stability and traction, i.e. power transmission between the tires and the road surface.
Braking
▶ If ABS intervenes: continue to depress brake pedal vigorously until the braking situation is over.
^1 ESP ^ detects that the vehicle is deviating from the direction desired by the driver, one or more wheels are braked to stabilize the vehicle. The engine output is also modified to keep the vehicle on the desired course within physical limits. ESP assists the driver when pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ^ ESP can also stabilize the vehicle during braking.
▶ To make a full brake application:
depress the brake pedal with full force.
If ABS intervenes when braking, you will a pulsing in the brake pedal.
The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions, and functions as a reminder to take extra care while driving.
ETS (Electronic Traction System)
i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (▷ page 54).
dTraction control is part of ESP
Traction control brakes the drive wheels individually if they spin. This enables you to pull away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for example if the road surface is slippery on one side.
Traction control remains active, even if you deactivate ESP®.
BAS (Brake Assist System)
i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (▷ page 54).
WARNING
If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance in an emergency braking situation is increased. There is a risk of an accident. In an emergency braking situation, depress the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
BAS operates in emergency braking situations. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS automatically boosts the braking force, thus shortening the stopping distance.
Important safety notes
WARNING
If ESP ^ is malfunctioning, ESP ^ is unable to stabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driving safety systems are deactivated. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident.
Drive on carefully. Have E ^® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
! Switch the ignition off when: You can select between the following states
• the electric parking brake is using a brake dynamometer.
being tested of
- the vehicle is being towed with the rear-SPORT handling mode is activated.
axle raised.
- ESP® is activated.
• SPORT handling mode is activated.
ESP:
- ESP® is deactivated.
Application of the brakes by ESP may otherwise destroy the brake system.
When SPORT handling mode is activated, the SPORT warning lamp lights up in the instrument panel.
When ESP ^ is deactivated, the OFF and warning lamps light up in the instrument panel.
Observe the information on warning lamps (▷ page 193) and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster (▷ page 170).
i Only use wheels with the recommended tire sizes. Only then will ESR function properly.
Characteristics of ESP
ESP ^® is activated automatically when the engine is started.
If ESP® intervenes, the ESP warning lamp flashes in the instrument cluster.
If ESP® intervenes:
▶ Do not deactivate ESPunder any circumstances.
▶ Only depress the accelerator pedal as as necessary when pulling away.
▶ Adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions.
Deactivating/activating ESP®
Important safety notes
i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (▷ page 54).
- ESP® is deactivated.
WARNING
When SPORT handling mode is activated, there is a greater risk of skidding and accidents.
Only activate SPORT handling mode in the situations described in the following.
WARNING
If you deactivate ESP, ESP no longer stabilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
Only deactivate ESP in the situations described in the following.
In the following situations, it may be better to activate SPORT handling mode or deactivate ESP®:
- when using snow chains
- in deep snow
• on sand or gravel - when driving on designated roads when the vehicle's own oversteering and understeering characteristics are desired
Driving in SPORT handling mode or without ESP® requires an extremely qualified and experienced driver.
i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations described above no longer apply. ESPAll otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin.
! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an extended period with ESPdeactivated. You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.
i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (▷ page 54).
Deactivating/activating ESP®
text_image
1 OFF P54.25-8725-31▶ To activate SPORT handling mode:
briefly press button ①.
The SPORT handling mode warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. The SPORT handling mode message appears in the multifunction display.
▶ To deactivate SPORT handling mode:
briefly press button ①.
The SPORT handling mode warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. ESR activated.
▶ To deactivate ESP press button ①.
The ESP OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. The OFF message appears in the multifunction display.
▶ To activate ESP when SPORT handling mode is activated or ESPs deactivated, press button ①.
The ESP OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The ON message appears in the multifunction display.
Characteristics of activated SPORT handling mode
SPORT handling mode raises the intervention threshold for stabilizing the vehicle. This allows for a sportier driving style on designated race circuits and may in certain situations improve the traction in comparison with ESP®.
If SPORT handling mode is activated and one or more wheels start to spin, the warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. ESP only stabilizes the vehicle to a limited degree.
When SPORT handling mode is activated:
- ESP® only improves driving stability to a limited degree.
- traction control is still activated.
- ESP® still provides support when you brake firmly.
- engine torque is only restricted to a limited degree, and the drive wheels are able to spin. The spinning wheels produce a cutting effect for better traction.
Characteristics when ESRs deactivated
If ESP ^ is deactivated and one or more wheels start to spin, the warning lamp in the instrument cluster does not flash. In such situations, ESP ^ will not stabilize the vehicle. If you deactivate ESP.
- ESP® no longer improves driving stability.
- engine torque is no longer limited and the drive wheels are able to spin. The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting action for better traction.
- traction control is still activated.
- ESP® still provides support when you brake firmly.
EBD (electronic brake force distribution)
i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (▷ page 54).
WARNING
If EBD has malfunctioned, the rear wheels can still lock, e.g. under full braking. This
increases the risk of skidding and an accident.
You should therefore adapt your driving style to the different handling characteristics. Have
the brake system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Observe information regarding indicator and warning lamps (▷ page 192) as well as display messages (▷ page 166).
EBD monitors and controls the brake pressure on the rear wheels to improve driving stability while braking.
ADAPTIVE BRAKE
i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (▷ page 54).
ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety and offers increased braking comfort. In addition to the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE also features the hill start assist function (▷ page 121).
Theft deterrent locking system
Immobilizer
The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the being started without the correct SmartKey.alarm system is armed and you open:
When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone can start the vehicle if a valid SmartKey has been left inside the vehicle.
▶ To activate: while the engine is running, turn the Start/Stop button to key position 0 (▶ page 119). The engine stops.
or
▶ Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
▶ To deactivate: turn the Start/Stop button to key position 2(▷ page 119) without depressing the brake pedal.
The immobilizer is always deactivated when you start the engine. In the event that the engine cannot be started when the starter battery is fully charged, the immobilizer may be faulty.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
ATA (anti-theft alarm system)
text_image
1 PASS 2 AIR BAG P54.25-9207-31▶ To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey.
Indicator lamp ① flashes. The alarm system is armed after approximately 15 seconds.
▶ To disarm: unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey.
A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the alarm system is armed and you open:
- a door
- the trunk lid
• the hood
• Roadster: the glove box
• Roadster: a compartment in the center console
- the vehicle with the mechanical key
The alarm is not switched off, even if you close the open door that triggered it, for example.
To stop the alarm: press the Start/Stop button in the center console. The SmartKey must be inside the vehicle.
or
▶ Press the ⬤ or ⭕ button on the SmartKey.
or
▶ Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock The alarm is switched off.
If the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, the mbrace emergency call system (USA only) or Tele Aid system (Canada only) initiates a call to the Customer Assistance Center automatically. The mbrace emergency call system initiates the call if:
- you have subscribed to the Tele Aid service.
- the Tele Aid service has been activated properly.
- the required mobile phone, power supply and GPS are available.
Tow-away alarm
Function
Disarming
text_image
1 OFF 2 P54.25-8165-31Safety
▶ Select key position 0 with the Start/Stop button. or
Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
▶ Press button ①. Indicator lamp ② lights up briefly.
▶ Lock the vehicle with the SmartKey. The tow-away alarm is disarmed.
An audible and visual alarm is triggered if Ybertow-away alarm remains deactivated vehicle's angle of inclination is altered while until the vehicle is unlocked and locked again. the tow-away alarm is armed. This can occur to prevent a false alarm, disarm the tow-away if the vehicle is jacked up on one side, for alarm manually if your vehicle: example.
Arming
▶ Make sure that:
- the doors are closed.
• the trunk lid is closed.
Only then is the tow-away alarm armed.
▶ Lock the vehicle with the SmartKey. The tow-away alarm is armed after approximately 30 seconds.
• is being transported
- is being loaded onto a ferry or car transporter, for example
- is parked on a movable surface, e.g. in a split-level garage
Deactivating
▶ Unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey. The tow-away alarm is deactivated automatically.
Useful information 62
SmartKey 62
Doors 68
Trunk 72
Side windows 75
Soft top (Roadster) 78
Useful information
This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.
i Please read the information on qualified specialist workshops (▷ page 22).
SmartKey
Key function
General notes
i USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
- This device may not cause harmful interference, and
- this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
The Product label with FCC ID and IC certification number can be found in the battery case of the SmartKey.
Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
- This device may not cause harmful interference, and
- this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
The Product label with FCC ID and IC certification number can be found in the battery case of the SmartKey.
locking/unlocking centrally
The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks:
- the doors
- the trunk lid
• the fuel filler flap
• Roadster only: the glove box - Roadster only: the stowage compartment under the armrest
WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could:
- open the doors, thus endangering other people or road users.
• get out and disrupt traffic.
• operate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they:
- release the parking brake.
- shifting the automatic transmission out of park position P
- Start the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children.
WARNING
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. Always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child restraint system, and do not give them access to an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. They could:
- injure themselves on vehicle parts
- be seriously or fatally injured by extreme heat or cold
- injure themselves or have an accident with vehicle equipment that may still be in operation even after the SmartKey has been removed from the ignition, such as seat adjustment, steering wheel adjustment or memory function.
If children open a door, they could cause severe or even fatal injury to other persons; they get out of the vehicle, they could injure themselves when doing so or be seriously or even fatally injured by any passing traffic.
Do not expose the child restraint system to direct sunlight. The child restraint system's metal parts, for example, could become very hot, and a child could be burned on these parts.
WARNING
If you attach heavy or large objects to the SmartKey, the SmartKey could be unintentionally turned in the ignition lock. T could cause the engine to be switched off. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings before inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
text_image
P80.35-2451-31 ① ② ③ ④① To lock the vehicle
② To unlock the trunk lid
③ To unlock the vehicle
The turn signals flash once when unlocking and three times when locking.
When it is dark, the surround lighting also comes on if it is activated in the on-board computer (▷ page 159).
▶ To unlock centrally: press the ☐ button.
If you do not open the vehicle within or approximately 40 seconds of unlocking:
• the vehicle is locked again.
- the anti-theft alarm system is armed again.
To lock centrally: press the 🔒 button.
Changing the settings of the locking system
You can change the setting of the locking system in such a way that only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked. This is useful if you frequently travel on your own.
▶ To change the setting: press and hold down the 📊 and 🔒 buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp (▶ page 65) flashes twice.
! Keep the SmartKey away from strong magnetic fields. Otherwise, the remote control function could be affected.
Strong magnetic fields can occur in the vicinity of powerful electrical installations.
The SmartKey now functions as follows:
▶ To unlock the driver's door: press the button once.
▶ To unlock centrally: press the button twice.
▶ To lock centrally: press the 🔒 button.
Restoring the factory settings
▶ Press the 📋 and 🔒 buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp flashes twice.
Mechanical key
General notes
If the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked with the SmartKey, use the mechanical key.
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered ( page 58).
There are several ways to turn off the alarm:
▶ Press the ⬤ or ⬤ button on the SmartKey.
or
▶ Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
▶ To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
Removing the mechanical key
text_image
P80.20-3612-31▶ Push release catch ① in the direction of the arrow and at the same time remove mechanical key ② from the SmartKey.
SmartKey battery
Important safety notes
WARNING
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substances. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal injury.
Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately.
Environmental note
Batteries contain dangerous substances. It is against the law to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and recycled to protect the environment.
Dispose of batteries in an environmentally friendly manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or a special collection point for used batteries.
The SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling and regard for the environment. National guidelines must be observed during disposal.
In California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/
HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/
index.cfm.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the batteries replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
Checking the battery
text_image
P80.35-2449-31▶ Press the 🔍 or 🔍 button.
The SmartKey battery is working properly if battery check lamp ① lights up briefly.
If battery check lamp ① does not light up briefly during the test, the SmartKey battery is discharged.
▶ Change the battery (▷ page 65).
If the SmartKey battery is checked within the signal reception range of the vehicle, pressing the ☐ or ☑ button:
- locks or
- unlocks the vehicle
You can get a battery at any qualified specialist workshop.
▶ Press mechanical key ② into the opening in the SmartKey in the direction of the arrow until battery tray cover ① opens. Do not hold the cover closed while doing so.
natural_image
3D diagram of a mechanical component with a numbered callout (3) and label 'if', no readable text or symbols beyond the label.Remove the cover of the battery tray.
Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against you palm until battery ③ falls out.
▶ Insert the new battery with the positive terminal facing upwards. Use a lint-free in cloth to do so.
▶ Insert the front tabs of the battery tray's cover first, and then press to close it.
▶ Check the function of all SmartKey buttons on the vehicle.
Replacing the battery
▶ Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (▷ page 64).
You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.
text_image
① ② P80.35-2421-31| Problems with the SmartKey | |
| Problem | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| You cannot lock or unlock the vehicle using the SmartKey. | The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.▶ Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door handle from close range. Try to unlock or lock the vehicle again.If this does not work:▶ Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (▷ page 64).▶ Check the SmartKey battery and replace it if necessary (▷ page 65). |
| The SmartKey is faulty.▶ Lock or unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (▷ page 64).▶ Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop. | |
| You have lost a SmartKey. | ▶ Have the SmartKey canceled at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.▶ Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.▶ If necessary, have the locks changed as well. |
| You have lost the mechanical key. | ▶ Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.▶ If necessary, have the locks changed as well. |
| The engine cannot be started using KEYLESSGO. The SmartKey is in the vehicle. | A door is open. Therefore, the SmartKey cannot be detected as easily.▶ Close the door and try to start the vehicle again. |
| There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.▶ Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock. | |
| Problem | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| The engine cannot be started using the SmartKey. | The on-board voltage is too low.►Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior lighting, and try to start the engine again.►Remove the SmartKey and reinsert it into the ignition lock.►Start the engine within 30 seconds of inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock.►Repeat if necessary.If this does not work:►Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (▷ page 236).or►Jump-start the vehicle (▷ page 240).or►Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
| The SmartKey cannot be turned in the ignition lock. | The SmartKey has been in position 0 for a considerable time.►Remove the SmartKey and reinsert it into the ignition lock.►Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (▷ page 236).►Start the engine. |
| The on-board voltage is too low.►Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior lighting, and try to turn the SmartKey again.If this does not work:►Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (▷ page 236).or►Jump-start the vehicle (▷ page 240).or►Consult a qualified specialist workshop. | |
Doors
Important safety notes
WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle they could:
- open the doors, thus endangering other people or road users.
• get out and disrupt traffic.
• operate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they:
- release the parking brake.
- shifting the automatic transmission out of park position P
- Start the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children.
they get out of the vehicle, they could injure themselves when doing so or be seriously or even fatally injured by any passing traffic.
Do not expose the child restraint system to direct sunlight. The child restraint system's metal parts, for example, could become very hot, and a child could be burned on these parts.
WARNING
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.
Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping before the journey.
Unlocking and opening the doors from the outside
WARNING
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. Always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child restraint system, and do not give them access to an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. They could:
- injure themselves on vehicle parts
- be seriously or fatally injured by extreme heat or cold
- injure themselves or have an accident with vehicle equipment that may still be in operation even after the SmartKey has been removed from the ignition, such as the seat adjustment, steering wheel adjustment or memory function.
If children open a door, they could cause severe or even fatal injury to other persons; if
Coupe
! The doors swing upwards and out when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the vehicle.
text_image
ss ed ent ① P72.10-3766-31▶ To open the door: point the SmartKey towards door handle ①.
▶ Press the 📊 button on the SmartKey. Door handle ① moves out.
▶ Lift the door by door handle ① and swing it up as far as it will go.
▶ To close the door: pull the door downwards by the outer edge or the interior door handle. Swing the door down gently and allow it to engage in the lower position.
▶ Lock the vehicle with the SmartKey if necessary (▷ page 62).
text_image
Diagram of car interior components with numbered labels pointing to key parts like seat, door, and seatbelt.Roadster
▶ To open the door: point the SmartKey towards door handle.
▶ Press the button on the SmartKey.
The door is unlocked and can be opened.
▶ Pull the door handle.
Unlocking and opening doors from the inside
Coupe
You can only open a door from the inside is unlocked.
The vehicle locks the doors automatically if you drive faster than 9 mph (15 km/h).
The doors are automatically unlocked after journey if you switch off the engine.
▶ To unlock the door manually: press the ☐ button of central locking ③. or
▶ Pull locking knob ① upwards.
▶ To open the door: pull handle ②.
▶ Swing the door upwards as far as it will go.
▶ To close the door: pull the door down by handle ④.
▶ Allow the door to engage in the lower position.
▶ To lock the door manually: press the ☐ button of central locking ③. or
▶ Push locking knob ① downwards.
if it Roadster
ifYou can open a door from inside the vehicle even if it has been locked.
Only open the door when the traffic situation permits.
! The doors swing upwards and out when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the vehicle.
text_image
is ① ② P72.10-3B68-31Doors
▶ Pull door handle ②. If the door is locked, locking knob ① up. The door is unlocked and can be opened.
You can open a door from inside the vehicle open if it has been locked. Only open the door when the traffic situation permits.
If the vehicle has been locked with the central locking button:
When a door is opened, the side window on that side opens slightly. When the door is closed, the side window closes again.
and the SmartKey is set to its factory setting, the entire vehicle is unlocked if a door is opened from the inside.
! The side windows will not open/close if the battery is discharged or if the side windows have iced up. It will then not be possible to close the door. Do not attempt to force the door closed. You could otherwise damage the door or the side window.
and the SmartKey is set to an individual setting, only the door that is opened from inside the vehicle is unlocked.
Automatic locking feature
Coupe
Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside
You can only open a door from the inside if it is unlocked.
The vehicle locks the doors automatically if you drive faster than 9 mph (15 km/h).
The doors are automatically unlocked after a journey if you switch off the engine.
You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle from the inside. This feature may be useful for example, you wish to unlock the front-passenger door from the inside or lock the vehicle before you pull away.
Coupe: the central locking/unlocking button does not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap.
Roadster: the central locking/unlocking button does not lock or unlock the fuel fill flap or the stowage compartments, such as the glove box.
Roadster
The vehicle is locked automatically when the ignition is switched on and the vehicle's wheels are moving at a speed in excess of 9 mph (15 km/h). There is therefore a risk of being locked out when the vehicle is being pushed, towed or tested on a dynamometer.
text_image
P54 25-8608-31
text_image
P54,25-8608-3)▶ To lock: press button ②. If both doors are closed, the vehicle locks.
▶ To unlock: press button ①.
▶ To deactivate: press and hold button ① <s. for about five seconds until a tone sounds.
▶ To activate: press and hold button ② for about five seconds until a tone sounds.
If you press one of the two buttons and Pull the handle out as far as it will go. do not hear a tone, the relevant setting has wing the door upwards by the handle. already been selected.
You can also switch the automatic locking function on and off using the on-board computer (▷ page 159).
Unlocking the driver's door (mechanical key)
If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked with the SmartKey, use the mechanical key. If you use the mechanical key to unlock and open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered (▷ page 58).
▶ Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (▷ page 64).
▶ Insert the mechanical key into the lock the driver's door as far as it will go.
Coupe
text_image
① ③ ② P72.10-3756-31▶ To unlock: insert the mechanical key into the lock of the driver's door as far as it go.
▶ Turn the mechanical key clockwise to position 2.
The door is unlocked.
▶ Turn the mechanical key back and remove it.
▶ To open the door: press button ①. The handle moves out slightly from the door.
Roadster
text_image
with and 1 P72.10-3889-31▶ Turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise to position 1.
The door is unlocked.
▶ Turn the mechanical key back and remove it.
▶ Insert the mechanical key into the SmartKey.
Locking the vehicle (mechanical key)
If the vehicle can no longer be locked with the SmartKey, use the mechanical key.
Coupe
text_image
to will 1 3 2 P72.10-3756-31① Button for extending the handle
▶ To lock: lock the front-passenger door manually from the inside (▷ page 69).
Leave the vehicle and close the driver's door.
Trunk
▶ Insert the mechanical key into the lock of Make sure that the doors and the trunk lid the driver's door as far as it will go. are locked.
▶ Turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise▶ Insert the mechanical key into the to position 3. SmartKey.
The door is locked.
▶ Turn the mechanical key back and remove it.
▶ Check that both doors are locked.
If you lock the vehicle as described above, the fuel filler flap is not locked. The anti-theft alarm system is not armed.
If you lock the vehicle as described above the fuel filler flap is not locked. The anti-theft alarm system is not armed.
Trunk
Important safety notes
Roadster
▶ Open the driver's door.
▶ Close the front-passenger door and the trunk lid.
▶ Press the locking button (▷ page 70).
▶ Check that the locking knob is in the low position on the front-passenger door. Press the locking knob down by hand, if necessary.
▶ Close the driver's door.
▶ Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (▷ page 64).
▶ Insert the mechanical key into the lock the driver's door as far as it will go.
text_image
1 P72.10-3890-31▶ Turn the mechanical key clockwise as far as it will go to position 1.
▶ Turn the mechanical key back and remove it.
WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of poisoning.
Always switch off the engine before opening the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid open.
WARNING
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. Always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child restraint system, and do not give them access to an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. They could:
- injure themselves on vehicle parts
- be seriously or fatally injured by extreme heat or cold
- injure themselves or have an accident with vehicle equipment that may still be in operation even after the SmartKey has been removed from the ignition, such as the seat adjustment, steering wheel adjustment or memory function.
If children open a door, they could cause severe or even fatal injury to other persons; if they get out of the vehicle, they could injure
themselves when doing so or be seriously or even fatally injured by any passing traffic.
Do not expose the child restraint system to direct sunlight. The child restraint system's metal parts, for example, could become very hot, and a child could be burned on these parts.
Opening/closing the trunk
Opening/closing from outside
Opening
▶ Press the 📋 button on the SmartKey. The trunk lid opens slightly.
WARNING
Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the passenger compartment or trunk unless they are firmly secured in place.
Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo increases a child's risk of injury in the event of
• strong braking maneuvers
- sudden changes of direction
- an accident
natural_image
Front view of a Mercedes-Benz car with a blue arrow pointing to the grille (no visible text or symbols)▶ Reach into the gap and pull up the trunk lid.
! The temperature in the trunk may be hit For this reason, do not store any temperature-sensitive objects in the trunk.
! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the trunk lid.
Coupe: to fully open the trunk lid, a minimum height of 5.5 ft (1.68 m) from the ground is necessary.
Roadster: to fully open the trunk lid, a minimum height of 5.7 ft (1.75 m) from the ground is necessary.
The trunk lid can be:
- opened automatically from outside
- opened automatically from inside
- locked separately
- unlocked with the mechanical key
- opened with the emergency release button
Closing
text_image
is num is P72.20-2999-31▶ Push the trunk lid down until it engages. Use handle ① to pull down the trunk lid if necessary.
▶ If necessary, lock the vehicle with the button on the SmartKey.
Opening the trunk from inside the n vehicle
You can open the tailgate from the driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary.
natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with a close-up of the right-hand side showing a touchscreen switch (no text or symbols visible)▶ Press trunk lid remote control button ① The trunk lid opens slightly.
Locking the trunk separately
You can lock the trunk separately. If you unlock the vehicle centrally, the trunk remains locked and cannot be opened.
▶ Close the trunk lid.
▶ Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (▷ page 64).
natural_image
Close-up of a car interior showing a component with a numbered annotation (1) and an arrow pointing to a detail, no readable text or symbols present.▶ Insert the mechanical key fully into trunk lid lock ① in the rear compartment of the center console.
▶ Turn the mechanical key clockwise as far as possible.
▶ Remove the mechanical key.
▶ Check that the trunk remains locked when you press on the trunk lid remote control button.
Unlocking the trunk (mechanical key)
If the trunk can no longer be unlocked with the SmartKey:
▶ Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (▷ page 64).
natural_image
Close-up of a mechanical component with a magnified inset showing a numbered feature (no readable text or symbols)▶ Insert the mechanical key fully into trunk lid lock ① in the center console in the vehicle interior.
▶ Turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise as far as possible.
The trunk lid opens slightly.
Trunk emergency release
You can open the trunk lid from inside the vehicle with the emergency release button.
text_image
① P88.50-2997-31▶ Press emergency release button ① briefly. The trunk lid unlocks and opens slightly.
▶ Push the trunk lid upwards to open it completely.
The trunk lid can be unlocked with the trun lid emergency release when the vehicle is stationary or while driving.
Trunk lid emergency release light:
• emergency release button ① flashes for 30 minutes after opening the trunk lid.
- emergency release button ① flashes for 60 minutes after closing the trunk lid.
The trunk lid emergency release does not unlock the trunk lid if the battery is disconnected or discharged.
If the vehicle was locked centrally, opening the trunk lid with the trunk lid emergency release triggers the anti-theft alarm system.
Side windows
Important safety notes
WARNING
While opening the side windows, body parts could become trapped between the side window and the door frame as the side window moves. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody touches the side window during the opening procedure. If somebody becomes trapped, release the switch or pull the switch to close the side window again.
WARNING
While opening the side windows, body parts in the closing area could become trapped. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure. If somebody becomes trapped, release the switch or press the switch to open the side window again.
WARNING
If children operate the side windows they could become trapped, particularly if they are left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
The side windows are equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If an object blocks or restricts a side window during the closing process, the side window opens again automatically.
WARNING
The reversing feature does not react:
• to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fingers
• over the last 4 mm of the closing movement
- during resetting
- when closing the side window again manually immediately after automatic reversing
This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure. If someone becomes trapped, press the switch to open the side window again.
Observe the important safety notes in the "Children in the vehicle" section (▷ page 51).
Opening and closing the side windows
text_image
P54.25-8204-31① Left side window
② Right side window
The switches for both side windows are located on the driver's door. There is also switch for the front-passenger side window on the front-passenger door.
The switches on the driver's door take precedence.
▶ Select key position 2 with the Start/Stop button (▷ page 119).
▶ To open: press corresponding switch ① or ②.
▶ To close: pull corresponding switch ① or ②.
If you press the switch beyond the point of resistance, an automatic opening/closing process is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by operating the switch again.
You can continue to operate the side windows after you switch off the engine. This function is available for up to five minutes or until the driver's or front-passenger door is opened.
Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure. If somebody becomes trapped, release the switch or press the switch to open the side window again.
If the soft top is closed, you can use the SmartKey to simultaneously open or close all of the side windows:
- Make sure that the soft top is closed (▷ page 79). - Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door handle.
To open all side windows: press the button on the SmartKey until the side windows are fully opened.
▶ To interrupt the opening procedure: release the button.
▶ To close all side windows: press the button on the SmartKey until the side windows are fully closed.
▶ To interrupt the closing procedure: release the 🔒 button.
Opening and closing all side windows Convenience opening (Coupe) (Roadster)
Using the SmartKey
WARNING
While opening the side windows, body parts could become trapped between the side window and the door frame as the side window moves. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody touches the side window during the opening procedure. If somebody becomes trapped, release the switch or pull the switch to close the side window again.
WARNING
While opening the side windows, body parts in the closing area could become trapped. There is a risk of injury.
WARNING
While opening the side windows, body parts could become trapped between the side window and the door frame as the side window moves. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody touches the side window during the opening procedure. If somebody becomes trapped, release the switch or pull the switch to close the side window again.
You can ventilate the vehicle before you start driving. To do so, open the side windows using the SmartKey.
The SmartKey must be close to the driver's door handle.
▶ Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door handle.
▶ Unlock the vehicle by pressing the button.
▶ Press and hold the 📤 button until the side windows are in the desired position.
▶ To interrupt convenience opening: release the button.
Convenience closing (Coupe)
WARNING
While opening the side windows, body parts in the closing area could become trapped. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure. If somebody becomes trapped, release the switch or press the switch to open the side window again.
When you lock the vehicle, you can simultaneously close both side windows from outside.
i The SmartKey must be close to the driver's door handle.
▶ Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door handle.
▶ Lock the vehicle with the button.
▶ Press and hold the 🔒 button until the side windows are fully closed.
▶ Make sure that all the side windows are closed.
Problems with the side windows
WARNING
If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, release the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.
| Problem | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| A side window will not close. | Objects prevent it from closing. ▶ Remove the objects. ▶ Close the side window. |
| A side window will not close. | You cannot see the cause. If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly: ▶ Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed with increased force. If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly: ▶ Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed without the anti-entrapment feature |
Soft top (Roadster)
Important safety notes
WARNING
If you do not lock the closed soft top, it may open during a journey. This could cause you • if the vehicle is stationary or to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk• if the speed does not exceed 30 mph of an accident. (50 km/h)
Only drive with the soft top fully open or locked closed.
WARNING
If you do not fully open/close the soft top, recommends that you only open or close the soft-top hydraulics depressurize after a short soft top when the vehicle is stationary. time. This causes the soft top to lower
unexpectedly and may cause you or others to be trapped. There is a risk of injury.
Always open or close the soft top completely.
You can open or close the soft top: ay
- if the vehicle is stationary or - if the speed does not exceed 30 mph (50 km/h)
If there is a strong head wind, it may not be possible to close the soft top fully. In order to close the soft top fully, reduce speed or stop.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz
Recommends that you only open or close the soft top when the vehicle is stationary.
! Never sit on the soft top when it is closed-top switch again in order to open or close or store heavy objects on it. You will the soft top fully.
vehicle.
! When opening and closing the soft top, make sure that:
- there is sufficient clearance above it, the soft top swings upwards.
- there are no objects on the soft top the soft-top covers to the side.
• the fabric is not dirty, wet or frozen
• the outside temperature is above -10
You could otherwise damage the soft top as well as other parts of the vehicle.
i Make sure that the soft top is dry and clean before closing it. Otherwise, water or dirt could enter the vehicle interior or trunk.
▶ When the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal.
▶ Select key position 2 with the Start/Stop button (▶ page 119).
text_image
C. or unk. ① P54.25-8613-31Opening and closing with the soft switch
Important safety notes
WARNING
When opening or closing the soft top, there a risk that parts of the body could become trapped by moving parts such as the roof mechanism, the trunk lid, or the side windows. There is a risk of injury.
When opening or closing the roof, make sure that no parts of the body are in the vicinity moving parts. Release the switch if somebody becomes trapped.
WARNING
If the vehicle speed exceeds 30 mph (50 km/h), the soft top stops during the opening or closing procedure. This impairs your view to the rear. There is a risk of an accident.
Reduce your speed to below 30 mph (50 km/h) or stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. Press or pull the
To open: pull soft-top switch ① until the soft top is fully opened.
The Convertible Top in Operation message appears in the multifunction display.
If, when opening, you drive at speeds above is 30 mph (50 km/h), the opening procedure is stopped and in the multifunction display you see the Open/Close Convertible
Top Completely message. Reduce your speed again to below 30 mph (50 km/h) and pull the soft-top switch again to open of the soft top fully.
To close: press and hold soft-top switch ① until the soft top is fully closed.
The Convertible Top in Operation message appears in the multifunction display.
If, when closing, you drive at speeds above 30 mph (50 km/h), the closing procedure is stopped and in the multifunction display you see the Open/Close Convertible
Top Completely message. Reduce speed back to under 30 mph (50 km/h) and push the soft top switch again to fully close the soft top.
Opening and closing using the SmartKey
Important safety notes
WARNING
When opening or closing the soft top, there a risk that parts of the body could become trapped by moving parts such as the roof mechanism, the trunk lid, or the side windows. There is a risk of injury.
When opening or closing the roof, make sure that no parts of the body are in the vicinity moving parts. Release the switch if somebody becomes trapped.
Opening and closing
The SmartKey must be close to the driver's door handle.
▶ Point the tip of the SmartKey at the drive door handle.
▶ To open: press and hold the 📤 button on the SmartKey until the soft top is fully opened.
The Convertible Top in Operation message appears in the multifunction display.
▶ To close: press and hold the ☑ button on the SmartKey until the soft top is fully closed.
The Convertible Top in Operation message appears in the multifunction display. The soft top and the side window close.
Relocking the soft top
WARNING
If you do not lock the closed soft top, it may open during a journey. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only drive with the soft top fully open or locked closed.
The soft top is not locked if:
- the Convertible Top in Operation message appears in the multifunction display.
- you hear a warning tone for up to ten is seconds when pulling away or while driving.
You can lock the soft top again if it is not locked fully.
▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
▶ Select key position 2 with the Start/Stop button (▶ page 119).
▶ Press the soft-top switch.
Installing/removing the wind screen
WARNING
If the wind screen is incorrectly installed, it could detach itself during a journey and
endanger other road users. There is a risk of 'an accident and injury.
Install the wind screen as described. Do not place any objects on top of the installed wind screen.
! Install or remove the wind screen only when the soft top is open. You could otherwise damage the wind screen or the vehicle interior.
! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use wind screens which have been tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. This helps to prevent damage to the vehicle.
The wind screen protects against wind when driving with the soft top open. It is secured between the roll bars.
The wind screen is in a bag on the tank partition wall in the trunk.
▶ Open the trunk.
natural_image
Exterior view of a car with numbered annotations highlighting structural components (no readable text or symbols)▶ Detach wind screen bag ① from four press-studs ② on the tank partition wall.
▶ Remove the wind screen from wind screen bag ①.
▶ Attach wind screen bag ① to the tank partition wall again.
text_image
Diagram of car interior showing labeled components and directional arrows indicating movement or flow▶ To install: fold both fastening levers ② inwards in the direction of the arrow.
▶ Push wind screen ① into the recess between the roll bars up to the locking point.
▶ Fold both fastening levers ② outwards.
▶ To remove: fold both fastening levers ② inwards in the direction of the arrow.
▶ Pull wind screen ① upward.
▶ Detach the wind screen bag, remove it from the trunk and put the wind screen back into it.
▶ Attach the wind screen bag to the tank partition wall in the trunk again.
| Problems with the soft top | |
| Problem | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| The soft top will not open or close. | Key position 2 is not selected.▶ Select key position 2 with the Start/Stop button. |
| The brake pedal has not been depressed with the vehicle stationary.▶ Depress the brake pedal. | |
| The soft-top mechanism or control system is defective.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. | |
| The soft top has been opened and closed several times in a row. The soft-top drive has been deactivated automatically for safety reasons.You can open and close the soft top again after approximately ten minutes.▶ Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.▶ Repeat the opening or closing procedure. | |
Useful information 84
Correct driver's seat position 84
Seats 85
Steering wheel 88
Mirrors 90
Memory function 92
Useful information
This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.
i Please read the information on qualified specialist workshops (▷ page 22).
Correct driver's seat position
text_image
Diagram of a car driver's seatbelt with numbered labels indicating key componentsObserve the safety guidelines on seat adjustment (▷ page 85).
▶ Make sure that seat ③ is adjusted properly.
Seat adjustment (▷ page 86)
When adjusting the seat, make sure that:
- you are as far away from the driver's air bag as possible.
-
you are sitting in a normal upright position.
-
you can fasten the seat belt properly.
- you have moved the backrest to an almost vertical position.
- you have set the seat cushion angle so that your thighs are gently supported.
- you can depress the pedals properly.
Observe the safety guidelines on steering wheel adjustment ( page 88).
▶ Make sure that steering wheel ① is adjusted properly.
Adjusting the steering wheel (▷ page 89)
When adjusting the steering wheel, make sure that:
- you can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent.
- you can move your legs freely.
- you can see all the displays in the instrument cluster clearly.
Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts (▷ page 47).
▶ Check whether you have fastened seat belt ② properly (▷ page 49).
The seat belt should:
- fit snugly across your body
- be routed across the middle of your shoulder
- be routed in your pelvic area across the hip joints
▶ Before starting off, adjust the rear-view mirror and the exterior mirrors (▷ page 90) in such a way that you have a good view of road and traffic conditions.
▶ Memory function: store the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirror settings (▷ page 92).
Seats
Important safety notes
WARNING
Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Nev leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving:
- adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors
- fasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine.
WARNING
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured. Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped. There is a risk of injury.
While moving the seats, make sure that your hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system.
WARNING
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury. Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
WARNING
The seat belt does not offer the intended lev of protection if you have not moved the backrest to an almost vertical position. When
braking or in the event of an accident, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. Always ensure that the backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is routed across the center of your shoulder.
WARNING
If head restraints are not installed and adjusted correctly, they cannot provide protection as intended. There is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. Always drive with the head restraints installed. Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.
WARNING
The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the backrest to an almost vertical position. When braking or in the event of an accident, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. Always ensure that the backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is routed across the center of your shoulder.
To avoid damage to the seats and the seat heating, observe the following information:
- do not spill any liquids on the seats. If liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as soon as possible.
- if the seat covers are damp or wet, do not switch on the seat heating. The seat
heating should also not to be used to the seats.
- clean the seat covers as recommended; see the "Interior care" section.
- do not transport heavy loads on the seats. Do not place sharp objects on the seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. The seats should only be occupied by passengers, if possible.
- when the seat heating is in operation, not cover the seats with insulating materials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat covers, child seats or booster seat
! Make sure that there are no objects in the
footwell or behind the seats when resetti the seats. There is a risk that the seats and/or the objects could be damaged.
Adjusting the seats manually
text_image
① ② ③ P91.10-3491-31Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
▶ Lift handle ① and slide the seat forwards or backwards.
▶ Release lever ① again.
Make sure that you hear the seat engage you can adjust the contour of the seat so as position. to provide optimum support for your back.
Backrest angle
▶ Relieve the pressure on the backrest.
▶ Pull lever ② up and adjust the backrest to the desired angle.
▶ Release lever ② again.
The seat backrest must audibly engage.
Seat height
do Pull up or push down lever ③ repeatedly until the seat has reached the desired height.
nSeat adjustment
text_image
1 2 3 4 P91.10-3490-31① Backrest angle
② Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
③ Seat cushion angle
④ Seat height
You can store the seat settings using the memory function (▷ page 92).
Adjusting the lumbar support
eYq can adjust the contour of the seat so as to provide optimum support for your back.
text_image
① ② ③ P91.10-3492-31① To adjust the upper back support
② To adjust the contour of the backrest the lumbar region
③ To adjust the lateral structure and sup of the seat
▶ Select key position 2 with the Start/Stop button.
If, after a certain amount of time, the s no longer has the desired contour, repeat the adjustment.
Switching the seat heating on/off
Activating/deactivating
WARNING
Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and backrest pads to become very hot. The health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to excessively high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury.
Therefore, do not switch the seat heating on repeatedly.
The three red indicator lamps in the button indicate the heating level you have selected.
text_image
P91.30-2535-31The system automatically switches down if from level 3 to level 2 after approximately five minutes.
the system automatically switches down from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten minutes.
The system automatically switches off approximately 20 minutes after it is set to level 1.
▶ Select key position 2 with the Start/Stop button.
▶ To switch on: press button ① repeated until the desired heating level is set.
▶ To switch off: press button ① repeated until all the indicator lamps go out.
Problems with the seat heating
The seat heating has switched off prematurely or cannot be switched on. The vehicle's electrical system voltage is too low because too many electrical consumers are switched on.
▶ Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the rear window defroster or interior lighting.
Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating will switch back on automatically.
If the battery voltage is too low, the seat heating may switch off.
AIRSCARF (Roadster)
WARNING
When AIRSCARF is switched on, very hot air can flow from the vents in the head restrain. This could result in burns in the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of in
Reduce the heater output before it becomes too hot.
i The blower continues running for seven seconds to cool down the heating elements.
If the battery voltage is too low, AIRSCARF may switch off.
Steering wheel
Important safety notes
The AIRSCARF function warms the head and neck area of vehicle occupants with warm a. The warm air flows out of the holes in the restraints.
The three red indicator lamps in the button indicate the heating level you have selected.
WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving:
- adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors
- fasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine.
text_image
P54.25-8615-31
WARNING
Children could injure themselves if they adjust the steering wheel. There is a risk of injury.
▶ Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock.
▶ To switch on: press button ①.
Three red indicator lamps in the button light up. The blower starts up after a preheating phase of seven seconds.
▶ Press button ① repeatedly until the desired heating level is set.
▶ To switch off: press button ① repeated until all the indicator lamps go out.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
WARNING
If the steering wheel is unlocked while the vehicle is in motion, it could change position unexpectedly. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Before starting off, make sure the steering wheel is locked. Never unlock the steering wheel while the vehicle is in motion.
You can use the adjustable fins on the heat restraint to adjust the height of the current air blown out according to your height.
Make sure that there are no objects covering the intake grille on the back of the driver's seat backrest.
Adjusting the steering wheel
text_image
P46.15-2487-31① To adjust the steering wheel position (fore-and-aft adjustment)
② To adjust the steering wheel height
i Further related subjects:
- EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (▷ page 89)
- Storing settings (▷ page 92)
EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature
Important safety notes
The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting in and out of your vehicle easier.
WARNING
When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts the steering wheel, you and other vehicle occupants - particularly children - could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is making adjustments, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the steering wheel.
If somebody becomes trapped:
- press one of the memory function position buttons, or
- move the switch for steering wheel adjustment in the opposite direction to in which the steering wheel is moving.
The adjustment process is stopped.
WARNING
If children activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature, they can become trapped, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
WARNING
If you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is making adjustments, you could lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Always wait until the adjustment process is complete before driving off.
Position of the steering wheel when the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is active b0
The steering wheel swings upwards when you:
- remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
- open the driver's door with the KEYLESS-GO start function in position 1
• open the driver's door and the SmartKey in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock
The steering wheel only moves upwards if it has not already reached the upper end stop.
Position of the steering wheel for driving
The steering wheel is moved to the last selected position when you:
- close the driver's door and
- press the Start/Stop button once
When you close the driver's door with the ignition switched on, the steering wheel is also automatically moved to the previously set position.
The last position of the steering wheel is stored after each manual setting or when you
store the setting with the memory function (▷ page 92).
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine.
Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature
If the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is triggered in an accident, the steering column will move upwards when the driver's door is opened. This occurs irrespective of the position of the SmartKey in the ignition lock. This makes it easier to exit the vehicle and rescue the occupants.
The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is only operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY feature is activated in the on-board compute
WARNING
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side reduces the size of the image. Visible objects are actually closer than they appear. This means that you could misjudge the distance from road users traveling behind, e.g. when changing lane. There is a risk of an accident.
For this reason, always make sure of the actual distance from the road users traveling behind by glancing over your shoulder.
Mirrors
Rear-view mirror
natural_image
Close-up of a car's front bumper with a numbered indicator (1) and blue motion arrow, no readable text or symbols beyond the label.Anti-glare mode: flick anti-glare switch ① forwards or back.
Exterior mirrors
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if do the following while driving:
- adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors
- fasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger field of vision.
The exterior mirrors are heated automatically if the rear window defroster is switched on and the outside temperature is low. Mirror heating lasts up to 10 minutes.
You can also heat up the exterior mirrors manually by switching on the rear window defroster.
text_image
① ② ③ P88.70-2608-31▶ Select key position 1 or 2 with the Start/Stop button.
▶ Press button ① for the left-hand exterior mirror or button ② for the right-hand exterior mirror.
The indicator lamp in the corresponding button lights up in red.
The indicator lamp goes out again after some time. You can adjust the selected
mirror using adjustment button ③ as long Folding the exterior mirrors in or out as the indicator lamp is lit. automatically
▶ Press adjustment button ③ up, down, or If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function to the left or right until you have adjusted activated in the on-board computer the exterior mirror to the desired position (▶ page 160): You should have a good overview of traffic the exterior mirrors fold in automatically as conditions. soon as you lock the vehicle from the
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out electrically
text_image
4 P88.70-2609-31the exterior mirrors fold out again automatically as soon as you unlock the vehicle and then open the driver's or front-passenger door.
i The mirrors do not fold out if they have been folded in manually.
Exterior mirror pushed out of positio
If an exterior mirror has been pushed out position, proceed as follows:
▶ Vehicles without electrically folding exterior mirrors: move the exterior mirror/into the correct position manually.
▶ Vehicles with electrically folding exterior mirrors: press and hold mirror-folding button until you hear a click and then the mirrors engage in position (▷ page 91). is The mirror housing is engaged again and you can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual (▷ page 90).
▶ Select key position 1 or 2 with the Start Stop button.
▶ Briefly press button ④. Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.
i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are always folded out fully while the vehicle is in motion, as they may otherwise vibrate.
If you are driving faster than 30 mph (47 km/h), you can no longer fold in the exterior mirrors.
Setting the exterior mirrors
If the battery has been disconnected or completely discharged, the exterior mirrors must be reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwise not fold in when you select the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function in on-board computer (▷ page 160).
▶ Select key position 1 using the Start/Stop button.
▶ Briefly press button ④.
Automatic anti-glare mirrors
The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror on the driver's side automatically go into anti-glare mode if the following conditions are met simultaneously:
- the ignition is switched on and the - incident light from headlamps strikes the sensor in the rear-view mirror.
The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode if reverse gear is engaged.
Parking position for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side
Calling up a stored parking position setting
Setting and storing the parking position
You can position the front-passenger side exterior mirror in such a way that you can the rear wheel on that side as soon as you engage reverse gear. You can store this position.
text_image
① ② ③ P88.70-2608-31Select key position 2 with the Start/Stop button.
▶ Adjust the exterior mirror on the front- see passenger side with the corresponding u button (▶ page 90).
▶ Engage reverse gear. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the stored parking position.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves back to its original position:
• as soon as you exceed a speed of 6 mph (10 km/h)
- about ten seconds after you have disengaged reverse gear
- if you press button ① for the exterior mirror on the driver's side
▶ Select key position 2 with the Start/Stop button.
▶ Press button ② for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side.
▶ Engage reverse gear.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the preset parking position
▶ Use adjustment button ③ to adjust the exterior mirror to a position that allows to see the rear wheel and the curb. The parking position is stored.
If you shift the transmission to another position, the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side returns to the driving position.
Memory function
Storing settings
WARNING
If you use the memory function on the driver's side while driving, you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments being made. There is a risk of an accident.
Only use the memory function on the driver's side when the vehicle is stationary.
WARNING
When the memory function adjusts the seat or steering wheel, you and other vehicle occupants - particularly children - could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While the memory function is making adjustments, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat or steering wheel. If somebody becomes trapped, immediately release the memory function position button. The adjustment process is stopped.
WARNING
Children could become trapped if they activate the memory function, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. N leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
Calling up a stored setting
▶ Press and hold the relevant storage position button 1, 2 or 3, until the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirrors are in the stored position.
The setting procedure is interrupted as soon as you release the storage position
With the memory function, you can store up button. to three different settings, e.g. for three different people.
The following settings are stored as a single memory preset:
- seat and backrest position
- driver's side: steering wheel position
- driver's side: position of the exterior mirrors on the driver's and front-passenger sides
text_image
P91.10-3517-31▶ Select key position 2 with the Start/Stop button.
▶ Adjust the seat (▷ page 86).
On the driver's side, adjust the steering wheel ( page 89) and the exterior mirrors ( page 90).
▶ Press memory button M and one of the storage position buttons 1, 2 or 3 within three seconds.
The settings are stored in the selected preset position. A tone sounds when the settings have been completed.
Useful information 96
Exterior lighting 96
Interior lighting 99
Replacing bulbs 100
Windshield wipers 101
Useful information
This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.
i Please read the information on qualified specialist workshops (▷ page 22).
Exterior lighting
General notes
For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you drive with the lights switched on even during the daytime. In some countries, operation of the headlamps varies due to legal requirements and self-imposed obligations.
Driving abroad
Converting to symmetrical low beam when driving abroad: switch the headlam to symmetrical low beam in countries in which traffic drives on the opposite side of road to the country where the vehicle is registered. This prevents glare to oncoming traffic. Symmetrical lights do not illuminate as large an area of the edge of the road. Have the headlamps converted at a qualifie specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, as close to the border remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock as possible before driving in these countries open the driver's door with the SmartKey Converting to asymmetrical low beam in position 0.
Converting to asymmetrical low beam after returning: have the headlamps converted back to asymmetrical low beam a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, as soon possible after crossing the border again.
Setting the exterior lighting
Setting options
Exterior lighting can be set using:
• the light switch
• the combination switch (▷ page 98)
ay the on-board computer (▷ page 158)
Light switch
Operation
text_image
1 2 3 4 5 AUTO P P82.10-6507-311 ←P ≈ Left-hand standing lamps
2 P←→ Right-hand standing lamps
3 ≥00≤ Parking lamps, license plate and instrument cluster lighting
4 AUTO Automatic headlamp mode, controlled by the light sensor
5 D Low-beam/high-beam headlamps
If you hear a warning tone when you leave the vehicle, the lights may still be switched on.
▶ Turn the light switch to AUTO.
The exterior lighting (except the parking/standing lamps) switches off automatically if you:
deremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock is open the driver's door with the SmartKey in position 0.
Automatic headlamp mode
al
WARNING
asWhen the light switch is set to AUTO, the low-beam headlamps may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other
causes of poor visibility due to the weather conditions such as spray. There is a risk of accident.
In such situations, turn the light switch to 📋.
The daytime running lamps improve the visibility of your vehicle during the day. To do this, the daytime running lamps function must be switched on using the on-board computer (▷ page 158).
If the engine is running and you turn the light switch to 200 or 3D , the manual settings make precedence over the daytime running lamps.
The automatic headlamp feature is only an switch to 200 or 3D , the manual settings aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle take precedence over the daytime running lighting at all times. lamps.
AUTO is the favored light switch setting. The light setting is automatically selected according to the brightness of the ambient light (exception: poor visibility due to weather conditions such as fog, snow or spray):
In the USA, the daytime running lamps are deactivated upon delivery from the factory.
▶To switch on automatic headlamp mode: turn the light switch to AUTO.
- SmartKey in position 1 in the ignition loc the parking lamps are switched on or off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light.
- With the engine running: if you have activated the daytime running lamps function via the on-board computer, the daytime running lamps or the low-beam headlamps and parking lamps are switched on or off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light.
Low-beam headlamps
Even if the light sensor does not detect that it is dark, the parking lamps and low-beam headlamps switch on when the ignition is switched on and the light switch is set to the position. This is a particularly useful function in the event of rain and fog.
Only for Canada:
The daytime running lamps improve the visibility of your vehicle during the day. The daytime running lamps function is required law in Canada. It cannot therefore be deactivated.
To switch on the low-beam headlamps: turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine.
▶ Turn the light switch to 📄. The green 📄 indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.
When the engine is running and the vehicle stationary: if you move the selector lever from a drive position to P, the daytime running lamps/low-beam headlamps go out after three minutes.
When the engine is running, the vehicle is stationary and in bright ambient light: if you turn the light switch to ≥00 , the daytime running lamps and parking lamps switch on. If the engine is running and you turn the light switch to ≥0 , the manual settings take precedence over the daytime running lamps.
USA only:
by Parking lamps
! If the battery has been excessively discharged, the parking lamps or standing lamps are automatically switched off to enable the next engine start. Always park your vehicle safely and sufficiently lit according to legal standards. Avoid the continuous use of the 300≤ parking lamps for several hours. If possible, switch on the P≤→ right or the ←P≤ left standing lamp.
To switch on: turn the light switch to light.
Standing lamps
^2 Switching on the standing lamps ensures the corresponding side of the vehicle is illuminated.
To switch on the standing lamps: the Press the combination switch beyond the SmartKey is not in the ignition lock or it is pressure point in the direction of in position 0. Arrow ①. Turn the light switch to -P≤slant (left-hand side in the AUTO position, the high-beam of the vehicle) or ≤slant (right-hand side of headlamps are only switched on when it is the vehicle). dark and the engine is running.
Combination switch
Turn signal
text_image
① ② ③ ④ P46.15-2496-31① High-beam headlamps
② Turn signal, right
③ High-beam flasher
④ Turn signal, left
To indicate briefly: press the combination switch briefly to the pressure point in the direction of arrow ② or ④. The corresponding turn signal flashes three times.
▶ To indicate: press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow ② or ④.
High-beam headlamps
▶ To switch on the high-beam headlamps.
turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine.
▶ Turn the light switch to 📋 or AUTO.
- an air bag is deployed or
- the vehicle decelerates rapidly from a speed of more than 45 mph (70 km/h) and comes to a standstill.
▶ To switch on the hazard warning lamps: press button ①. - an air bag is deployed or
• the vehicle decelerates rapidly from a speed of more than 45 mph (70 km/h) and comes to a standstill.
▶ To switch on the hazard warning lamps: press button ①.
All turn signals flash. If you now switch on a turn signal using the combination switch,
High-beam flasher
▶ To switch on: turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 1 or 2, or start the engine.
▶ Pull the combination switch briefly in the direction of arrow ③.
Hazard warning lamps
text_image
ion e ee ch n P54.25-8721-31The hazard warning lamps automatically switch on if:
All turn signals flash. If you now switch on a turn signal using the combination switch,
only the turn signal lamp on the
corresponding side of the vehicle will flash.
▶ To switch off the hazard warning
lamps: press button ①.
The hazard warning lamps switch off automatically if the vehicle exceeds a speed of 6 mph(10 km/h) again after a full brake application.
i The hazard warning lamps still operate if the ignition is switched off.
Headlamp cleaning system
The headlamps are cleaned automatically if the "Wipe with washer fluid" function is operated five times (▷ page 101) while the lights are on and the engine is running. W you switch off the ignition, the automatic headlamp cleaning system is reset and counting is resumed from 0.
Interior lighting
Overview of interior lighting
text_image
1 2 3 4 P82.20-3539-31Overhead control panel
① Switches the automatic interior lighting control on/off
② hen lamp switches the right-hand reading on/off
③ Switches the interior lighting on/
④ Switches the left-hand reading lam on/off
Headlamps fogged up on the inside
The headlamps may fog up on the inside there is high atmospheric humidity.
▶ Drive with the headlamps switched on. The level of moisture diminishes, depending on the length of the journey the weather conditions (humidity and temperature).
If the level of moisture does not diminish:
▶ Have the headlamps checked at a qualif specialist workshop.
Interior lighting control
General notes
In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from discharging, the interior lighting functions are and automatically deactivated after some time unless the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock.
Automatic interior lighting control
▶ To activate/deactivate: press the button.
When the automatic interior lighting control is activated, the button is flush with the overhead control panel.
The interior lighting automatically switches on if you:
- unlock the vehicle
- open a door
- remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
The interior light is activated for a short w when the SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock. You can activate this delayed switch-off using the on-board computer (▷ page 159).
observed, the lights must be switched on before starting the engine.
Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure that these function correctly at all times. Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.
Manual interior lighting control
▶ To switch the interior lighting on/off
press the 📋 button.
▶ To switch the reading lamps on/off:
press the 📋 button.
Crash-responsive emergency lighting
The interior lighting is activated automatic if the vehicle is involved in an accident.
▶ To switch off the crash-responsive emergency lighting: press the hazard warning lamp button.
or
- Lock and then unlock the vehicle using key.
Replacing bulbs
Important safety notes
Xenon bulbs
DANGER
Xenon bulbs carry a high voltage. You can an electric shock if you remove the cover the Xenon bulb and touch the electrical contacts. There is a risk of fatal injury.
Never touch the parts or the electrical contacts of the Xenon bulb. Always have work on the Xenon bulbs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Other bulbs
WARNING
Bulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hot when operating. If you change a bulb, you could burn yourself on these components. There is a risk of injury.
Allow these components to cool down before changing a bulb.
There are bulbs other than the Xenon bulbs that you cannot replace. Replace only the bulbs listed (▷ page 101). Have the bulbs that you cannot replace yourself changed at a qualified specialist workshop.
the you require assistance changing bulbs, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Do not touch the glass tube of new bulbs with your bare hands. Even minor contamination can burn into the glass surface and reduce the service life of the bulbs. Always use a lint-free cloth or only touch the base of the bulb when installing.
Only use bulbs of the correct type.
If the new bulb still does not light up, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
'Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure that these function correctly at all times.
Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.
Changing the front bulbs
If your vehicle is equipped with Xenon bulbs you cannot replace the bulbs at the front you can recognize this by the following: they yourself. Contact a qualified specialist cone of light from the Xenon bulbs moves workshop which has the necessary specialist from the top to the bottom and back again knowledge and tools to carry out the work when you start the engine. For this to be required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that
you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center use washer fluid when operating the for this purpose. windshield wipers.
Changing the rear bulbs
License plate lamp
The only rear bulbs you can change are the W 5 W license plate lamp bulbs.
! If the windshield wipers leave smears on the windshield after the vehicle has been washed in an automatic car wash, wax or other residues may be the reason for this. Clean the windshield using washer fluid after washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash.
natural_image
Side view of a car with a labeled sensor device (no text or symbols on the device itself)▶ Switch off the lights.
▶ Lever lamp housing ① out of the frame using a screwdriver.
▶ Unscrew the bulb holder from the lamp housing and pull out the bulb.
▶ Insert a new bulb into the bulb holder screw the bulb holder into the lamp housing.
▶ Press the lamp housing back into the frame until it engages. ▶ S
text_image
5 4 3 2 1 6 P54.25-8136-31Combination switch
1 0 Windshield wiper off
2 ... Intermittent wipe, low
3 .... Intermittent wipe, high
4 — Continuous wipe, slow
5 = Continuous wipe, fast
⑥ Single wipe/ To wipe the windshield using washer fluid
▶ Switch on the ignition.
▶ Turn the combination switch to the corresponding position.
Windshield wipers
Switching the windshield wipers on/off
! Do not operate the windshield wipers when the windshield is dry, as this could damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has collected on the windshield can scratch the glass if wiping takes place with the windshield is dry.
! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due to optical influences and the windshield becoming dirty in dry weather conditions, the windshield wipers may be activated inadvertently. This could then damage the windshield wiper blades or scratch the windshield.
For this reason, you should always switch off the windshield wipers in dry weather.
If it is necessary to switch on the winds in the ·s or ·s position, the appropriate wipers in dry weather conditions, always wiping frequency is set automatically
according to the intensity of the rain. In the ⋯ position, the rain sensor is more sensitive than in the ⋯ position, causing the windshield wipers to wipe more frequently.
If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield will no longer be wiped properly. This could prevent you from observing the traffic conditions. Replace the wiper blades twice a year, ideally in spring and fall.
Replacing the wiper blades
Important safety notes
WARNING
If the windshield wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you could be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and ignition before changing the wiper blades.
! To avoid damaging the wiper blades, make sure that you touch only the wiper arm of the wiper.
! Never open the hood if a windshield wiper arm has been folded away from the windshield.
Never fold a windshield wiper arm without arrow. a wiper blade back onto the windshield.
Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when
you change the wiper blade. If you release the windshield wiper arm without a wiper blade and it falls onto the windshield, the
windshield may be damaged by the force▶ the impact.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the wiper blades changed at a qualified specialist workshop.
Replacing the wiper blades
Removing the wiper blades
▶ Switch off the engine.
▶ Remove your foot from the brake pedal.
Set the windshield wiper to the d position.
▶ Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until the windshield wipers start.
▶ When the wiper arms have reached a vertical position, press the Start/Stop button.
▶ Fold the wiper arm away from the windshield until it engages.
▶ Set the wiper blade at right angles to the wiper arm.
natural_image
Close-up of a car's front wheel and side arm, showing blue arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)▶ Remove the wiper blade from the retainer on the wiper arm in the direction of the
Installing the wiper blades
e Slide the new wiper blade into the retainer on the wiper arm in the opposite direction to the arrow.
▶ofurn the wiper blade parallel to the wiper arm.
▶ Fold the wiper arm back onto the windshield.
| Problems with the windshield wipers | |
| Problem | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| The windshield wipers are jammed. | Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield wiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated. ▶ Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's door. ▶ Remove the cause of the obstruction. ▶ Switch the windshield wipers back on. |
| The windshield wipers fail completely. | The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning. ▶ Select another wiper speed on the combination switch. ▶ Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist workshop. |
| The windshield washer fluid from the spray nozzles no longer hits the center of the windshield. | The spray nozzles are misaligned. ▶ Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist workshop. |
| The wiper arms are onthe windshield. | The wiper arms have been moved by an external force. ▶ Select key position 2 (ignition) with the Start/Stop button. The wiper arms move back down automatically. |
Useful information 106
Overview of climate control systems 106
Operating the climate control systems 108
Setting the air vents 113
Useful information
This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.
i Please read the information on qualified specialist workshops (▷ page 22).
interior temperature will be reached more quickly.
i The integrated filter can filter out most particles of dust, and completely filters out pollen. A clogged filter reduces the amount of air supplied to the vehicle interior. For this reason, you should always observe the interval for replacing the filter, which is specified in the Maintenance Booklet. As it depends on environmental conditions, e.g. heavy air pollution, the interval may be shorter than stated in the Maintenance Booklet.
Overview of climate control system
Important safety notes
Observe the settings recommended on the following pages. The windows could otherwise fog up.
To prevent the windows from fogging up:
- switch off climate control only briefly
- switch on air-recirculation mode only briefly
- switch on the cooling with air dehumidification function
- switch on the defrost windshield function briefly, if required
The automatic climate control regulates the temperature and the humidity in the vehicle interior and filters undesirable substances out of the air.
Coupe: dual-zone automatic climate control is only operational when the engine is running. Optimum operation is only achieved with the side windows closed.
Roadster: dual-zone automatic climate control is only operational when the engine is running. Optimum operation is only achieved with the side windows and roof closed.
When the weather is warm, ventilate the vehicle for a brief period. This will speed up the cooling process and the desired vehicle
Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control
text_image
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 OFF MONO A/C MAX AUTO °C 18 16 20 22 24 26 28 13 12 11 10 9 REAR °C P83P83.40-4358-31
Canada only
① To set the temperature, left (▷ page 110)
② To set climate control to automatic (▷ page 110)
③ To switch climate control on/off (▷ page 108)
④ To switch the MONO function on/off
⑤ To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (▷ page 108)
⑥ To defrost the windshield (▶ page 111)
⑦ To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (▷ page 113)
⑧ To set the temperature, right (▷ page 110)
⑨ To switch the rear window defroster on/off (▷ page 112)
⑩ To increase the airflow (▷ page 111)
⑪ To reduce the airflow (▷ page 111)
⑫ Display
⑬ To set the air distribution (▷ page 110)
text_image
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 OFF MAX COOL A/C MAX AUTO 68 72 76 64 60 80 84 °F 13 12 11 10 9 F 64 60 72 76 80 84 P83P83.40-4371-31
USA only
① To set the temperature, left
② To set climate control to automatic (▷ page 110)
③ To switch climate control on/off (▷ page 108)
④ To switch maximum cooling on/off (▷ page 111)
⑤ To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (▷ page 108)
⑥ To defrost the windshield (▷ page 111)
⑦ To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (▷ page 113)
⑧ To set the temperature, right (▷ page 110)
⑨ To switch the rear window defroster on/off (▷ page 112)
⑩ To increase the airflow (▷ page 111)
⑪ To reduce the airflow (▷ page 111)
⑫ Display
⑬ To set the air distribution (▷ page 110)
Notes on using dual-zone automatic climate control
i Activate climate control primarily using the AUTO button (▷ page 110).
The following contains instructions and recommendations to enable you to get the most out of your automatic climate control
Activating/deactivating
- Activate climate control using the AUTO and button (> page 119).
A/C buttons. The indicator lamps in the ▶ To activate: press the AUTO button.
AUTO and A/C buttons light up. The indicator lamp in the AUTO button lights - Set the temperature to 72^ (22 °C).
- Only use the "Windshield defrosting" function briefly until the windshield is clear again.
- Only use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. The indicator lamp in the OFF button goes if there are unpleasant outside odors or out. The previously selected settings are when in a tunnel. The windows could restored. otherwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn to deactivate: press the OFF button. into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode. The indicator lamp in the OFF button lights
- Use the MONO function if you want to adopt the temperature and air distribution settings from the driver's side for all climate control zones. The indicator lamp in the MONO button lights up.
g. The indicator lamp in the OFF button goes out. The previously selected settings are restored.
70 deactivate: press the OFF button. The indicator lamp in the OFF button lights up.
Operating the climate control systems
Switching climate control on/off
General notes
When the climate control is switched off, air supply and air circulation are also switched off. The windows could fog up. Therefore, switch off climate control only briefly
Activating/deactivating cooling with air dehumidification
General notes
If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function, the air inside the vehicle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The windows can fog up more quickly. Therefore, deactivate the cooling with air-dehumidification function only briefly.
The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is only available when the engine is running. The air inside the vehicle is cooled
Operating the climate control systems
and dehumidified according to the temperature selected.
Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This is normal and not a sign that there is a malfunction.
Activating/deactivating
▶ To activate: press the A/C button. The indicator lamp in the A/C button lights up.
▶ To deactivate: press the A/C button. The indicator lamp in the A/C button goes out. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function has a delayed switch-off feature.
Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function
| Problem | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| The indicator lamp in the A/C button flashes three times or remains off. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function cannot be switched on. | Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to malfunction. ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
Setting climate control to automatic
General notes
In automatic mode, the set temperature is controlled automatically. The system automatically regulates the temperature of the dispensed air, the airflow and the air distribution.
The automatic mode functions optimally when the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is activated. If necessary, cooling with air dehumidification can be deactivated.
If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function, the air inside the vehicle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The windows can fog up more quickly. Therefore, deactivate the cooling with air-dehumidification function only briefly.
Activating/switching
▶ Select key position 2 with the Start/Stop button (▷ page 119).
▶ Set the desired temperature.
To activate: press the AUTO button.
The indicator lamp in the AUTO button lights up. Automatic air distribution and airflow are activated.
▶ To switch to manual mode: press the AUTO button.
The indicator lamp in the AUTO button goes out. Automatic air distribution and airflow are deactivated.
Setting the temperature
Different temperatures can be set for the driver's and front-passenger sides.
▶ Select key position 2 with the Start/Stop button (▶ page 119).
▶ To increase/reduce: turn controls ① and ⑧ clockwise or counter-clockwise (▷ page 107).
Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 72 °F (22 °C).
Setting the air distribution
Air distribution settings
Directs air through the defroster vents
Directs air through the center and side air vents
Directs air through the footwell air vents
Operating the climate control systems 1
Directs air through the center, side and Select key position 2 with the Start/Stop footwell vents button (▷ page 119).
Directs the airflow to the entire vehicle. To activate: press the MAX button. interior The indicator lamp in the MAX button lights
Directs air through the defroster, center and side air vents
Directs air through the defroster and footwell vents
Setting the air distribution
▶ Select key position 2 with the Start/Stop button (▷ page 119).
▶ Press the button repeatedly until the desired symbol appears in the display. The indicator lamp in the AUTO button go out. Automatic control is deactivated and the air distribution is controlled according to the selected setting.
Setting the airflow
▶ Select key position 2 with the Start/Stop button (▷ page 119).
▶ To increase/reduce: press the ☐ or □ button.
Switching the mono function on/off
The MONO function is only available in vehicles for Canada.
You can use the MONO function to adopt temperature and air distribution settings on the driver's side for the front-passenger side
▶ Press the MONO button. The indicator lamp in the MONO button light up or goes out.
Defrosting the windshield
You should only select the "Windshield defrosting" function until the windshield is clear again.
Select key position 2 with the Start/Stop button (▷ page 119).
To activate: press the MAX button. The indicator lamp in the MAX button lights up.
The system automatically switches to the following functions:
- high airflow
- high temperature
• air distribution to the windshield and front side windows
• air-recirculation mode off
To deactivate: press the MAX button.
The indicator lamp in the MAX button goes out. The previously selected settings are restored. Air-recirculation mode remains deactivated.
or
▶ Press the AUTO button.
The indicator lamp in the ☑MAX button goes out. Airflow and air distribution are set to automatic mode.
or
▶ Turn controls ① or ⑧ clockwise or counter-clockwise (▷ page 107).
or
▶ Press the ☐ or ☐ button.
Switching maximum cooling on/off
the The MAX COOL function is only available in vehicles for the USA.
MAX COOL is only operational when the engine is running.
When you activate MAX COOL, climate control switches to the following functions:
• maximum cooling
• maximum airflow
• air-recirculation mode on
Operating the climate control systems
▶ To activate: press the MAX button. The indicator lamp in the button lights up. ▶ To deactivate: press the MAX button again. The indicator lamp in the button goes out. The previously selected settings come into effect again. Activating/deactivating ▶ Select key position 2 with the Start/Stop button (▶ page 119). ▶ Press the REAR button. The indicator lamp in the REAR button lights up or goes out.
To deactivate MAX COOL press the OFF, AUTO, or MAX button.
Defrosting the windows
Windows fogged up on the inside
▶ Activate the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function A/C.
▶ Activate automatic mode AUTO.
▶ If the windows continue to fog up, activate the "Windshield defrosting" function MAX.
Windows fogged up on the outside
▶ Activate the windshield wipers.
▶ Press the button repeatedly until the or symbol appears in the display.
You should only select this setting until the windshield is clear again.
Rear window defroster
General notes
The rear window defroster has a high current draw. You should therefore switch it off as soon as the rear window is clear. Otherwise, the rear window defroster switches off automatically after several minutes.
If the battery voltage is too low, the rear window defroster may switch off.
Problems with the rear window defroster
| Problem | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| The rear window defroster has deactivated prematurely or cannot be activated. | The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrica consumers are switched on. ▶ Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. read lamps, interior lighting or the seat heating. When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window defroster can be activated again. |
Activating/deactivating air-recirculation mode
General notes
You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if unpleasant odors are entering the vehicle from outside. The air already inside the vehicle will then be recirculated.
If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the windows can fog up more quickly, in particular at low temperatures. Only use air-recirculation mode briefly to prevent the windows from fogging up.
Air-recirculation mode deactivates automatically:
• after approximately five minutes at outside temperatures below approximately 41 °F (5 °C)
• after approximately five minutes if cooling with air dehumidification is deactivated
• after approximately 30 minutes at outside temperatures above approximately 41 °F (5 °C) if the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is activated
Activating/deactivating
▶ Select key position 2 with the Start/Stop button (▷ page 119).
▶ To activate: press the 📄 button.
The indicator lamp in the 📄 button light up.
Air-recirculation mode is activated automatically at high outside temperatures. When air-recirculation mode is activated automatically, the indicator lamp in the button is not lit. Outside air is added after about 30 minutes.
▶ To deactivate: press the button.
The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
Setting the air vents
Important safety notes
WARNING
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance to the air outlets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior.
In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, please observe the following notes:
- keep the air inlet on the right-hand side of the hood free of blockages, such as ice, snow or leaves.
- never cover the air vents or air intake grilles in the vehicle interior.
For virtually draft-free ventilation, adjust the sliders of the air vents to the center position.
Setting the side air vents
text_image
of, of grilles 1 2 3 4 P83.40-4344-31Setting the center air vents
text_image
1 2 3 4 P83.40-4343-311 To open the center air vent
2 To close the center air vent
③ Center air vent, right
④ Center air vent, left
▶ To open the center air vent: turn the adjuster in center air vent ③ or ④ in the direction of the arrow to position 1.
▶ To close the center air vent: turn the adjuster in center air vent ③ or ④ in the direction of the arrow to position ②.
1 To open the side air vent
2 To close the side air vent
③ Side window defroster vent
④ Side air vent
▶ To open the side air vent: turn the adjuster in side air vent ④ in the direction of the arrow to position 1.
▶ To close the side air vent: turn the adjuster in side air vent ④ in the direction of the arrow to position 2.
Setting the blower output of the AIRSCARF vents (Roadster)
WARNING
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance to the air outlets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior.
WARNING
When AIRSCARF is switched on, very hot air can flow from the vents in the head restraints. This could result in burns in the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury. Reduce the heater output before it becomes too hot.
text_image
① P83.40-4509-31You can adjust the blower output of AIRSCARF vents ① using the AIRSCARF button (▷ page 88).
Useful information 118
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle 118
Driving 118
AMG SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-speed
sports transmission 121
AMG button (SETUP)
Refueling 129
Parking 131
Driving tips 134
Driving systems 138
Useful information
This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.
i Please read the information on qualified specialist workshops (▷ page 22).
Notes on breaking-in a new vehic
Important safety notes
New brake pads/linings only reach their optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometers of driving. Until that time, you may need to use increased brake pedal pressure while braking. This also applies after the brake discs or the brake pads/linings have been replaced.
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
The more you look after the engine when it new, the more satisfied you will be with its performance in the future.
- You should therefore drive at varying vehicle and engine speeds for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km).
- Do not drive faster than 85 mph (140 km/h) for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km).
- Only allow the engine to reach a maximum engine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly.
- Avoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throttle, during this period. Do not exceed 23 of the maximum permitted engine speed for each gear.
- Select the manual drive program M in go time.
- Do not carry out a RACE START. - Do not manually shift to a lower gear to brake the vehicle. - If possible, do not depress the accelerator pedal past the point of resistance (kickdown). - Only select the shift range limits 3, 2 or 1 day when driving slowly, e.g. in mountainous terrain.
After 1,000 miles (1,500 km), you can increase the engine speed gradually and bring the vehicle to full speed.
You should also observe these breaking-in notes if your vehicle's engine or transmission has been replaced.
i Always observe the respective speed limits.
Driving
Important safety notes
WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. The operating and road safety of the vehicle is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter the driver's footwell. Install the floormats securely and as specified in order to ensure sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place floormats on top of one another.
WARNING
If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not use the engine's full performance until it has reached operating temperature. The operating temperature has been reached when the engine oil temperature display in the on-board computer's AMG menu no longer flashes.
Only shift into reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary.
Where possible, avoid spinning the drive wheels when pulling away on slippery roads. You could otherwise damage the drive train.
! During a cold start with low engine oil temperatures (below 32 °F) (0 °C), the maximum engine speed is restricted in order to protect the engine. To protect the engine and maintain smooth engine operation, avoid driving at full throttle with the engine is cold.
Key positions
KEYLESS-GO start function
You can switch the engine on and off with Start/Stop button. For this, the SmartKey must be inside the vehicle. The Start/Stop button is located in the center console and illuminated when the vehicle is unlocked.
Pressing the Start/Stop button several times in succession corresponds to the different key positions in the ignition lock. This is on the case if you are not depressing the brak pedal.
If you depress the brake pedal and press the Start/Stop button, the engine starts immediately.
If there is a SmartKey in the ignition lock, it takes precedence over the KEYLESS-GO start function.
text_image
1 ENGINE START STOP P54.25-8724-31and parking
- Position 0: if Start/Stop button ① has not yet been pressed, this corresponds to the SmartKey being removed from the ignition. - Position 1: press Start/Stop button ①. You can now activate the windshield wipers, for example.
If you press Start/Stop button ① twice when when this position and the driver's door is open, the power supply is deactivated again.
▶ Position 2 (ignition): press Start/Stop button ① twice.
The power supply is switched off again if:
- you press Start/Stop button ① once when
• the driver's door is open
SmartKey
You can also start the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
The ignition lock is located in the rear stowage space of the center console.
text_image
the 0 1 2 3 this art P15.10-2370-31Driving
0 To remove the SmartKey
1 Power supply for some consumers, such as the windshield wipers
2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers) and drive position
3 To start the engine
i The SmartKey can be turned in the ignition lock even if it is not the correct SmartKey for the vehicle. The ignition is switched on. The engine cannot be started
Starting the engine
Important safety notes
WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle they could:
- open the doors, thus endangering other people or road users.
• get out and disrupt traffic.
• operate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they:
- release the parking brake.
- shifting the automatic transmission out of park position P
- Start the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children.
WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation.
Do not depress the accelerator pedal
h when starting the engine.
Starting procedure with the Start/Stop button
i The Start/Stop button can be used to start the vehicle without inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock. You merely need to carry the SmartKey on your person.
not
a. Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed.
▶ Press the Start/Stop button once (▷ page 119).
The engine starts.
Starting procedure with the SmartKey
If the Start/Stop button is inoperative, you can also start the vehicle using the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 3 in the ignition lock ( page 119) and release it as soon as the engine is running.
Pulling away
AMG SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-speed sports transmission
WARNING
If the engine speed is above the idling speed and you engage transmission position D or R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is a risk of an accident.
When engaging transmission position D or R, always firmly depress the brake pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate.
i It is only possible to shift the transmission from position P to the desired position, if:
• the engine is running and
- you depress the brake pedal
Only then is the parking lock released. If the brake pedal is not depressed, the E-SELECT
AMG SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-speed sports transmission
lever can still be moved but the parking remains engaged.
▶ Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed.
▶ Use the E-SELECT lever to shift the transmission to position D or R.
▶ Release the brake pedal.
▶ Carefully depress the accelerator pedal. The electric parking brake is automatically released (▷ page 133).
i The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulled away. The locking knobs in the door drop down. The automatic door lock can also be deactivated (Roadster only).
Hill start assist
Hill start assist will aid you when pulling away
on a hill. It holds the vehicle for a short time to observe the "Important safety notes" section after you have removed your foot from the on activating/deactivating ESP(> page 56). brake pedal. This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and depress it before the vehicle begins to roll.
the vehicle is secured with the electric parking brake.
- ESP® is malfunctioning.
AMG SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-speed sp transmission
Important safety notes
WARNING
If the engine speed is above the idling speed and you engage transmission position D or R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. The is a risk of an accident.
When engaging transmission position D or R, always firmly depress the brake pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate.
E-SELECT selector lever
Overview of transmission positions
text_image
R N P N D P27.60-3504-31
WARNING
After a short time, hill start assist will no longer brake your vehicle and it could roll away. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Therefore, quickly move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start assist.
▶ Take your foot off the brake pedal.
Once you have taken your foot off the brake pedal, the vehicle is held for arou one second.
▶ Pull away.
Hill start assist is not active if:
- you are pulling away on a level road or a downhill gradient.
• the transmission is in position N.
Park position with parking lock
R Reverse gear
N Neutral
D Drive
! If the engine speed is too high or if the vehicle is rolling, do not shift the transmission directly from D to R, from R to D or directly to P.
Do not open the driver's door while the vehicle is in motion. At low speeds in
transmission position D or R, park position shifting to neutral N
P is otherwise engaged automatically.
The transmission could be damaged.
▶ When the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal.
The E-SELECT lever always returns to its original position.
- Push the E-SELECT lever forwards or back to the first point of resistance.
The current transmission position P, R, N or D appears in the transmission position display in the multifunction display.
i If you move the E-SELECT lever to N before switching off the engine, the transmission remains in N for approximately 30 minutes. If you open the driver's or front-passenger door during this period, the transmission automatically shifts to P.
If you wish to select a transmission position or to disengage park position P, the engine must be running.
Engaging park position P
▶ When the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal.
▶ Press the P button in the center console.
Park position P is disengaged if you:
• depress the brake pedal and
- push the E-SELECT lever forwards or back to the first point of resistance
The transmission shifts to neutral N.
To shift directly from P to R:
▶ Depress the brake pedal and push the E-SELECT lever forwards past the first point of resistance.
To shift directly from P to D:
▶ Depress the brake pedal and push E-SELECT lever back past the first point of resistance.
The transmission remains in N if:
- the SmartKey is in the ignition lock and - you use the E-SELECT lever to shift the transmission to N before switching the engine off
This still applies if you open the driver's or front-passenger door.
Further information is available in the "Car wash" section (▷ page 223).
Engaging reverse gear R
When the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal.
▶ Push the E-SELECT lever forward past the first point of resistance.
Shifting to transmission position D
▶ When the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal.
▶ Push the E-SELECT lever back past the first point of resistance.
Engaging park position P automatically
Park position is engaged automatically in the following circumstances:
- if you switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's or front-passenger door.
- if you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
- if you open the door while traveling at low speed in transmission position D or R.
- if you switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's or front-passenger door.
- if you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
- if you open the door while traveling at low speed in transmission position D or R.
Transmission position and drive program display
Display in transmission positions P, and N
text_image
PRND S 19.8 miles 2 P27.60-3515-31① Transmission position: currently selected transmission position is displayed in inverted colors
② Drive program (C/S/S+/M)
In addition to drive program ② being shown in the multifunction display, the currently selected drive program is indicated in red on the drive program selector switch.
Display when in transmission position D
text_image
D 3 S ① 14 8 mnes ② ③ P27.64-3516-31① Transmission position
② Gear
③ Drive program (C/S/S+)
If you have restricted the shift range, the transmission position and the selected shift range, e.g. D3, are shown at position ①.
Display when in transmission position D and manual drive program M
text_image
1234567 M ① 19.8 miles ② P27.c0-3517-31① Gear
② Drive program
Transmission positions
P
Park position
Do not shift the transmission into position P unless the vehicle is stationary. The parking lock should not be used as a brake when parking. Always apply the electronic parking brake in addition to the parking lock in order to secure the vehicle.
In the event of a malfunction of the vehicle's electronics, the transmission may lock in position P.
Have the vehicle electronics checked at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, immediately.
R
Reverse gear
Only shift the transmission to R when the vehicle is stationary.
N Neutral
No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive wheels.
Releasing the brakes will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it.
Do not shift the transmission to while driving. The transmission could otherwise be damaged.
If ESP ^ is deactivated or faulty: only shift the transmission to position N if the vehicle is in of skidding, e.g. on icy roads.
D Drive
The transmission shifts into drive programs (C/S/S+) automatically. All forward gears are available.
function reduces the load change reaction on the drive axle. The sound generated by the double-clutch function and its characteristics depend on the drive program selected.
Kickdown
N i Kickdown is not available in manual drive program M.
Use kickdown for maximum acceleration:
▶ In the automatic drive programs, depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure get point.
Depending on the selected drive program, the transmission shifts to the lowest gear permissible to give optimal acceleration.
Drive program selector
With the drive program selector switch, you can choose from a range of different transmission configurations or select the RACE START drive mode.
Changing gear
The transmission shifts into individual gears automatically. This is determined by:
- drive position D
• the selected drive program (C/S/S+)
• the position of the accelerator pedal - the road speed
- a shift range restriction, if selected The shift points primarily depend on:
- the position of the accelerator pedal Little throttle: early upshifts; high throttle: late upshifts
- the driving dynamics A dynamic driving style with high longitudinal and lateral acceleration delays the shift points to higher engine speeds.
text_image
1 S S' C M RS P27.60-3505-31Driving tips
Double-clutch function
When shifting down, the double-clutch function is active regardless of the currently selected drive program. The double-clutch
| Drive program | Characteristic |
| C Controlled Efficiency | Comfort-oriented, optimum-economy engine and transmission settings |
| S Sport Sporty engine and transmission settings | |
| S+ SportPlus | Extremely sporty engine and transmission settings |
| Drive program | Characteristic |
M Manual Manual gear shifting
Driving mode
| RS RACE START | Optimal vehicle acceleration from a standstill |
text_image
Interior view of a Mercedes-Benz car dashboard with labeled parts and control buttons▶ Turn drive program selector switch ① until the desired drive program is shown in the multifunction display.
In addition to the drive program being shown in the multifunction display, the currently selected drive program is indicated in red on the drive program selector switch.
i RS cannot be selected during normal driving. For further information on RACE START, see (▷ page 125).
Left steering wheel paddle shifter (DOWN): shift down/restrict shift range
② Right steering wheel paddle shifter (UP) shift up/derestrict shift range
RACE START
RACE START enables optimal acceleration from a standing start under suitable high-grip road surface conditions.
RACE START is intended solely for activation on dedicated race circuits.
Steering wheel paddle shifters
In transmission position D, you can use the You can activate RACE START if:
steering wheel paddle shifters to restrict or derestrict the transmission shift range. One of the automatic drive programs C, S and + must be selected in order to do so.
In manual drive program M, you need to change gear yourself using the steering wheel paddle shifters. The transmission shifts down automatically at low engine speeds.
In manual drive program M, the transmission shift and response times are significantly shorter with sportier and more aggressive gear changes.
- the doors are closed.
- the engine is running and the engine and transmission are at operating temperature. (▶ page 161)
- SPORT handling mode is switched on. ee(> page 56)
- the steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position.
- the vehicle is stationary and the brake pedal is depressed (left foot).
• the transmission is set to D.
Activating RACE START
▶ Depress the brake pedal with your left and keep it depressed.
▶ Turn the drive program selector switch clockwise (▷ page 124) until the RS indicator on the switch lights up in red. The multifunction display shows the message RACE START Confirm: Paddle UP Cancel: Paddle DOWN.
If the conditions for activation are not fulfilled, RACE START is canceled. The RACE START Not Possible message appears in the multifunction display.
▶ To cancel: pull the left-hand steering wheel
paddle shifter (DOWN) (▷ page 125).
The multifunction display shows the
START Canceled message.
▶ To confirm: pull the right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter (UP) ( page 125). The RACE START Available Depress gas pedal message appears in the multifunction display.
If you do not depress the accelerator pedal within a few seconds, RACE START canceled. The multifunction display shows the RACE START Canceled message.
▶ Fully depress the accelerator pedal. The engine speed is increased. The RACE START Release brake to startstart message appears in the multifunction display.
If you do not release the brake pedal within a few seconds, RACE START is canceled. The multifunction display shows the RACE START Canceled message.
▶ Take your foot off the brake pedal while keeping the accelerator pedal fully depressed.
The vehicle pulls away at maximum acceleration.
The RACE START Active message appears in the multifunction display.
RACE START is deactivated when the vehicle reaches a speed of approximately 30 mph
(50 km/h). Drive program S+ is activated. SPORT handling mode remains switched on. RACE START is deactivated immediately if you release the accelerator pedal during RACE START or if any of the activation conditions are no longer fulfilled. The RACERACE START Not Possible or RACE START Canceled message appears in the multifunction display.
i If RACE START is used repeatedly within a short period of time, it is only available again after the vehicle has been driven a certain distance.
Automatic drive program
Drive program C is characterized by the following:
- comfort-oriented engine and transmission settings
- optimal fuel consumption resulting from the transmission shifting up sooner
- the vehicle pulling away more gently in forward and reverse gears, unless the accelerator pedal is depressed fully
- increased sensitivity. This improves driving stability on slippery road surfaces, for example
- the transmission shifting up sooner; This results in the vehicle being driven at lower engine speeds and the wheels being less likely to spin
Drive programs S and S+ are characterized by the following:
• sporty engine and transmission settings
• the transmission shifting up later and shifting down dynamically
• as a result of the later transmission upshifts, the fuel consumption may be higher
- if a period of dynamic driving is followed by an extended phase with a constant
accelerator pedal position, the vehicle
shifts up to a higher gear. This optimizes fuel consumption
If a gentle driving style is adopted in automatic drive programs C/S/S+, the drive program settings are adjusted to optimize fuel consumption. Depending on the operating conditions, the transmission shifts to a higher gear.
Shift ranges
Introduction
In certain driving situations, it is recommended that you restrict the shift range. The set shift range appears in the instrument cluster's multifunction display ( page 123). The transmission only shifts to the gear displayed in the instrument cluster. When the maximum engine speed is reached, the transmission shifts up a gear in the automatic programs C/S/S+. Gear restriction is correspondingly increased by one gear.
| Driving situation | |
| 3 | The braking effect of the engine be utilized in this position |
| 2 | You can use the braking effect of the engine on downhill gradients and for driving:on steep mountain roadsin mountainous terrainin arduous conditions |
| 1 | To use the braking effect of the engine on extremely steep downh gradients and on long downhill stretches |
sDerestricting the shift range/shifting up
▶ Pull the right steering wheel paddle (UP) The shift range is derestricted. If you a driving in manual drive program M, the transmission shifts up to the next gear.
Restricting the shift range/shifting down
▶ Pull the left steering wheel paddle (DOWN). The transmission shifts down one gear and restricts the shift range to this gear. If the engine speed in manual drive program M is too high, it is not possible to shift down. If you pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter (DOWN)
(▷ page 128), the two red segments in the instrument cluster flash.
Clearing the shift range restriction
▶ Pull the right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter (UP) until the number for the gear disappears from the multifunction display. or
can Use the E-SELECT lever to shift the transmission to position D. f The transmission shifts from the current shift range directly to D.
Selecting the ideal shift range
▶ Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter repeatedly until the function is activated. Depending on the selected drive program, the transmission shifts to a gear which allows ideal acceleration and deceleration. To do this, the transmission shifts down one or more gears.
Manual drive program
In manual drive program M, the transmission shift and response times are
significantly shorter with sportier and more white segments ① and yellow segment ② aggressive gear changes. light up in succession from left to right.
In manual drive program M, you need to When red segments ③ light up and the "up" change gear yourself using the steering when message appears in the multifunction paddle shifters (▶ page 125). The display, the ideal shift point has been transmission only shifts down automatically reached:
at low engine speeds depending on the respective gear.
In manual drive program M, the transmission does not shift up automatically even when the engine limiting speed for the current gear is reached. When the engine limiting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to prevent the engine from overrevving. Always make sure that the engine speed does not reach
the red area of the tachometer and observe you cannot shift down with the left steering the upshift indicator. There is otherwise a wheel paddle shifter if the engine speed is too risk of engine damage. high due to a downshift. If you then pull the
▶ Shift up using the right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter (UP) as quickly as possible. The vehicle shifts up to the next gear.
If you continue to increase the engine speed without shifting up in time, the fuel supply is shut off to protect the engine. This results in abruptly reduced acceleration.
Display for downshift override
▶ To activate the manual drive program: left steering wheel paddle shifter, both red turn the drive program selector switch un segments ③ light up briefly.
M appears in the instrument cluster's multifunction display.
M lights up in red on the drive program AMG button (SETUP) selector switch.
▶ To deactivate the manual drive with the AMG button, you can call up and program: turn the drive program selector store a default drive program setting and the switch and select another drive program. default suspension tuning.
Upshift indicator
The upshift indicator is a four-stage display designed to assist you in sporty driving.
text_image
1 2 3 123.4 miles 12657The upshift indicator allows you to recognize the ideal shift point for dynamic acceleration.
text_image
1 AMG P54.25-8722-31▶ To store: press and hold AMG button until you hear a tone.
▶ To call up: press AMG button ①.
The stored drive program is selected.
▶ To display: briefly press AMG button ① The multifunction display shows the SETU in the AMG menu (▷ page 161).
① ⚠️ WARNING
Electrostatic buildup can create sparks and ignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire and explosion.
.Always touch the vehicle body before opening the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump nozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup is thereby discharged.
Refueling
Important safety notes
WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explosion.
You must avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before refueling.
WARNING
Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury.
You must make sure that fuel does not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale vapors. Keep fuel away from children.
If you or others come into contact with fuel observe the following:
- Wash away fuel from skin immediately using soap and water.
- If fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical assistance without delay.
- If fuel is swallowed, seek medical assistance without delay. Do not induce vomiting.
- Immediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with fuel.
! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.
! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the fuel system.
! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork.
! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can. The Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injection system could be blocked by particles from fuehe fuel can.
If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray out when the fuel pump nozzle is removed.
Further information on fuel and on fuel grades can be found in the "Fuel" section (▷ page 280).
Refueling
Fuel filler flap
When you open or close the vehicle with the SmartKey, the fuel filler flap is automatically unlocked or locked.
The fuel filler flap is located to the rear on the right. The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed in the instrument cluster □. The arrow next to the filling pump indicates the side of the vehicle.
text_image
1 2 3 4 P88.60-2283-31① To open the fuel filler flap
② Tire pressure table
③ Fuel type
④ To insert the fuel filler cap
Opening
▶ Switch off the engine.
When the engine is running and the fuel filler flap is open, the engine diagnostics warning lamp may light up.
Further information can be found in the "Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster" chapter (▷ page 195).
▶ Open the driver's door. This switches the ignition to position 0, which corresponds to having removed the SmartKey. The driver's door can be closed again.
▶ Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of arrow ①.
The fuel filler flap opens slightly.
▶ Open the fuel filler flap.
▶ Turn the fuel filler cap counter-clockwise and remove it.
▶ Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder bracket on the inside of filler flap ④.
▶ Completely insert the fuel pump nozzle into the filler neck and refuel.
▶ Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle switches off.
! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the fuel system.
Closing
▶ Replace the fuel filler cap and turn it clockwise. The fuel filler cap audibly engages.
▶ Close the fuel filler flap.
Problems with fuel and the fuel tank
| Problem | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| Fuel is leaking from the vehicle. | Risk of explosion or fireThe fuel line or the fuel tank is defective.► Set the Start/Stop button to key position 0 immediately.► Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.► Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
| The fuel filler flap cannot be opened. | The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.orThe SmartKey battery is discharged.► Unlock the vehicle (▷ page 68).or► Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (▷ page 71). |
| The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism jammed.► Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
Parking
Important safety notes
WARNING
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust gas flow. There is a risk of fire.
Park the vehicle so that no flammable materials come into contact with parts of the vehicle which are hot. Take particular care not to park on dry grassland or harvested grain fields.
WARNING
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
- release the parking brake.
- shift the automatic transmission out of the parking position P.
- start the engine.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
! If the engine speed is too high or if the vehicle is rolling, do not shift the transmission directly from D to R, from R to D or directly to P.
Do not open the driver's door while the vehicle is in motion. At low speeds in transmission position D or R, park position P is otherwise engaged automatically. The transmission could be damaged.
! Always secure the vehicle correctly against rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle or its drivetrain could be damaged.
To ensure that the vehicle is secured again using the Start/Stop button
rolling away unintentionally:
• the electric parking brake must be applied.
- the transmission must be in position P.
- the SmartKey must be in position 0 in the
ignition lock and then removed from the ignition lock, or the Start/Stop button may be pressed.
- on steep uphill or downhill gradients, turn the front wheels towards the curb.
- on steep uphill or downhill gradients, the front axle of an empty vehicle must be secured, for example with a wheel chock.
- on steep uphill or downhill gradients, the rear axle of a laden vehicle must be additionally secured, for example with a wheel chock.
Switching off the engine
Important safety notes
WARNING
When the engine is switched off, the transmission shifts into neutral position N. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident.
After switching off the engine, always switch to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking brake.
! Do not open the driver's door while the vehicle is in motion. At low speeds in transmission position D or R, park position P is otherwise engaged automatically. This can damage the transmission.
i Observe the display messages in the instrument cluster (▷ page 163).
AMG SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-speed sports transmission
▶ Shift the transmission to P with the button in the center console.
▶ Press the Start/Stop button (▷ page 119).
The engine stops and all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out.
Apply the electric parking brake.
i The engine can be turned off while the vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/Stop button for about three seconds.
If you switch the engine off with the transmission in position R or D, the transmission automatically shifts to N. If you move the E-SELECT lever to N before switching off the engine, the transmission remains in N for approximately 30 minutes.
If you open the driver's or front-passenger door during this period, the transmission automatically shifts to P.
Using the SmartKey
! Do not remove the SmartKey while the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, at low speeds, parking lock P will be activated automatically.
Do not open the driver's door while the vehicle is in motion. At low speeds, transmission position P is engaged automatically.
This could cause damage to the transmission and the parking lock.
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it.
The parking lock is activated.
Apply the electric parking brake.
If you move the E-SELECT lever to N before switching off the engine, the transmission remains in N for approximately 30 minutes. If you open the driver's or front-passenger door during this period, the transmission automatically shifts to P.
The transmission remains in N if:
- the SmartKey is in the ignition lock and - you use the E-SELECT lever to shift the transmission to N before switching the engine off
This still applies if you open the driver's front-passenger door.
Further information on transmission position N when operating with a SmartKey0.
is available in the "Car wash" section (▷ page 223).
Electric parking brake
General notes
WARNING
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
- release the parking brake.
- shift the automatic transmission out of parking position P.
- start the engine.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. I leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with a highlighted control panel showing the number 1 (no text or symbols on the main component)Applying/releasing manually
To engage: push handle ①.
When the electric parking brake is engaged, the red PARK (USA only) or (P) (Canada only) indicator lamp light up in the instrument cluster.
The electric parking brake can also be applied when the SmartKey is in position
▶ Pull handle ①.
The red PARK (USA only) or (P) (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.
The electric parking brake can only then be released when the ignition is switched on using the Start/Stop button.
Releasing the electric parking brake automatically
The electric parking brake is released automatically when the following conditions the are simultaneously fulfilled:
• the engine is running.
• the transmission is in position D or R.
- the hood is closed.
- your seat belt is fastened.
- you accelerate.
r the transmission is in position R, the trunk lid must be closed.
If your seat belt is not fastened, the following conditions must be fulfilled to automatically release the electric parking brake:
• the driver's door is closed.
- you have shifted out of P or you have previously driven faster than 2 mph (3 km/h).
Emergency braking
The vehicle can also be braked during an emergency by using the electric parking brake.
▶ While driving, push handle ① of the electric more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk parking brake (▶ page 133).
The vehicle is braked as long as you keep Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
the handle of the electric parking brake pressed. The longer the electric parking brake handle is depressed, the greater braking force.
During braking:
• a warning tone sounds
• the Release Parking Brake message appears
- the red PARK (USA only) or (P) (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster appears.
When the vehicle has been braked to a standstill, the electric parking brake is engaged.
WARNING
If you operate mobile communication equipment while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only operate this equipment when the vehicle is stationary.
Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are driving. Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a mobile phone while driving a vehicle.
If you make a call while driving, always use hands-free mode. Only operate the telephone when the traffic situation permits. If you are unsure, pull over to a safe location and stop before operating the telephone.
Parking the vehicle for a long period
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer four weeks, the battery may be damaged exhaustive discharging.
If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer second. than six weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as a result of lack of use.
▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seek advice.
You can obtain information about trickle chargers from a qualified specialist workshop.
Driving tips
General driving tips
Important safety notes
WARNING
If you switch off the ignition while driving, and safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably
than bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers a distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per second.
Drive sensibly - save fuel
Observe the following tips to save fuel:
▶ The tires should always be inflated to the recommended tire pressure.
▶ Remove unnecessary loads.
▶ Warm up the engine at low engine speeds.
▶ Avoid frequent acceleration or braking.
▶ Have all maintenance work carried out according to the service intervals listed in the Maintenance Booklet or the service interval display.
Fuel consumption also increases when driving in cold weather, in stop-start traffic and in hilly terrain.
Drinking and driving
WARNING
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs driving are very dangerous combinations. Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs affect your reflexes, perceptions and judgment.
The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident is greatly increased when you drink or take drugs and drive.
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow anyone to drive who has been drinking or taking drugs.
Emission control
WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation.
Certain engine systems are designed to keep the level of poisonous components in exhaust fumes within legal limits.
These systems only work at peak efficiency they are serviced exactly in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. For this reason, all work on the engine must be carried out by qualified and authorized Mercedes-Benz technicians.
The engine settings must not be changed under any circumstances. Furthermore, all specific service work must be carried out a regular intervals and in accordance with the Mercedes-Benz service requirements. Details can be found in the Maintenance Booklet.
Braking
Important safety notes
and
WARNING
can
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents.
Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface.
Downhill gradients
! On long and steep gradients, you must reduce the load on the brakes by shifting early to a lower gear. This allows you to advantage of the engine braking effect and helps avoid overheating and excessive wear of the brakes.
When you take advantage of the engine braking effect, a drive wheel may not turn for some time, e.g. on a slippery road surface. This could cause damage to the drive train. This type of damage is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty.
Heavy and light loads
WARNING
If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving, the braking system can overheat. This increases the stopping distance and can even cause the braking system to fail. There is a risk of an accident.
Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never depress the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal at the same time.
! Depressing the brake pedal constantly results in excessive and premature wear to the brake pads.
If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy load, do not stop the vehicle immediately. Drive on for a short while. This allows the airflow to cool the brakes more quickly.
Wet roads
If you have driven for a long time in heavy without braking, there may be a delayed reaction from the brakes when braking for t first time. This may also occur after the vehicle has been washed or driven through deep water.
You have to depress the brake pedal more firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the vehicle in front.
After driving on a wet road or having the vehicle washed, brake firmly while paying attention to the traffic conditions. This will warm up the brake discs, thereby drying the more quickly and protecting them against corrosion.
Limited braking performance on salt-treated roads
If you drive on salted roads, a layer of saltCenter.
residue may form on the brake discs and If the brake system has only been subject to brake pads. This can result in a significantly moderate loads, you should test the longer braking distance. functionality of your brakes at regular
- Brake occasionally to remove any possible intervals. To do so, press firmly on the brake salt residue. Make sure that you do not pedal when driving at a high speed. This endanger other road users when doing so improves the grip of the brake pads.
- Carefully depress the brake pedal and the You can find a description of Brake Assist beginning and end of a journey. (BAS) on (▷ page 55).
- Maintain a greater distance to the vehicle Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only ahead. have brake pads/linings installed on your
entervals. To do so, press firmly on the brake pedal when driving at a high speed. This improves the grip of the brake pads.
You can find a description of Brake Assist (BAS) on (▷ page 55).
Servicing the brakes
! If the red brake warning lamp lights up the instrument cluster and you hear a warning tone while the engine is running, the brake fluid level may be too low. Observe additional warning messages in the multifunction display.
The brake fluid level may be too low due to brake pad wear or leaking brake lines. Have the brake system checked immediately. This work should be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
! As the ESP system operates automatically, the engine and the ignition rain must be switched off (the SmartKey must be in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock or the Start/Stop button must be in position 0 or 1) if:
- the electric parking brake is tested using a brake dynamometer.
- the vehicle is towed with one axle raised.
Braking triggered automatically by ESP may seriously damage the brake system.
All checks and maintenance work on the brake system must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Have this work carried out at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Have the brake pads replaced and the brake fluid renewed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz
If the brake system has only been subject to moderate loads, you should test the functionality of your brakes at regular
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only have brake pads/linings installed on your vehicle which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which correspond to an equivalent quality standard. Brake pads/linings which have not been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which are not of an equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's operating safety.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use brake fluid that has been specially approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which corresponds to an equivalent quality standard. Brake fluid which has not been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which is not of an equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's operating safety.
AMG high-performance composite brake system
The AMG high-performance compound brake system and the AMG ceramic high-performance compound brake system are designed for high loads. This may lead to noise when braking. This will depend on:
- Speed
- Braking force
• Environmental conditions, such as temperature and humidity
The wear of individual components of the brake system, such as the brake pads/linir or brake discs, depends on the individual driving style and operating conditions.
For this reason, it is impossible to state a mileage that will be valid under all circumstances. An aggressive driving style will lead to high wear. You can obtain furt information about this from your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
New and replaced brake pads and discs only reach their optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometers of driving. Compensate for this by applying greater force to the brake pedal. Keep this in mind, and adapt your driving and braking accordingly during this break-in period.
Excessive heavy braking results in correspondingly high brake wear. Observe the brake wear warning lamp in the instrument cluster and note any brake status messages in the multifunction display. Especially for high performance driving, it is important to maintain and have the brake system checked regularly.
Driving on wet roads
Hydroplaning
If water has accumulated to a certain depth on the road surface, there is a danger of hydroplaning occurring, even if:
- you drive at low speeds.
• the tires have adequate tread depth.
For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or in conditions in which hydroplaning may occur, you must drive in the following manner:
ngslower your speed.
- avoid ruts.
- brake carefully.
Driving on flooded roads
Do not drive through flooded areas.
Check the depth of any water before driving through it. Drive slowly through standing water. Otherwise, water may enter the vehicle interior or the engine compartment. This can damage the electronic components in the engine or the automatic transmission. Water can also be drawn in by the engine's air suction nozzles and this can cause engine damage.
Winter driving
S! WARNING
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents.
Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface.
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle
becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of fatal injury.
If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating running, make sure the exhaust pipe and are around the vehicle are clear of snow. To ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open a window on the side of the vehicle that is facing into the wind.
At the onset of winter, have your vehicle winterized at a qualified specialist workshop e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center Drive particularly carefully on slippery road surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering, and braking maneuvers. Do not use cruise control.
If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be stopped when moving at low speed:
▶ Shift the transmission to position N.
The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. Changes in the outside temperature are displayed after a short delay.
Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the ro surface is free of ice. The road may still be especially in wooded areas or on bridges. should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around the freezing point.
For more information on driving with snow chains, see (▷ page 251).
For more information on driving with summer tires, see ( page 250).
Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" section (▷ page 250).
Driving systems
Cruise control
important safety notes
Cruise control maintains a constant road speed for you. It brakes automatically in order to avoid exceeding the set speed.
On long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden, you must select shift range 1, 2 or 3 in good time ( page 127). By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This gelieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly.
If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise control can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics.
Cruise control cannot take into account the road, traffic and weather conditions. Cruise control is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane.
Use cruise control only if road and traffic conditions make it appropriate to maintain a beteely speed for a prolonged period. You can get any road speed above 20 mph (30 km/h).
Do not use cruise control:
- in road and traffic conditions which do not allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding roads - on slippery road surfaces. Braking or accelerating could cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid
- when there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow
If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the speed stored.
Cruise control lever
text_image
① ③ ② ④ P54.25-8223-31① To store the current speed or a higher speed
② To store the current speed or a lower speed
③ To deactivate cruise control
④ To store the current speed or call up the last stored speed
When you activate cruise control, the stored speed is shown in the lower section of the multifunction display.
Storing the current speed or calling up the last stored speed
WARNING
If you call up the stored speed and it differs from the current speed, the vehicle accelerates or decelerates. If you do not know the stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.
Pay attention to the road and traffic conditions before calling up the stored speed. If you do not know the stored speed, store the desired speed again.
▶ Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ④.
▶ Remove your foot from the accelerator
he pedal.
The first time cruise control is activated, it stores the current speed or regulates the speed of the vehicle to the previously stored speed.
Storing and maintaining the current speed
You can store the current speed if you are driving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).
▶ Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.
▶ Briefly press the cruise control lever up ① or down ② to the pressure point
▶ Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
Cruise control is activated. The vehicle automatically maintains the stored speed.
Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. Cruise control maintains the stored speed on downhill gradients by automatically applying the brakes.
Setting a speed
Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to the speed set.
▶ Press the cruise control lever to the pressure point, up ① for a higher speed or down ② for a lower speed.
▶ Keep the cruise control lever pressed until the desired speed is reached.
▶ Release the cruise control lever. The new speed is stored.
Cruise control is not deactivated if you in depress the accelerator pedal. For example, if you accelerate briefly to overtake, cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking.
Making adjustments in 1 mph increments
▶ Briefly press the cruise control lever to t pressure point, up ① for a higher speed down ② for a lower speed. The last speed stored is increased or reduced.
Making adjustments in 10 mph increments
▶ Briefly press the cruise control lever beyond the pressure point, up ① for a higher speed or down ② for a lower s. The last speed stored is increased or reduced.
Deactivating cruise control
There are several ways to deactivate cruise control:
▶ Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards ③.
or
▶ Brake.
Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:
- you press the electric parking brake handle.
- you are driving below 20 mph (30 km/h).
- ESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP
- you shift the transmission to N while the vehicle is in motion.
If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. The "Cruise Control Off" message is displayed in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds.
The last speed stored is cleared when switch off the engine.
AMG adaptive sport suspension system
be General notes
The electronically controlled damping system works continuously. This improves driving safety and ride comfort.
The damping is tuned individually to each wheel and depends on:
- your driving style, e.g. sporty
• the road surface condition, e.g. bumps - your individual selection of Sport, Sport + or Comfort
If you select Comfort or Sport + mode and restart the engine, the mode reverts to Sport.
i GT model: you can only choose between Sport and Sport + modes. If you select Sport + mode and restart the engine, the mode reverts to Sport.
text_image
1 2 4 3 AMG P54.25-8726-31^8 Sport mode
The firmer suspension tuning in Sport mode ensures even better contact with the road. Select this mode when employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country roads.
▶ Press button ① once. you Indicator lamp ④ lights up. You have selected Sport mode. The AMG Ride Control SPORT message appears in the multifunction display.
i GT model: Sport mode is the standard setting. Indicator lamp ④ cannot be switched off.
Sport + mode
The very firm setting of the suspension tunin in Sport + mode ensures the best possible contact with the road. Select this mode only when driving on race circuits.
If indicator lamps ③ and ④ are off:
▶ Press button ① twice.
Indicator lamps ③ and ④ light up. You have selected Sport + mode.
The AMG Ride Control SPORT + message appears in the multifunction display.
If indicator lamp ④ lights up:
▶ Press button ① once.
Second indicator lamp ③ lights up. You have selected Sport + mode.
The AMG Ride Control SPORT + message appears in the multifunction display.
Comfort mode
i GT model: Comfort mode is unavailable. In comfort mode, the driving characteristics of your vehicle are more comfortable. Select this mode if you favor a more comfortable driving style, but also when driving fast on straight roads, e.g. freeways.
▶ Press button ① repeatedly until indicator lamps ③ and ④ go out. You have selected Comfort mode.
The AMG Ride Control COMFORT message appears in the multifunction display.
Storing and calling up settings
Once the suspension tuning and drive program have been selected, you can store and call up your settings using AMG button ②.
▶ To store: press AMG button ② until you hear a tone.
▶ To call up: press AMG button ②. The stored suspension tuning and drive ning program are selected.
To display: briefly press AMG button ② Your selection appears in the multifunction display.
PARKTRONIC
Important safety notes
PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid w ultrasonic sensors. It indicates visually and audibly the distance between your vehicle and an object.
PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your immediate surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a parking space. When maneuvering, parking or pulling out of a parking space, make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the area in which you are maneuvering.
When parking, pay particular attention to objects above or below the sensors, such as flower pots or trailer drawbars.
PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects when they are in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. You could damage the vehicle or the objects.
The sensors may not detect snow and other objects that absorb ultrasonic waves.
Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car wash, the compressed-air brakes on a truck or a pneumatic drill could cause PARKTRONIC to malfunction.
PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on uneven terrain.
PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when you:
- switch on the ignition
- Release the electric parking brake.
PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above 11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds.
PARKTRONIC monitors the area around your vehicle using four sensors in the front bumper and four sensors in the rear bumper.
text_image
① ① P54.65-4046-31① Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand side (example)
Range of the sensors
General notes
PARKTRONIC does not take objects into consideration that are:
- below the detection range, e.g. people, animals or objects
- above the detection range, e.g. overhanging loads, truck overhangs or loading ramps.
The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or slush. They can otherwise not function correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them (▷ page 228).
text_image
100 50 0 [cm] 40 20 0 (in ) 0 50 120 (cm) 0 24 48 (in ) P54.65-4047-31Example: side view (Coupe)
text_image
e er per 100 50 0 (cm) 40 20 0 (in ) 0 60 120 (cm) 0 24 48 (in ) P54.65-4196-31Example: top view (Coupe)
Front sensors
Center Approx. 40 in (approx. 100 cm)
Corners Approx. 24 in (approx. 60 cm)
Rear sensors
Center Approx. 48 in (approx. 120 cm)
Corners Approx. 32 in (approx. 80 cm)
Minimum distance
Center Approx. 12 in (approx. 30 cm)
Corners Approx. 12 in (approx. 30 cm)
If there is an obstacle within this range, the relevant warning displays light up and a warning tone sounds. If the distance falls below the minimum, the distance may no longer be shown.
Warning displays
The warning displays show the distance between the sensors and the obstacle. The warning display for the front area is located on the dashboard above the center air vents. The warning display for the rear area is in the rear compartment on the parcel shelf.
text_image
1 2 3Warning display for the front area
① Left-hand side of the vehicle
② Right-hand side of the vehicle
③ Segments showing operational readiness
The warning display for each side of the vehicle is divided into five yellow and two segments. PARKTRONIC is operational if yellow segments showing operational readiness ③ light up.
The selector lever position determines which warning display is active while the engine is running:
| Transmission position | Warning display |
| D | Front area activated |
| R or N Rear and | front areas activated |
| P | No areas activated |
Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC
text_image
OFF P ① ② P54.65-4534-31① Indicator lamp
② To deactivate/activate PARKTRONIC
If indicator lamp ① lights up, PARKTRONIC is deactivated.
red
i PARKTRONIC is automatically activated when you switch on the ignition and release the electric parking brake.
One or more segments light up as the vehicle approaches an obstacle, depending on the vehicle's distance from the obstacle.
From the:
- sixth segment onwards, you will hear an intermittent warning tone for approximately two seconds.
- seventh segment onwards, you will hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds. This indicates that you have now reached the minimum distance.
Problems with PARKTRONIC
| Problem | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| Only the red segments in the PARKTRONIC warning displays are lit. You also hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds.PARKTRONIC is deactivated after approximately 20 seconds, and the indicator lamp in the PARKTRONIC button lights up. | PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off. ▶ If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualif specialist workshop. |
| Only the red segments in the PARKTRONIC warning displays are lit. PARKTRONIC is deactivated after approximately 20 seconds. | The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference. ▶ Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (▷ page 228). ▶ Switch the ignition back on. |
| The problem may be caused by an external source of radio ultrasound waves. ▶ See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location. |
Rear view camera
Important safety notes
The rear view camera is only an aid. It is a replacement for your attention to your immediate surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering and parking. When maneuvering or parking, may sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the area in which you are maneuvering.
Under the following circumstances, the rear view camera will not function, or will functi in a limited manner:
- if the trunk lid is open
• in heavy rain, snow or fog
• at night or in very dark places -
if the camera is exposed to very bright light
-
if the area is lit by fluorescent light or LED lighting (the display may flicker)
- if there is a sudden change in temperature, not-g. when driving into a heated garage in winter
- if the camera lens is dirty or obstructed
- if the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this event, have the camera position and setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop
The field of vision and other functions of the rear view camera may be restricted due to additional accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g. license plate holder, bicycle rack).
General notes
Rear view camera ① is an optical parking. It shows the area behind your vehicle in t COMAND display.
natural_image
Front view of a Mercedes-Benz car with a close-up inset showing a component detail (no text or symbols visible)View through the camera
The area behind the vehicle is displayed mirror image, as in the rear view mirror.
! Objects not at ground level may appear, be further away than they actually are, e
• the bumper of a parked vehicle
• the drawbar of a trailer
• the ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch
• the rear section of an HGV
- a slanted post
Use the guidelines only for orientation. Approach objects no further than the bottom-most guideline.
The rear view camera may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all. The rear view camera does not objects in the following positions:
• very close to the rear bumper
• under the rear bumper
• in the area immediately above the tailgate handle
Activating the rear view camera
▶ Ensure that key position 2 has been selected with the Start/Stop button.
▶ Make sure that the "rear view camera" function is selected in COMAND (see the
separate operating instructions for (COMAND).
▶ Engage reverse gear.
The COMAND display shows the area behind the vehicle.
You can also switch off the display of the area behind the vehicle in the COMAND display.
Blind Spot Assist
General notes
Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system to monitor the areas on both sides of your vehicle. It supports you from a speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). A warning display in the exterior mirrors draws your attention to vehicles detected in the monitored area. If you then switch on the corresponding turn signal to change lanes,
you will also receive a visual and audible collision warning. For this purpose, Blind Spot Assist uses sensors in the rear bumper.
Important safety notes
Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to detect some vehicles and is no substitute for attentive driving.
WARNING
Blind Spot Assist does not react to:
• vehicles overtaken too closely on the side, placing them in the blind spot area
show vehicles which approach with a large speed differential and overtake your vehicle
As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not give warnings in such situations. There is a risk of an accident.
Always observe the traffic conditions carefully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.
i USA only:
This device has been approved by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor is intended for use in an automotive radar system only. Removing, tampering
with, or altering the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use any non-approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Monitoring range of the sensors
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if:
- dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors
- there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, rain or snow
- a narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a motorbike or bicycle
• the road has very wide lanes
• the road has narrow lanes - you are not driving in the middle of the
• there are barriers or similar lane borders
Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated.
text_image
118 in (300 cm) 19.7 in 50 cm 118 in (300 cm) 19.7 in 50 cm 118 in (300 cm) P54.70-2592-31Example (Roadster)
Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to 10 ft (3 m) behind your vehicle and direct next to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram. If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane. This may be the case if the vehicles are driving on the inner side of their lane.
Due to the nature of the system:
- warnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar solid lane borders.
- warnings may be interrupted when driving alongside particularly long vehicles, e.g. trucks, for a prolonged time.
The two sensors for Blind Spot Assist are integrated into the sides of the rear bumper. Make sure that the bumper is free of dirt, ice or slush in the vicinity of the sensors. The radar sensors must not be covered, e.g. by overhanging loads. Following a severe impact or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have the function of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist may otherwise not work properly.
Indicator and warning display
text_image
P54.70-2593-31① Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp
When Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator lamp ① in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow up to a speed of 20 mph (30 km/h). At speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), the indicator lamp goes out and Blind Spot Assist is operational.
If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), warning lamp ① on the corresponding side lights up red. This warning
is always given when a vehicle enters the blind spot monitoring range from behind or from the side. When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only occurs if the difference in speed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h).
The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse gear is engaged. In this event, Blind Spot Assist is no longer active.
The brightness of the indicator/warning lamps is adjusted automatically according to the ambient light.
Collision warning
If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range of Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the corresponding turn signal, a double warning tone sounds. Red warning lamp ① flashes. If the turn signal remains on, vehicles detected are indicated by the flashing of red warning lamp ①. There are no further warning tones.
Switching on Blind Spot Assist
▶ Make sure that Blind Spot Assist (▷ page 157) is activated in the on-board computer.
▶ Ensure that key position 2 has been selected with the Start/Stop button. Warning lamps ① in the exterior mirrors light up red for approximately 1.5 seconds and then turn yellow.
Useful information 150
Important safety notes 15
Displays and operation 15
Menus and submenus 15
Display messages 163
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 190
Displays and operation
Useful information
This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.
i Please read the information on qualified specialist workshops (▷ page 22).
Important safety notes
You will find an illustration of the instrument cluster in the "At a glance" section (▷ page 27).
WARNING
If you operate information systems and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only operate the equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equipment when the vehicle is stationary.
WARNING
If the instrument cluster has failed or malfunctioned, you may not recognize function restrictions in systems relevant to safety. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident.
Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the on-board computer.
The on-board computer only shows messages or warnings from certain systems in the multifunction display. You should therefore make sure your vehicle is operating safely at all times. Otherwise, a vehicle that is not operating safely may cause an accident.
Displays and operation
Engine oil temperature display
The engine oil temperature gauge is in the instrument cluster on the right-hand side. Under normal operating conditions, the temperature may rise to 140 °C.
The transmission fluid temperature and the coolant temperature are displayed in the AMG menu (▷ page 161).
Tachometer
The red band in the tachometer indicates the engine's overrevving range.
! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as this could damage the engine.
She fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine when the red band is reached.
Outside temperature display
You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around freezing point.
The outside temperature display is in the multifunction display (▷ page 152).
Changes in the outside temperature are displayed after a short delay.
Operating the on-board computer
text_image
1 2 3 4 5 P46.10-3118-31① Multifunction display
② Switches on the Voice Control System; see the separate operating instructions
③ Right control panel
④ Left control panel
⑤ Back button
| ▲ | Press and hold: |
| ▼ | • In the Audio menu: selects the previous/next station or selects an audio track or a video scene using rapid scrolling• In the Tel (telephone) menu: starts rapid scrolling through the phone book |
| OK | • Confirms a selection/display message• In the Tel (Telephone) menu: switches to the telephone book and starts dialing the selected number• In the Audio menu: stops the station search function at the desired station |
▶ To activate the on-board computer: turn
the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock.
You can control the multifunction display and the settings in the on-board computer using the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel.
Right control panel
| • Rejects or ends a call• Exits phone book/redial memory | |
| • Makes or accepts a call• Switches to the redial memory | |
| • Adjusts the volume | |
| • Mute |
Back button
Press briefly:
- Back
- Switches off the Voice Control System; see the separate operating instructions
- Hides display messages/calls up the last Trip menu function used
- Exits the telephone book/redial memory
Press and hold:
- Calls up the standard display in the TripTrip menu
Multifunction display
Values and settings as well as display messages are shown in the multifunction display.
text_image
PRND S 149.9 miles 2673 Trip Navi Audio Tel 11:18 70°F P54.32-3028-31① Selector lever position/shift range and drive program
② Text field
③ Menu bar
④ Status line with time and outside temperature
▶ To show menu bar③: press the ▶ or ▶ button on the steering wheel.
Menus and submenus
Menu overview
Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to call up the menu bar and select a menu.
Operating the on-board computer (▷ page 151).
Depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle, you can call up the following menus:
- TripTrip menu (▷ page 152)
- NaviNavi menu (navigation instructions) (▷ page 153)
• AudioAudio menu (▷ page 154) - Tel menu (telephone) (▷ page 156)
- DriveAssistDriveAssist menu (assistance) (▷ page 157)
• Service menu (▷ page 157) - Settings menu (▷ page 157)
- AMGANG menu (▷ page 161)
Trip menu
Standard display
text_image
PRND S 149.9 miles 2673 Trip Navi Audio Tel 11:18 70°F P54.32-8030-31▶ Press and hold the ← button on the steering wheel until the Trip menu with trip odometer ① and odometer ② is shown.
Digital speedometer
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu.
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the digital speedometer.
text_image
PRND S 1 68 mph Trip Navi Audio Tel 11:18 70°F P54.32-8033-31① Digital speedometer
Trip computer "From Start" or "From Reset"
Press ▲ or ▼ to select approximat range ①.
The values in the From Start submenu are calculated from the start of a journey while the values in the From Reset submenu are calculated from the last time the submenu was reset.
Approximate range ① is calculated according to the current driving style and the amount of fuel in the tank. If there is only half of the reserve fuel left in the fuel tank, then instead of range ①, the display shows a vehicle being refueled 📄.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu.
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select From Start or From Reset.
text_image
PRND S From Start 135 mi 2:00 h 17.3 mpe 68 mph Trip Navi Audio Tel 11:18 70°FExample: trip computer "From Start"
① Distance
② Time
③ Average speed
④ Average fuel consumption
The From Start trip computer is automatically reset if:
- the ignition has been switched off for than four hours.
• 999 hours have been exceeded.
• 9,999 miles have been exceeded.
The From Reset trip computer is automatically reset if the value exceeds 9,999 hours or 99,999 miles.
Calling up the range
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu.
text_image
PRND S 150 mi Trip Navi Audio Tel 11:18 70°F P54.32-9032-31Navigation system menu
Displaying navigation instructions
In the Navi menu, the multifunction display shows navigation instructions. You can find further information in the separate COMANI operating instructions.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Navi menu.
Route guidance not active
text_image
PRND S Direct. of Travel ① NE Lakeside Dr Trip Navi Audio Tel 11:18 70°F P54.32-6043-31Example: direction of travel display
① Direction of travel
② Current road
Route guidance active
No change of direction announced
text_image
PRND S 34 mi 650 ft Palmer Ave Trip Navi Audio Tel 11:18 70°F P54.32-8044-31① Distance to the destination
② Distance to the next change of direction
③ Current road
④ Symbol for "follow the road's course"
Change of direction announced without lane recommendation
text_image
PRND S Fair St 650 ft Palmer Ave Trip Navi Audio Tel 11:18 70°F P54.32-8045-31① Road into which the change of direction leads
② Distance to change of direction and visual distance display Yo
③ Symbol for change of direction
When a change of direction is announced, you will see symbol ③ for the change of direction and distance graphic ②. The distance indicator shortens towards the top of the display as you approach the point of the announced change of direction.
Change of direction announced with a lane recommendation
Lane recommendations are only displayed if the relevant data is available on the digital map.
text_image
PRND S Division Ave 650 ft Trip Navi Audio Tel 11:18 70°F P54.32-8046-31① Road into which the change of direction leads
② Distance to change of direction and view distance display
③ Lane recommendation
④ Symbol for change of direction
On multilane roads, the system can display lane recommendation ③ for the next change
of direction. During the change of direction, additional lanes may be displayed.
text_image
PRND S Division Ave 650 ft Trip Navi Audio Tel 11: 70°F P54.32-8047-31Lane recommendation display (example)
① Uninterrupted lane
② New lane during a change of direction
③ Lane recommended for the change of direction
You can find further information on lane recommendation in the separate COMAND operating instructions.
Other status indicators of the navigation system
• ☐: you have reached the destination.
- New Route... or Calculating Route: calculating a new route
- Off Map or Off Mapped Road: the vehicle position is outside the area of the digital map (off-map position).
- No Route: no route could be calculated to the selected destination.
You can find further information on status indicators in the separate COMAND operating instructions.
Audio menu
Selecting a radio station
You can only change the waveband and store new stations using COMAND.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu.
text_image
PRND S 2: 101.1 FM ② ① Trip Navi Audio Tel 11:18 70°F P54.32-0048-31① Waveband
② Station ^3
▶ To select a stored station: briefly pre the ▲ or ▼ button.
▶ To select a station from the station audio source connected).
audio source connected).
list: press and hold the ▲ or ▼ button.
▶ To select a station using manual tuning (only when a station list is not received): press and hold ▲ or ▼.
i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like normal radio.
You can find further information on operating the satellite radio in the separate operating instructions.
▶ To select the next/previous track: briefly press the ▲ or ▼ button. ▶ To select a track from the track list (rapid scrolling): press and hold the ▲ or ▼ button until desired track has been reached.
If track information is stored on the audio device or medium, the multifunction display will show the number and name of the track.
The current track does not appear in audio AUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: external
Video DVD operation
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu.
text_image
PRND S DISC 1 Scene 1 Trip Navi Audio Tel 11:18 70°F P54.32-8050-31Operating an audio player or audio media
Audio data from various audio devices or media can be played, depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu.
text_image
PRND S DISC 1 Track 3 Trip Navi Audio Tel 11:18 70°F P54.32-8049-31CD player display (example) ① Current title
▶ To select the next or previous scene: briefly press the ▲ or ▼ button. ▶ To select a scene from the scene list (rapid scrolling): press and hold the ▲ or ▼ button until desired scene has been reached.
Telephone menu
Introduction
WARNING
If you operate information systems and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only operate the equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this
Menus and submenus
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equipment when the vehicle is stationary.
When telephoning, you must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving.
Functions and displays are dependent on the optional equipment installed in your vehicle.
You can establish a Bluetooth connection to COMAND (see the separate operating instructions).
▶ Press the 📞 button on the steering wheel to accept an incoming call.
You can accept a call even if you are not in the TelTel menu.
Rejecting or ending a call
Press the button on the steering wheel.
You can end or reject a call even if you are not in the TelTel menu.
▶ Switch on the mobile phone and COMANDialing an entry from the phone book
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu.
You will see one of the following display messages in the multifunction display:
- Enter PIN: the mobile phone has been placed in the mobile phone bracket and PIN has not been entered.
▶ Enter the PIN using the mobile phone, Voice Control System or COMAND. The mobile phone will search for a network. In the meantime, the Phone No Service display message appears in the multifunction display.
- Phone Ready or the name of the network provider: the mobile phone has found a network and is ready to receive.
- Phone No Service: there is no network available or the mobile phone is searching for a network.
Accepting a call
If someone calls you when you are in the TelTel menu, a display message appears in multifunction display, for example:
text_image
PRND S Call from Newman, John Trip Navi Audio Tel 11:18 70°F P54.32-8051-31If your mobile phone is able to receive calls, you can search for and dial a number from the phone book in COMAND at any time.
▶ Copy the phone book from the mobile phone to COMAND.
the Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu.
▶ Press the ▲, ▼ or OK button to switch to the phone book.
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the name you want.
To scroll rapidly, press and hold the ▲ or ▼ button for longer than one second. After a short time, the rapid scroll speeds up.
Rapid scrolling stops when you release the button or reach the end of the list.
If only one telephone number is stored for a name: press the 📄 or OK button to start dialing.
or
▶ If there is more than one number for a particular name: press the 📞 or OK button to display the numbers.
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the phone number you want.
▶ Press the 📞 or OK button to start the Serv. menu, you can:
dialing.
- call up display messages (▷ page 164)
or
- check the tire pressure electronically
▶ If you do not want to make a call:
prepage 254)
the button.
- call up the service due date (▷ page 222
Redialing
The on-board computer saves the last names or numbers dialed in the redial memory. In
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu.
▶ Press the 📞 button to switch to the redial memory.
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the desired name or number.
▶ Press the 📞 or OK button to start dialing.
Settings menu
Introduction
text_image
PRND S Instr. Cluster Lights Vehicle Convenience Service Settings 11:18 70°F P54.32-8053-31Assistance menu
Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist
You can use the Blind Spot Asst. function to activate or deactivate Blind Spot Assist (▷ page 145).
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the DriveAssis menu.
▶ Press the OK button.
The current selection is displayed.
▶ To activate/deactivate: press the OK button again.
In the Settings menu you can:
- change the instrument cluster settings (▷ page 157)
- change the light settings (▷ page 158)
- change the vehicle settings (▷ page 160)
- change the convenience settings (▷ page 160)
- restore the factory settings (▷ page 160)
Instrument cluster
Selecting the unit of measurement for distance
The Display Unit Speed-/Odometer: function allows you to choose whether certain displays appear in km/h or mph in the multifunction display.
The selected units apply to:
• the odometer and the trip odometer
- the trip computer
• the digital speedometer in the Trip menu
• the digital speedometer in the AMG menu
- the navigation instructions in the NaviNavi menu
- cruise control
Maintenance menu
text_image
PRND S 0 messages Tire Pressure ASSYST PLUS Service Settings 11:18 70°F P54.32-8052-31▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the is dark, the low-beam headlamps switch on steering wheel to select the SettingsSetting automatically.
menu. In the dark, the following also light up:
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the low-beam headlamps
INST. CLUSTER submenu.
• the standing lamps
Press OK to confirm.
• the tail lamps
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the license plate lamp
Display Unit Speed-/Odometer: function.
You will see the selected setting: km or milestriles.
▶ Press the OK button to save the setting.
Permanent display for outside temperature or additional speedometer
The Permanent Display: Outside Temperature/Speedometer allows you to choose whether the multifunction display shows the outside temperature or the speed at the bottom right. The unit used in the additional speedometer depends on the display unit set (▶ page 157).
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the switches
steering wheel to select the Settings Settings You can use the Brightness Display/
menu. Switches: function to set the brightness of
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the multifunction display and the switches in Inst. cluster submenu. the vehicle.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select steering wheel to select the SettingsSettings Permanent Display function.
You will see the selected setting Speedometer [km/h] or Speedometer ▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the LIGHTSLIGHTS submenu.
[mph] or Outside Temperature. ▶ Press OK to confirm.
▶ Press the OK button to save the setting ▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the Brightness Display/Switches:
Lights
Switching the daytime running lamps off
This function is not available in Canada. If you have activated the Lights: function and the light switch is in the AUTO position, the daytime running lamps are switched on automatically when the engine is running. If it
You see the selected setting Level with a on/value of between 0 and 100.
▶ Press the OK button to save the setting.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to increase or decrease the brightness.
Activating/deactivating surround lighting and exterior lighting delayed switch-off
The Locator Lighting: function allows you to set whether the exterior lighting should come on when it is dark:
- for 40 seconds after unlocking the vehicle with the key. ▶ Pre
The exterior lighting switches off if you open the driver's door.
• for 15 seconds after switching off the engine and closing the doors.
If the engine is switched off and no door are opened, or if an open door is not cl the exterior lighting goes out after 60 seconds.
If you activate the Locator Lighting: function, the following light up:
- the parking lamps
• the low-beam headlamps
• the license plate lamp
• the surround lighting in the exterior mirror
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the SettingsSet menu.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select LIGHTSLIGHTS submenu.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select Locator Lighting: function.
You will see the selected setting: EnabledEnabled or DisabledDisabled. ▶Press th
▶ Press the OK button to save the setting.
Deactivating the delayed switch-off temporarily:
▶ Select key position 0 with the Start/Stop button before leaving the vehicle.
▶ Select key position 2 and then key position 0 again with the Start/Stop button
The delayed shut-off is deactivated.
The delayed shut-off is reactivated the next time you start the engine.
Activating/deactivating the interior lighting delayed switch-off
If you select key position 0 with the Start Stop button when the Light. delay function is activated, the interior lighting lights up for approximately 20 seconds if it is
- Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.
- Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the LightLight submenu.
Press OK to confirm. - Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the Light. delay function.
You will see the selected setting: on or offoff.
▶ Press the OK button to save the setting.
Vehicle
Activating/deactivating the automatic door locking mechanism
If you select the Automatic Door Lock: function, the vehicle is centrally locked above a speed of around 9 mph(15 km/h).
For further information on the automatic locking feature, see (▷ page 70).
▶Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the SettingsSettings
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the g. Vehicle vehicle submenu.
▶ Press the OK button to confirm.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the Automatic door locks function.
You will see the selected setting: EnabledEnable or DisabledDisabled.
▶ Press the OK button to save the setting.
Convenience
Activating/deactivating the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature
WARNING
When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts the steering wheel, you and other vehicle occupants - particularly children - could become trapped. There is a risk of injury.
While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is making adjustments, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the steering wheel.
If somebody becomes trapped:
- press one of the memory function position buttons, or
- move the switch for steering wheel adjustment in the opposite direction to in which the steering wheel is moving.
The adjustment process is stopped.
If you have switched the function on and you fold the exterior mirrors in using the button on the door (▷ page 91), they will not fold out automatically. The exterior mirrors can then only be folded out using the button on the door.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the CONVENIENCECONVENIENCE submenu.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the Fold Mirrors in when Locking function.
You will see the selected setting: EnabledEnabled or DisabledDisabled.
that Press the OK button to save the setting.
Restoring the factory settings
You can use the Easy Entry/Exit: function to activate or deactivate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (▷ page 89).
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the SettingsS menu.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select ConvenienceConvenience submenu.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
▶ Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select Easy Entry/Exit function.
You will see the selected setting: Enable or DisabledDisabled.
▶ Press the OK button to save the settin
Switching the fold-in mirrors with the locking feature on/off
For safety reasons, the Lights: function in the LIGHTS submenu is only reset if the vehicle is stationary.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.
Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select the Factory Settings submenu.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
The Reset All Settings? message appears.
Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select Yes or No.
Press the OK button to confirm the selection.
If you have selected Yes, the multifunction display shows a confirmation message.
If you switch on the Fold Mirrors in when
LockingLocking function, the exterior mirrors fold in when you lock the vehicle. If you unlock the vehicle and then open the driver's or front-passenger door, the exterior mirrors fold out again.
AMG menu
AMG displays
▶ Press ◀ or ▶ on the steering wheel to select the AMGANG menu.
text_image
PRND S ① 60 mph 180°F 185°F 178°F ② 3 4 11:18 70°F P54.32-9346-31① Digital speedometer
② Engine oil temperature
③ Coolant temperature
④ Transmission fluid temperature
If the engine oil temperature is below 80 °C or if the transmission fluid temperature is below 60 °C, the corresponding temperature gauge flashes. Avoid driving at full engine output during this time.
text_image
PRND S 60 mph S ESC ON SPORT 1 2 3 11:18 70°F P54.32 9347-31① Drive program (C/S/S+/M)
② ESP® mode (ON/SPORT handling mode/OFFOFF)
③ AMG adaptive sport suspension system setting (COMFORT/SPORT/SPORT +)
RACETIMER
Displaying and starting RACETIMER
You can use the RACETIMER to store lap times.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu.
▶ Press the ▲ button repeatedly until the RACETIMER is shown.
If the RACETIMER is selected, the ▶ and ▶ buttons are inoperative.
text_image
12 34567 M 60 mph L1 00:14 71 Start 11:18 70°F P54.32-9348-31① Digital speedometer
② RACETIMER
You can start the RACETIMER when the engine is running or if key position 2 is selected with the Start/Stop button.
▶ To start: start the RACETIMER with OK.
SETUP
SETUP displays the drive program, the AMG adaptive sport suspension system setting and the selected traction assist.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu.
▶ Press the ▲ button repeatedly until SETUP is displayed.
or
▶ Vehicles without AMG Performance
Media: press the AMG button on the centerLap console.
text_image
12 34567 M 60 mph L1 00:14 71 Start 11:18 70°F P54.32-9348-31Displaying the intermediate time
text_image
12 E4567 M 60 mph L2 02:20 34 Interm. Time New Lap 11:18 70°F P54.32 9349-31▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button to select
Interm. Time.
▶ Press OK to confirm. If The intermediate time is displayed for five seconds.
Starting a new lap
It is possible to store a maximum of sixteen laps.
▶ Press OK to confirm New Lap.
text_image
12 4567 M 60 mph Lz 02:20 34 BL 02:09 51 Interm. Time New Lap 11:18 70°F P54.32 9350-31① RACETIMER
② Fastest lap time (best lap)
③ Lap
Stopping the RACETIMER
▶ Press the ← button on the steering wheel.
text_image
PRND S Stop Race-Timer? No Yes ④ 11:18 70°F P54.32 9351-31▶ Press OK to confirm Yes.
If you stop the vehicle and select key position
1 with the Start/Stop button, the RACETIMER interrupts timing. If you select key position
2 or 3 with the Start/Stop button and then
1ER
en
press OK to select START, timing is continued.
Resetting the current lap
▶ Stop the RACETIMER.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button to select Reset Lap.
▶ Press OK to reset the lap time to "0".
Deleting all laps
If you switch off the engine, the RACETIMER is reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps are deleted.
You cannot delete individual stored laps. If you have stopped 16 laps, the current lap does not have to be reset.
▶ Reset the current lap.
▶ Press OK to confirm Reset.
Reset Race Timer appears in the multifunction display.
text_image
PRND S Reset Race-Timer? No Yes 11:18 70°F P54.32-9352-31▶ Press the ▼ button to select Yes and press the OK button to confirm. All laps are deleted.
Overall statistics
This function is shown if you have stored at least one lap and stopped the RACETIMER.
▶ Press ◀ or ▶ on the steering wheel to select the AMGAMG menu.
▶ Press the ▲ button repeatedly until the overall evaluation is shown.
tion
text_image
PRND S 1 RT 00:45:20 70 65 mph ø 60 mph 61 miles 3 4 5 11:18 70°F P54.32-9353-31① RACETIMER overall evaluation
② Total time driven
③ Average speed
④ Distance covered
⑤ Maximum speed
Lap statistics
This function is only available if you have stored at least two laps and have stopped RACETIMER.
▶ Press ◀ or ▶ on the steering wheel to select the AMGAVG menu.
▶ Press the ▲ button repeatedly until th lap evaluation is shown.
Each lap is shown in a separate submen. The fastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol ①.
Display messages
General notes
Display messages appear in the multifunction display.
Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's Manual and may therefore differ from the multifunction display.
Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this Operator's Manual.
Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone.
When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some high-priority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been rectified, the corresponding display
nmessages are also deleted.
When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on parking (▷ page 131).
text_image
PRND S 1 LI 00:45:20 79 65 mph Ø 60 mph 13 miles 2 3 4 5 11:18 70°F P54.32-9354-31① Lap
② Lap time
③ Average lap speed
④ Lap length
⑤ Top speed during lap
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select a different lap evaluation.
Display messages
Hiding display messages
▶ Press the OK or ← button on the steering wheel to hide the display message. The display message is cleared.
The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority display messages cannot be hidden.
The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messages have been remedied.
Message memory
The on-board computer saves certain display messages. You can call up the display messages in the message memory.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Service menu. If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 Messages, for example.
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the entry, e.g. 2 Messages.
▶ Press OK to confirm.
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to scroll through the display messages.
When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some high-priority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been rectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted.
Braking
| Display messages | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| BRAKE (USA only) (Canada only)ABS and ESC CurrentlyCurrently Unavailable SeeUnava Operator's ManualOperator's Manual | ABS, ESP®, BAS and hill start assist are temporarily unavailable. For example, the on-board voltage may be insufficient. In action the [IMAGE], [IMAGE] and [IMAGE] warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster.The brake system continues to function normally, but without functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example.WARNINGIf the ABS malfunctions, the wheels may lock during hard b This limits the steerability of the vehicle when braking and increase the braking distance. If ABS is deactivated due to malfunction, BAS and ESPare also deactivated. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.Drive on carefully.Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
| BRAKE (USA only) (Canada only)ABS and ESC Inoperative SeeInoperative SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual | ABS, ESP®, BAS and hill start assist are unavailable due to malfunction. In addition, the [IMAGE], [IMAGE] and [IMAGE] warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster.The brake system continues to function normally, but without functions listed above.WARNINGIf the ABS malfunctions, the wheels may lock during hard b This limits the steerability of the vehicle when braking and increase the braking distance. If ABS is deactivated due to malfunction, BAS and ESPare also deactivated. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.Drive on carefully.Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
| Display messages | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| BRAKE(USA only) (Canada only)EBR, ABS, ESC Inoperative See Inoper Operator's ManualOperator's Manual | EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESPAS and hill start assist are not available due to a malfunction. In addition, the [icon], [icon] and [icon] warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above.WARNINGIf EBD and ABS are malfunctioning, the rear wheels in particular could lock under braking. If ABS is deactivated due to a malfunction, BAS and ESPare also deactivated. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.Drive on carefully.Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. |
| PARK(USA only) (Canada only)Please ReleasePlease Parking BrakeParking | The indicator lamp (red) flashes and a warning tone sounds.You are driving with the electric parking brake applied.Release the electric parking brake.orConsult a qualified specialist workshop.The indicator lamp (red) flashes, the warning lamp (yellow) lights up and a warning tone sounds.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning and the braking effect is restricted.While the vehicle is in motion:Release the electric parking brake handle.While the vehicle is stationary:Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.Release the electric parking brake.If the display message continues to be displayed:Shift the transmission to P with the button in the center console.Prevent the vehicle from rolling away before you leave it.Consult a qualified specialist workshop.The indicator lamp (red) flashes and a warning tone sounds.You are making an emergency stop using the electric parking brake.After the emergency stop: release the electric parking brake lever. |
| PARK (USA only) (Canada only) Parking Brake See Oper. ManualOpen. Manual | (P) The warning lamp (yellow) lights up. Additionally the indicator lamp (red) lights up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To release:▶ Pull the electric parking brake handle.or▶ Pull away carefully.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop.To apply:▶ Switch the ignition off.▶ Pull the electric parking brake lever for at least ten seconds until the display message disappears.If the display message continues to be displayed:▶ Shift the transmission to P with the button in the center cons▶ Prevent the vehicle from rolling away before you leave it.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
| (P) The indicator lamp (red) flashes.The power supply for the electric parking brake was interrupted.▶ Pull the electric parking brake handle.or▶ Pull away carefully.or▶ Pull the electric parking brake handle until the display message disappears. | |
| (P) The indicator lamp (red) flashes and the warning lamp (yellow) lights up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.▶ Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.▶ Engage or release the electric parking brake.or▶ Pull away carefully.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. | |
| (P) The warning lamp (yellow) lights up. In addition, the indicator lamp (red) flashes for about 10 seconds after the electric parking brake has been engaged or released. It then goes out or remains lit.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of overvoltage or undervoltage.Pull away carefully.Visit a qualified specialist workshop.If there is overvoltage or undervoltage:Remove the cause for the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. by charging the battery or restarting the engine.Switch the ignition off and on, and then engage or release the electric parking brake.If this does not release the electric parking brake:Do not drive on.Consult a qualified specialist workshop. | |
| (P) The warning lamp (yellow) lights up. In addition, the indicator lamp (red) flashes for about 10 seconds after the electric parking brake has been engaged or released. It then goes out or remains lit.The electric parking brake has overheated.Allow the vehicle to cool down. Do not engage or release the electric parking brake during this time.Prevent the vehicle from rolling away before you leave it.When the vehicle has cooled down: switch the ignition off and on again, then engage or release the electric parking brake. | |
 | (P) The warning lamp (yellow) lights up. In addition, the indicator lamp (red) flashes for about 10 seconds after the electric parking brake has been engaged or released. It then goes out or remains lit.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.Switch the ignition off and on, and then engage the electric parking brake.If it is not possible to engage the electric parking brake:Shift the transmission to P with the button in the center console.Prevent the vehicle from rolling away before you leave it.Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
| Display messages | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| PARK (USA only) (Canada only)Turn On the Ignition toIgnition to Release theRelease theParking BrakeParking Brake | The indicator lamp (red) flashes.You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the ignition was switched off.Switch on the ignition. |
| PARK (USA only) (Canada only)Check Brake Fluid LevelLevel | There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir, addition, the (1) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster I up and a warning tone sounds.WARNINGDriving with the message Check Brake Fluid Level displayed can result in an accident.Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue under any circumstances.Consult a qualified specialist workshop.Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction |
| Check Brake Pad WearWear | The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
Safety systems
| Display messages | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
 ESC InoperativeESC InoperativeSee Operator'sSee Operator'sManualManual | ESP®, BAS and hill start assist are unavailable due to a malfunction. In addition, the [icon] and [icon] warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster.⚠ WARNINGIf ESP® and BAS are deactivated, the danger of skidding and having an accident increases.▶ Drive on carefully.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
 ESC CurrentlyESC CurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailable SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual | ESP®, BAS and hill start assist are temporarily unavailable. The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. In addition, the [icon] and [icon] warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster.⚠ WARNINGIf ESP® and BAS are deactivated, the danger of skidding and having an accident increases.▶ Carefully drive a short distance making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h) until the display message disappears. |
| Front PassengerFrontAirbag EnabledAirbagSee Operator'sSee OperManualManual | The front-passenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag are enabled during the journey, even though:• a child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system's weight threshold is located on the front-passenger seat• the front-passenger seat is unoccupiedThe system may detect objects or forces applying additional weight on the seat.⚠ WARNINGThe front-passenger front air bag and front passenger knee bag may be triggered unintentionally.There is an increased risk of injury.▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.▶ Apply the parking brake.▶ Switch the ignition off.▶ Open the front-passenger door. |
WARNING
▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
▶ Apply the parking brake.
▶ Switch the ignition off.
▶ Open the front-passenger door.
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front-passenger seat.
▶ Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to the weight.
The system may otherwise detect the additional weight and interpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually is.
- Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and switch on the ignition.
Observe the ☒ AIR SAG OFF (▶ page 42) indicator lamp and the multifunction display and check the following:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
- the 📄2 AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must light up and remain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS (▶ page 42) has disabled the front-passenger air bag.
- the Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Manual display messages must not be shown in the multifunction display. Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system checks have been completed. This is necessary to make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multifunction display.
If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occupied again. Whether the 📁️ [PASS] indicator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant.
If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly.
▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
For further information about the Occupant Classification System, see (▷ page 42).
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Front Passenger-Front The front-passenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag are Airbag DisabledAirbag deactivated during the journey, although:
See Operator's See Oper• an adult Manual Manual or
- a person larger than a certain size is occupying the front-passenger seat
If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may interpret the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.
WARNING
The front-passenger front air bag and front passenger knee bag may not be triggered in the event of an accident.
There is an increased risk of injury.
▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
▶ Apply the parking brake.
▶ Switch the ignition off.
▶ Have the occupant get out of the vehicle.
- Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and switch on the ignition.
Observe the 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 indicator lamp and the multifunction display and check the following:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
- the PASS OFF indicator lamp must light up and remain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS (▶ page 42) has disabled the front-passenger air bag.
- the Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Manual display messages must not be shown in the multifunction display. Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system checks have been completed. This is necessary and ensures that the display messages do not appear in the multifunction display.
If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occupied again. Whether the indicator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant. If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly.
▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
| Display messages | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
 Tele AidTele AidInoperativeInoperative | One or more main features of the mbrace system are malfunctioning.▶Have the mbrace system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. |
 SRS MalfunctionSRS Malfunction Service RequiredService Required | There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint System). The warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.⚠ WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.▶Visit a qualified specialist workshop.For further information about SRS, see (▶ page 37). |
 Front Left SRSMalfunctionMalfunction Service Required Service or Front Right SRSMalfunctionMalfunction Service Required Service | SRS has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right. The warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.⚠ WARNINGIf SRS is malfunctioning, individual systems may be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered in the event of an accident with a high rate of vehicle deceleration. In this condition, the restraint system provides only restricted protection.▶Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
Lights
i Display messages about LEDs:
The display message will only appear if all or a number of LEDs have failed.
| Display messages | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
 Check Left Low Beam orCheck Right Low BeamBeam | The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp does not light up. In addition, the high-beam headlamp is also inoperative. ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
 AUTO Lamp Function InoperativeInoperative | The light sensor is defective. USA only: ▶ Switch off the daytime running lamps in the on-board computer (▶ page 158). ▶ Switch the lights on and off using the light switch. |
 Check Rear Left Turn SignalTurn Signal orCheck Rear Right Turn SignalTurn Signal | The LEDs in the rear left or right-hand indicator lamp do not light up. ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Check Left Mirror Turn SignalTurn Signal orCheck Right Mirror Turn SignalTurn Signal | None of the LEDs in the left or right-hand exterior mirrors light up ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Check Front Left Turn SignalTurn Signal orCheck Front Right Turn SignalTurn Signal | The LEDs in the front left or right-hand indicator lamp do not light up. ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Check Center Brake LampLamp | None of the LEDs in the high-mounted brake lamp light up. ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Check Left Brake LampLamp orCheck Right Brake LampLamp | The left or right-hand brake light LEDs do not light up. ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Check Left Tail LampLamp orCheck Right Tail LampLamp | The left or right-hand tail lamp LEDs do not light up. ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Check Left High BeamBeam orCheck Right High BeamBeam | The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp does not light up. ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Check Left License Plate LampPlate LamorCheck RightCheck Right License Plate Lamp | The left or right-hand license plate lamp does not light up. ▶ Replace the bulb (▷ page 101). |
 Backup LightBackup Light | None of the LEDs in the backup lamp light up. ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Check Left Daytime Running LightRunning Light orCheck RightCheck Right Daytime RunningDaytime RunningLightLight | The LEDs in the left or right-hand daytime running lamp do light up. As a result, the corresponding side/standing lamp failed. ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Check Front LeftSidemarker LampSider Marker LamporCheck Front RightSidemarker LampSider Marker Lamp | The left or right front side marker lamp is defective. ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Check Rear LeftSidemarker LampSider Marker LamporCheck Rear RightSidemarker LampSider Marker Lamp | The rear left or right side marker lamp is defective. ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Check Front LeftParking LampParkingLamporCheck Front RightParking LampParking Lamp | The front left or front right parking or standing lamp is defective. ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Lamp |
 Switch Off Lights | The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds. ▶ Turn the light switch to AUTO. |
 Malfunction SeeMalfunction SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual | The exterior lighting is defective. ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
Engine
| Display messages | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| Coolant Low Stop Vehicle TurnVehicle Engine OffEngine Off | The coolant is too hot. In addition, the warning lamp instrument cluster lights up and a warning tone sounds.T▲WARNINGDo not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire.Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious b which can occur just by opening the hood.There is a risk of injury.►Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the e paying attention to road and traffic conditions.►Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 131).►Wait until the engine has cooled down.►Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not block by snow, slush or ice.►Wait until the display message disappears before restarting engine. Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.►Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.►If the coolant temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.■If the coolant temperature is over 248 °F (120 °C), do n continue driving. The engine will otherwise be damaged. |
| The fan motor is faulty.►At coolant temperatures below 248 °F (120 °C), drive to nearest qualified specialist workshop.►Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic. | |
 | The battery is not being charged.A warning tone also sounds.Possible causes are:·a defective alternator·a torn poly-V-belt·a malfunction in the electronics▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 131).▶ Open the hood.▶ Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn.If the poly-V-belt is torn:! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.If the poly-V-belt is not damaged:▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Check CoolantCheck CoolantLevel SeeLevel SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual | The coolant level is too low.■ Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.▶ Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so (▷ page 220).▶ If coolant needs to be added more often than usual, have the engine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Engine Oil LevelLow Stop VehicleTurn Engine Off | There is insufficient oil in the engine. There is a risk of engine damage.▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.▶ Top up and check the engine oil level (▷ page 219). |
 Check Engine Oil Level (Add 1 Liter) | The oil level is too low.▶ Check the oil level (▷ page 219).▶ If necessary, add engine oil.▶ Have the engine checked for leaks if you need to add engine oil more often than usual.⚠ Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine w/ otherwise be damaged.Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://www.mbusa.com (USA only). |
 Engine Oil Level Too HighToo High | You have added too much engine oil. The engine or catalytic converter may be damaged.▶ Siphon off excess engine oil until it is at the specified level Observe the legal requirements. |
 Engine Oil Level Cannot Be Measured | The measuring system is faulty.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Engine OilEngine Oil Pressure ControlPressure ControlSee Operator'sSee Operator Manual | The oil pressure sensor has reported a malfunction.The oil pressure control is in emergency mode.The engine lubrication is guaranteed.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Engine OilEngine Oil Pressure StopPressure Stop Vehicle TurnVehicle Turn Engine OffEngine Off | ▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.▶ Check the engine oil level (▷ page 219) and top up if necessary.▶ If there are visible signs of oil loss from the vehicle, consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
 | There is only a small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.▶ Refuel at the nearest gas station. |
 Fuel Level Low | The fuel level has fallen below the reserve range.▶ Refuel at the nearest gas station. |
Display messages
| Display messages | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
 Gas Cap Loose | The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.▶ Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:▶ Close the fuel filler cap.If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
 Replace Air Filter | The air filter is dirty and must be replaced.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
Driving systems
| Display messages | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| Cruise Control Cruise Inoperative Inoperative | Cruise control is defective.A warning tone also sounds.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
| Cruise Control Cruise - - - mph | A condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled.You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), for example.▶ Activate ESP®(▷ page 56).▶ If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and store the speed.▶ Check the activation conditions for cruise control (▷ page 138). |
| Blind Spot Assist InoperativeInoperat | Blind Spot Assist is defective.The yellow ▲ indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
| Blind Spot Assist CurrentlyCurrently Unavailable SeeUnavailable SeeOperator's ManualOperators' Manual | Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative if:·the sensors are dirty.·its function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.·the radar sensor system is outside the operating temperat range.·the radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. du electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.The yellow ▲ indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors.Blind Spot Assist is operational again and the display messa disappears if:·the dirt (e.g. slush) drops away while the vehicle is in mo·the system detects that the sensors are fully available ag·the radar sensor system is back within the operating temperature range.If the display message continues to be displayed:▶ Clean the sensors (▷ page 228).▶ Restart the engine. |
Tires
| Display messages | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| RectifyRectifyTire PressureTire Pressure | The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tire pressure difference between the wheels is too great.▶ Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (▷ page 254).▶ If necessary, correct the tire pressure.▶ Restart the tire pressure monitor (▷ page 257). |
| CheckCheckTiresTires | The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. The wheel position is shown in the multifunction display.A warning tone also sounds.⚠ WARNINGWith tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the following hazards:they may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.they may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction.the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired.There is a risk of an accident.▶ Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 131).▶ Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (▷ page 233).▶ Check the tire pressure (▷ page 254).▶ If necessary, correct the tire pressure. |
| Tire Press. WarningCaution TireCautionMalfunctionMalfunction | The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. the wheel position is shown in the multifunction display.⚠ WARNINGIf you drive with a flat tire, there is a risk of the following hazards:a flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.you could lose control of the vehicle.continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat bind-up and possibly a fire.There is a risk of an accident.▶ Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▶ page 131).▶ Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (▶ page 233). |
| Tire Press. MonitorCurrentlyCurrentlyUnavailable | Due to a source of radio interference, no signals can be received from the wheel sensors. The tire pressure monitor is temporarily malfunctioning.▶ Drive on.The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the problem has been solved. |
| Tire Press.Tire PressSensor(s)Missing | There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or several wheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in the multifunction display.▶ Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. |
| Tire PressureTire PressureMonitorMonitorInoperative NoInoperativeWheel SensorsWheel Sensor | The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor. The tire pressure monitor is deactivated.▶ Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving for a few minutes. |
| Tire PressureTire PressureMonitorMonitorInoperativeInoperative | The tire pressure monitor is faulty.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
| Display messages | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
 | The trunk lid is open.▶ Close the trunk lid. |
 | The hood is open.⚠ WARNINGThe open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in There is a risk of an accident.▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, attention to road and traffic conditions.▶ Close the hood. |
 (Coupe only)(Roadster only) | At least one door is open.▶ Close the doors. |
 | If you drive at speeds of more than 31 mph (50 km/h), yo open or close the soft top.▶ Fully open or close the soft top (▷ page 79). |
| Operation Possible to 31 mph | |
 | The soft top is not fully opened or closed. The hydraulics a depressurized.▶ Fully open or close the soft top (▷ page 79). |
| Convertible Top Convertible Top Opening/ClosingOpening/Closing Not FinishedNot Finished | |
 | The roof is not locked. If you drive at speeds of more than 31 mph (50 km/h), you cannot open or close the soft top.▶ If you are driving at speeds of more than 31 mph (50 km reduction your speed.▶ Push or pull the soft-top switch (▷ page 79) until the soft fully open or closed. |
| Open/CloseOpen/Close Convertible Top Convertible Top CompletelyCompletely | |
 | The on-board voltage is too low.▶ Start the engine. |
| Convertible Top in Operation Please Wait | |
| The soft top has been opened and closed several times in a row. The soft-top drive has been switched off automatically for safety reasons.You can open and close the soft top again after approximately ten minutes.▶ Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.▶ Repeat the opening or closing procedure (▷ page 79). | |
 Depress Brake to Start EngineStart Engine | You have attempted to close the soft top with the soft top switch while the vehicle was stationary.▶ Depress the brake pedal.▶ Press the soft-top switch until the soft top is completely closed. |
 Check Washer Fluid | The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum.▶ Add washer fluid (▷ page 221). |
SmartKey
| Display messages | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions | |
 Change Key Battery | The SmartKey batteries are discharged.▶ Change the batteries (▷ page 65). | |
 Key Not Detected(red display message) | The SmartKey is not in the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds.When you switch off the engine, you will be unable to restart it.▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.▶ Locate the SmartKey. | |
| The key is not detected while driving because a powerful radio transmitter is causing interference. A warning tone also sounds.▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.▶ Insert the key into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired position (▷ page 119). | ||
 Key Not Detected (white display message) | You are in the vehicle and the key currently cannot be detected by the vehicle.▶ Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle.If the SmartKey still cannot be detected:▶ Insert the key into the ignition lock and turn it to the de position (▷ page 119). | |
 Obtain a New Key | The SmartKey needs to be replaced.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. | |
 Key Does Not Belong to Vehicle | You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.▶ Use the correct SmartKey. | |
 Close Doors to Lock VehicleLock Vehicle | At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.▶ Close all doors and lock the vehicle again. | |
 Remove 'Start' Button and Insert KeyKey | The KEYLESS-GO start function is temporarily malfunctioning is defective. A warning tone also sounds.▶ Insert the key into the ignition lock and turn it to the de position (▷ page 119). | |
 Take Your Key from IgnitionIgnition | The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.▶ Remove the SmartKey. | |
Transmission
| Display messages | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| Apply BrakeApply Brake to Shift from 'P' | You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever to position D, R or N without depressing the brake pedal. ▶ Depress the brake pedal. |
| Apply BrakeApply Brake and Start Engine to Disengage 'P' | When the engine is switched off, it is not possible to shift out of park position P. ▶ Depress the brake pedal and start the engine. |
| Start EngineStart Eng to Engage Gear | The gear cannot be engaged when the engine is switched off. ▶ Depress the brake pedal and start the engine. |
| Depress Brake to Start Engine | You cannot start the engine. The engine was switched off in position D or R. ▶ Depress the brake pedal and start the engine. |
| Door OpenDoor Open Not in 'P' | The driver's door is open and the transmission is in position R, N or D. A warning tone also sounds. ▶ Shift the transmission to P with the button in the center console. ▶ Press the electric parking brake handle. |
| Service Required Do Not Shift Gears Visit DealerVisit Dealer | You cannot change gear due to a malfunction. A warning tone also sounds. If transmission position D is selected: ▶ Do not switch off the engine. ▶ Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the transmission from position D. If transmission position R, N or P is selected: ▶ Make sure that the electric parking brake is applied. ▶ Prevent the vehicle from rolling away before you leave it (▷ page 269). ▶ Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service. If no transmission position and no drive program is displayed: ▶ Make sure that the electric parking brake is applied. ▶ Prevent the vehicle from rolling away before you leave it (▷ page 269). ▶ Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service. |
| Only Shift to 'P' when Vehicle is StationaryStationary | The vehicle is moving. ▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. ▶ Shift the transmission to P with the button in the center console. |
| Reversing Not Poss. Service Required Service Required | The sub geartrain with the even gears has failed. You can no longer engage reverse gear. The smoothness of the gear change is restricted. The transmission is in emergency mode. ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
 | Transmission position P cannot be selected.▶ Make sure that the electric parking brake is applied.▶ Prevent the vehicle from rolling away before you leave it (▷ page 269).▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Have the vehicle transported on a recovery vehicle or towed with the rear axle raised (▷ page 242). |
| [Parking Lock Parking Lock Malfunct. Apply Malfunct. Apply Parking Brake Parking Brake | |
 | The transmission is faulty. The vehicle loses drive and rolls to a standstill.▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.▶ Make sure that the electric parking brake is applied.▶ Prevent the vehicle from rolling away before you leave it (▷ page 269).▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop. |
| [Stop Engage P | |
 | The transmission coolant pump is faulty. The transmission may overheat.▶ In the on-board computer, select the AMG menu and check the transmission oil temperature.▶ Avoid excessive loading, e.g. due to dynamic driving.▶ If the transmission oil temperature is less than 248 °F(120 °C), you can continue driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. |
| [Transmission Oil Transmission Oil CoolingCoolingMalfunctionMalfunction | |
 | The transmission oil has overheated.Manual drive program M and shift range restriction are no longer available. Only drive program C is still available. The engine output is reduced according to the degree of overheating.▶ Allow the transmission oil to cool by adopting a defensive driving style. |
| [Trans. Oil Trans. Oil Overheated Drive Overheated Drive on with Care |
Rear spoiler
Display messages
Rear SpoilerRear Spo Control SystemContro InoperativeInoperati
Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
The rear spoiler cannot be fully retracted and may extend aga. If the retraction of the rear spoiler is blocked, e.g. by ice:
▶ Make sure that the cause of the block is eliminated.
▶ Switch off the engine and lock the vehicle.
▶ Start the vehicle after waiting a few minutes. The rear spoiler returns to the original position.
If this problem persists or the cause cannot be identified:
▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Rear SpoilerRear Sp Inoperative LimitInc 200 km/h200 km/h
The rear spoiler cannot be fully extended and extends as far possible.
The speed of the vehicle is limited to 125 mph (200 km/h).
If the extension/retraction of the rear spoiler is blocked, e.g. ice:
▶ Make sure that the cause of the block is eliminated.
▶ Switch off the engine and lock the vehicle.
▶ Start the vehicle after waiting a few minutes. The rear spoiler returns to the original position.
If this problem persists or the cause cannot be identified:
▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
Braking
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
BRAKE
(USA
only)
(①)
(Canada only)
The red brake
system
warning lamp
comes on
while the
engine is running. A warning tone also sounds.
WARNING
The braking effect may be impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 131).
▶ Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not remedy the malfunction.
▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
▶ Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
PARK
(USA
only)
(P)
(Canada only)
The indicator
lamp for the electric
parking brake
flashes and/ or the yellow warning lamp for the electric parking brake lights up.
The electric parking brake is temporarily malfunctioning or defective.
WARNING
In this condition, the vehicle is only of limited roadworthiness. This can lead to an accident.
▶ Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
Seat belts
| Problem | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for 6 seconds. | The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front pa to fasten their seat belts.▶ Fasten your seat belt (▷ page 49). |
| After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up. In addition, a warning tone sounds for up to 6 seconds. | The driver's seat belt is not fastened.▶ Fasten your seat belt (▷ page 49). The warning tone ceases. |
| The red seat beltWarning lamplights up afterthe enginestarts, as soonas the driver'sdoor or thefront-passengerdoor is closed. | The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.▶Fasten your seat belt (▷ page 49).The warning lamp goes out. |
| There are objects on the front-passenger seat.▶Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stowthem in a secure place.The warning lamp goes out. |
| The red seat belt The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The warning lamp flashes and an intermittent audible warning sounds. | vehicle is being driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).▶Fasten your seat belt (▷ page 49).The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent audible warning ceases. |
| There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is being driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).▶Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place.The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent audible warning ceases. |
Safety systems
| Problem | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. | ABS has been deactivated due to a malfunction®,ESAS and hill start assist are therefore also deactivated.⚠ WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP®is not operational, ESPis unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.▶ Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.▶ Drive on carefully.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop.If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems, such as the navigation system or the transmission, will not be available. |
| The yellow ESP®and ESP® OFF warning lamps and the yellow ABS warning lamp are lit while the engine is running. | ABS and ESPare malfunctioning. Other systems, e.g. BAS and hill start assist, are unavailable due to a malfunction.⚠ WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase.If ESP®is not operational, ESPis unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.▶ Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display (▶ page 170).▶ Drive on carefully.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
| Problem | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion. | ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin.Cruise control is switched off.When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as necessary.Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motionAdapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conDo not deactivate ESP.For exceptions, see: (▷ page 56). |
| The yellow SPORT handling mode warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. | SPORT handling mode is activated.WARNINGESP® only stabilizes the vehicle in extreme situations.® ESP intervention may not be able to provide enough assistance situations, and the vehicle may start to skid.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.Only switch to SPORT handling mode in accordance with conditions written in the "Activating/deactivating SPORT handling mode" section (▷ page 56). |
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
| Problem | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| The yellow ESPand ESPOFFwarning lamps are lit while the engine is running. | ESP®is not available due to a malfunction.⚠ WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without functions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP®is not operational, ESPis unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.▶ Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.▶ Drive on carefully.▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
| The red SRS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. | There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint System).⚠ WARNINGIf the air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices are either triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, not triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.▶ Drive on carefully.▶ Have SRS checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately.For further information about SRS, see (▶ page 37). |
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
Engine
| Problem | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| The yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. | There may be a malfunction, for example:in the engine managementin the fuel injection systemin the exhaust systemin the ignition systemin the fuel systemThe emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emergency mode.Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.In some states, you must visit a qualified specialist workshop as soon as the yellow check engine warning lamp lights up. This is due to the legal requirements in effect in these states. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulations apply in the state in which you are currently driving. |
| The yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. The smoothness of the gear change is restricted. | The sub geartrain with the odd gears has failed. The transmission is in emergency mode.Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. |
| The red engine oil temperature warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. | The engine oil temperature has exceeded 284 °F (140 °C).The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.Allow the engine to cool down. |
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
| Problem | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| The red engine oil temperature warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. The engine oil temperature is not displayed. | The engine control unit data transfer is malfunctioning. ▶ Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
| The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. | The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. ▶ Refuel at the nearest gas station. |
| The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp flashes while the engine is running. | The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking. ▶ Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed. ▶ If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel fille cap. ▶ If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
Tires
| Problem | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/ malfunction) is lit. | The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of the tires.WARNINGWith tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the following hazards:they may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.they may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction.the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired.There is a risk of an accident.Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do soSecure the vehicle against rolling away (▷ page 131).Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (▷ page 233).Check the tire pressure (▷ page 254).If necessary, correct the tire pressure. |
| The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/ malfunction) flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit. | The tire pressure monitor is faulty.WARNINGThe system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire pressure.There is a risk of an accident.Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.Visit a qualified specialist workshop. |
Useful information 200
Stowage areas 200
Features 202
Useful information
This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.
i Please read the information on qualified specialist workshops (▷ page 22).
Stowage areas
Stowage space
Important safety notes
WARNING
If you do not correctly store objects in the vehicle interior, they can slip or be flung around, thus striking vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, especially when braking or abruptly changing directions.
• Always store objects so that they cannot flung around in these or in similar situations.
• Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage compartments, parcel nets or stowage nets.
- Close lockable stowage compartments while driving.
- Stow and secure objects that are heavy, hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or too large in the trunk.
Glove box
text_image
e 2 P68.00-6366-31▶ To open: pull handle ① and open glove box flap ②.
▶ To close: fold glove box flap ② upwards until it engages.
The glove box can be locked and unlocked using the mechanical key, e.g. when leaving your vehicle at a workshop.
text_image
be 1 2 P68.00-6367 31▶ To lock: insert the mechanical key into the lock and turn it 90^ clockwise to position 2.
▶ To unlock: insert the mechanical key into the lock and turn it 90° counter-clockwise to position 1.
Roadster: the glove box can be locked and unlocked centrally using the SmartKey (▷ page 62).
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, you will find an AUX IN jack or a Media Interface installed in the glove box. A Media Interface is a universal interface for portable audio equipment, e.g. for an
iPod® or USB device (see the separate COMAND operating instructions).
There is a 12 V power socket located the glove box.
Stowage compartment in the center console
natural_image
Interior view of a car dashboard with a blue directional arrow pointing to the dashboard (no text or symbols visible)▶ To open: press down at the middle of marking on lid ①.
▶ To close: fold down cover ①.
i Depending on the equipment installed, your vehicle is equipped with an ashtray a stowage compartment.
Stowage compartment under the armrest
natural_image
Close-up of a car interior component with a blue arrow pointing to a button labeled '1', showing a close-up inset (no text or symbols beyond the arrow and label)▶ To open: press button ① on the left or and slide the armrest in the direction of arrow.
The armrest engages in two different detents.
i Roadster: the stowage compartment can be locked and unlocked centrally using the SmartKey (▷ page 62).
Stowage compartment in the rear center console
natural_image
Close-up of a car interior showing a numbered component with an arrow pointing to a handle (no text or symbols visible)▶ Press button ①. the The stowage compartment opens.
In the stowage compartment, you will the ignition lock (▷ page 119) and the trunk lid emergency release (▷ page 74).
Stowage space on the rear wall between the seats
natural_image
Interior view of a car showing the seat, dashboard, and side panel with a numbered label (1) pointing to the front panel.① Ruffled pocket
right Stowage nets the
There is a parcel net located in the front-passenger footwell.
Features
Cup holder
Important safety notes
! Only use the cup holders for containers the right size and which have lids. The drinks could otherwise spill.
Cup holder in the center console
natural_image
Interior view of a car gear shift lever with a numbered component (no text or symbols visible)Example: Coupe
▶ Open the armrest (▷ page 201). Cup holders ① are under the armrest.
Sun visors
Overview of sun visors
WARNING
If the mirror cover of the vanity mirror is folded up when the vehicle is in motion, you could be blinded by incident light. There is a risk of an accident.
Always keep the mirror cover folded down while driving.
text_image
1 2 5 of 4 3 P58,60-2307-31Example: Coupe
① Mirror light
② Bracket
③ Retaining strip, e.g. for a parking lot ticket
④ Vanity mirror
⑤ Mirror cover
Vanity mirror in the sun visor
Mirror light ① only functions if the sun visor is clipped into bracket ② and mirror cover ⑤ has been folded up.
Glare from the side
natural_image
Close-up of a car's side panel showing a blue double-headed arrow pointing to the lock, with no visible text or symbols.Example: Coupe
▶ Fold down the sun visor.
▶ Pull the sun visor out of bracket ②.
▶ Swing the sun visor to the side.
▶ Slide the sun visor horizontally as desired.
Ashtray
You can remove the ashtray insert and use the resulting compartment for stowage.
! The stowage space under the ashtray is not heat resistant. Before placing lit cigarettes in the ashtray, make sure that the ashtray is properly engaged. Otherwise, the stowage space could be damaged.
natural_image
Close-up of a car interior showing a hand valve and a close-up of the door handle (no text or symbols visible)Example: Coupe
▶ To open: briefly press the middle of cover ①.
The stowage compartment opens.
▶ To remove the insert: slide insert ②
forwards in the direction of the arrow.
▶ Remove insert ②.
▶ To re-install the insert: place insert ②
into the holder and press it in the op direction of the arrow until it engages.
▶ To close: fold down cover ①.
Cigarette lighter
WARNING
You can burn yourself if you touch the hot heating element or the socket of the cigarette lighter.
In addition, flammable materials can ignite
- the hot cigarette lighter falls - a child holds the hot cigarette lighter to objects, for example
There is a risk of fire and injury.
Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob. Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is out of reach of children. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
text_image
Technical diagram showing a mechanical component with labeled parts and an inset magnified view highlighting a specific feature.Example: Coupe
▶ Select key position 2 with the Start/Stop button (▷ page 119).
▶ To open: briefly press the middle of cover ①.
The stowage compartment opens.
▶ Press in cigarette lighter ②.
Cigarette lighter ② will pop out automatically when the heating element is red-hot.
▶ To close: fold down cover ①.
2 V sockets
Points to observe before use
▶ Select SmartKey position 1(▷ page 119) using the Start/Stop button.
The sockets can be used for accessories with a maximum current draw of 180 W (15 A) each, e.g. bulbs or chargers for mobile phones.
the you use the sockets for long periods when the engine is switched off, the battery may discharge.
You can also use the sockets when the ignition is switched off. An emergency cut-out ensures that the on-board voltage does not drop too low. If the on-board voltage is
too low, the power to the sockets is automatically cut. This ensures that there is sufficient power to start the vehicle.
mbrace ^4
General notes
Socket in the glove box
text_image
12 V MAX-10A ① P68.00-6345-31▶ Open the glove box (▷ page 200). Lift up the cover of socket ①.
Socket on the center console
You must have a license agreement to activate the mbrace service. Ensure that your system is activated and ready for use, and press the MB Info call button to register. If one of these steps is not carried out, it may not be possible to activate the system.
If you have questions about the activation, contact one of the following telephone hotlines:
• USA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
• Canada: Customer Service at 1-888-923-8367
Shortly after successfully registering with the mbrace service, a user ID and password will ! If accessories are connected, make surebe sent to you by mail.
that a maximum current draw of 15 A is not only: you can use this password to log exceeded. Otherwise, you will overload the onto the mbrace area under "Owners Online" fuse. at http://www.mbusa.com.
text_image
① 12 V MAX.15 A ② P58.00-6800-31Example: Coupe
▶ To open: briefly press the middle of cover ①.
The stowage compartment opens.
▶ Lift up the cover of socket ②.
▶ To close: fold down cover ①.
The mbrace system is available if:
- it has been activated and is operational
- the corresponding mobile phone network is available for transmitting data to the Customer Center
- a service subscription is available
• the starter battery is sufficiently charged
i Determining the location of the vehicle on a map is only possible if:
• GPS reception is available.
- the vehicle position can be forwarded to the Customer Assistance Center.
The mbrace system
To adjust the volume during an mbrace cal proceed as follows:
▶ Press the + or - button on the multifunction steering wheel.
or
▶ Use the volume controller of COMAND.
The mbrace system provides various services, e.g.:
• Automatic and manual emergency call
• Roadside Assistance call
- MB Info call
USA only: you can find information and a description of all available features under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
Self-diagnosis of the system
After you have switched on the ignition, the system carries out a self-diagnosis.
A malfunction in the system has been detected if one of the following conditions occurs:
- The indicator lamp in the SOS button does not come on during the system self-test.
- The indicator lamp in the 📄 Roadside Assistance button does not light up during self-diagnosis of the system.
- The indicator lamp in the 📞 i MB Info call button does not light up during self-diagnosis of the system.
- The indicator lamp in one or more of the An emergency call is dialed automatically if following buttons continues to light up red air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is after the system self-diagnosis: triggered.
- SOS button
- Roadside Assistance call button
- i MB Info call button
- the Tele Aid Inoperative or Tele Aid Not Activated message appears in the multifunction display after the system diagnosis.
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above, the system may not operate as expected. In the event of an emergency, help will have to be summoned by other means. Have the system checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or contact the following service hotlines:
• USA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
• Canada: Customer Service at 1-888-923-8367
Emergency call
Important safety notes
You must have a license agreement to activate the mbrace service. Ensure that your system is activated and ready for use, and press the i MB Info call button in e register. If one of these steps is not carried out, it may not be possible to activate the system.
If you have questions about the activation, contact one of the following telephone hotlines:
• USA: Mercedes-Benz Customer
Assistance center at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
• Canada: Customer Service at
1-888-923-8367
General notes
the An emergency call is dialed automatically if redn air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is triggered.
You cannot end an automatically triggered emergency call yourself.
An emergency call can also be initiated manually.
As soon as the emergency call has been self-initiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes. The Connecting Call message appears in the multifunction display.
The audio output is muted.
Once the connection has been made, the Call Connected message appears in the multifunction display.
All important information on the emergency is transmitted, for example:
- Current location of the vehicle (as determined by the GPS system)
• Vehicle identification number
• Information on the type of emergency
Shortly after the emergency call has been initiated, a voice connection is automatically established between the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants. - If the vehicle occupants respond, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center attempts to get more information on the emergency.
- If there is no response from the vehicle occupants, an ambulance is immediately sent to the vehicle.
The mbrace system cannot initiate an emergency call if a voice connection cannot be established with the Response Center. This can occur for instance if the relevant mobile phone network is not available. The indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes continuously.
The Call Failed message appears in the multifunction display for approximately ten seconds.
In this case, summon assistance by other means.
Making an emergency call
WARNING
It can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle, even if you have pressed the SOS button in an emergency if:
- you see smoke inside or outside of the vehicle, e.g. if there is a fire after an accident
- the vehicle is on a dangerous section of road
- the vehicle is not visible or cannot easily be seen by other road users, particularly when dark or in poor visibility conditions
There is a risk of an accident and injury. Leave the vehicle immediately in this or similar situations as soon as it is safe to do so. Move to a safe location along with other vehicle occupants. In such situations, secure the vehicle in accordance with national regulations, e. g. with a warning triangle.
text_image
① ② P82.95-2893-31▶ To initiate an emergency call manually: press cover ① briefly to open.
▶ Press SOS button ② briefly.
The indicator lamp in SOS button ② flashes until the emergency call is concluded.
▶ Wait for a voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.
▶ After the emergency call, close cover ①.
If the mobile phone network is unavailable, mbrace will not be able to make the emergency call. If you leave the
vehicle immediately after pressing the SO\$he Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance button, you will not know whether mbracCenter either sends a qualified Mercedesplaced the emergency call. In this case, always summon assistance by other means.
Roadside Assistance button
text_image
P82.95-2894-31▶ Press Roadside Assistance button ① for more than two seconds. This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance button ① flashes while the call is active. The Connecting Call message appears on the multifunction display. The audio output is muted.
Benz technician or arranges for your vehicle to be transported to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. You may be charged for services such as repair work and/or towing. Further details are available in your mbrace manual.
i The mbrace system failed to initiate a Roadside Assistance call if:
- the indicator lamp for Roadside Assistance call button ① is flashing continuously. - no voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center was established.
This may be because the corresponding mobile phone network is not available. The Call Failed message appears in the multifunction display.
To end a call: press the
multifunction steering wheel.
or
Press the corresponding button for ending a phone call on COMAND.
If a connection can be made, the CallCall ConnectedConnected message appears in the multifunction display.
If a cellular phone network is available and there is sufficient GPS reception, the mbrace system transmits data to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, for example:
- Current location of the vehicle
• Vehicle identification number
The COMAND display shows that an mbrace call is active. During the call, you can change to the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI button on COMAND, for example.
Voice output is not available.
A voice connection is established between the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants.
MB Info call button
text_image
1 P82.95-2895-31Press MB Info call button ① for more than two seconds.
This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. The indicator lamp in MB Info call button ① flashes while the connection is being made. The
Connecting Call message appears in the multifunction display and the COMAND system is muted.
▶ To end a call: press the 📞 button on the multifunction steering wheel.
or
If a connection can be made, the CallCaT▶Press the corresponding button for ending ConnectedConnected message appears in thea phone call on COMAND. multifunction display.
If a cellular phone network is available and there is sufficient GPS reception, the mbrace system transmits data to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, for example:
- Current location of the vehicle
• Vehicle identification number
The COMAND display shows that an embrace call is active. During the call, you can change to the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI button on COMAND, for example.
Voice output is not available.
A voice connection is established between the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants. You can obtain information on how to operate your vehicle's systems, on the location of the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, and on further products and services offered by Mercedes-Benz USA.
USA only: you can find further information the mbrace system under "Owners Online" http://www.mbusa.com.
i The mbrace system failed to initiate an MB Info call if:
- the indicator lamp in MB Info call button ① is flashing continuously.
- no voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center was established.
This may be because the corresponding mobile phone network is not available.
The Call Failed message appears in the multifunction display.
Call priority
When service calls are active, e.g. Roadside Assistance or MB Info calls, an emergency call can still be initiated. In this case, an emergency call will take priority and override all other active calls.
The indicator lamp of the respective button flashes until the call is ended. An emergency call can only be terminated by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.
All other calls can be ended by pressing:
- the button on the multifunction steering wheel
• or the corresponding COMAND button for ending a telephone call
If an mbrace call is initiated, audio output is muted. The mobile phone is no longer connected to COMAND. If you must use your mobile phone, we recommend that you do this only when the vehicle is stationary and in a safe location.
Downloading destinations in COMAND
Downloading destinations
i Information on the components and operating principles of COMAND can be found in the separate COMAND operating instructions.
This service is part of the mbrace PLUS Package and cannot be purchased separately.
You can only use the Destination Download function if the vehicle is equipped with a navigation system.
Destination Download gives you access to a data bank with over 15 million Points of Interest (POIs). These can be downloaded on
the navigation system in your vehicle. If yolocked by the Mercedes-Benz Customer know the destination, the address can be Assistance Center.
downloaded. Alternatively, you can obtain location of Points of Interest (POIs)/important destinations in the vicinity.
The vehicle can be locked remotely up to four days after the ignition was last switched off.
You are prompted to confirm route guidance to the address entered.
The system calculates the route and subsequently starts the route guidance with the address entered.
If you select No, the address can be stored in the address book.
i The Destination Download function is available if the corresponding mobile phone network is available and data transfer is possible.
Route Assistance
This service is part of the mbrace PLUS Package and cannot be purchased separately.
i You can also use the Route Assistance function if your vehicle is not equipped with a navigation system.
Within the framework of this service, you receive a professional and reliable form of navigation support without having to leave your vehicle.
The customer service representative determines a suitable driving route based on your current vehicle position and the desired destination and guides you live through theIf current sections of the route.
Search & Send
"Search & Send" is a destination entry service. You can find further information on "Search & Send" in the separate COMAND operating instructions.
Vehicle remote closing
The remote closing feature can be used when you have forgotten to lock the vehicle and you are no longer nearby. The vehicle can then
▶ Contact the following service hotlines:
• USA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
• Canada: Customer Service at 1-888-923-8367
You will be asked for your PIN.
The next time you are inside the vehicle you switch on the ignition, the Tele Aid Doors Locked Remotely message appears in the multifunction display.
USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can be locked via:
- the Internet, under the "Owners Online" section
- the telephone application (e.g. iPhone Blackberry)
To do this, you will need your identification number and password.
i The vehicle remote closing feature is available when the relevant mobile phone network is available and data connection is possible.
tolen vehicle recovery service
elf your vehicle has been stolen:
▶ Notify the police. The police will issue a numbered incident report.
This number will be forwarded to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center together with your PIN. The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center then attempts to locate the mbrace system. The Mercedes-Benz Customer
Assistance Center contacts you and the hen local law enforcement agency if the vehicle you is located. However, only the law be
enforcement agency is informed of the location of the vehicle.
If the anti-theft alarm system is active longer than 30 seconds, mbrace automatically informs the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.
Rear spoiler
The rear spoiler improves the handling of the vehicle. It adapts the vehicle's aerodynamics to the operating conditions, dependent on the speed of the vehicle.
text_image
① P54.25-8727-31Example: Coupe
If the vehicle is equipped with AMG adaptive sport suspension system, the button is in the switch strip above the conditioning control panel.
Only use button ① to extend and retract rear spoiler manually for cleaning. Button ① is not used to operate the rear spoiler.
If you drive at speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h), the rear spoiler extends automatically. Button ① flashes until the rear spoiler has extended and then lights up in. If you drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h), the rear spoiler remains extended. Button ① remains lit in red.
If you drive at speeds below 50 mph (80 km/h), the rear spoiler retracts automatically. Button ① flashes until the rear spoiler has retracted and then goes out.
Extending and retracting the rear spoiler manually
you can extend and retract the rear spoiler manually for cleaning.
WARNING
Body parts could become trapped if you manually retract the rear spoiler. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that nobody is within the range of the movement of the rear spoiler. Release the switch immediately if somebody becomes trapped. The rear spoiler then extends again.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
! Do not enter an automatic car wash with the rear spoiler extended. Otherwise, the rear spoiler may be damaged. Only extend the rear spoiler in order to clean it by hand. Retract it again when you have finished cleaning it.
▶ Close the trunk lid.
▶ Select key position 2 with the Start/Stop button (▷ page 119).
▶ To extend: press button ①.
air The rear spoiler is extended.
Button ① flashes until the rear spoiler has extended and then lights up in red.
▶ To retract: press and hold button ① until the rear spoiler is completely retracted. Button ① flashes until the rear spoiler has retracted and then goes out.
Rear Spoiler retracts manually
earappears in the display.
If you release button ① while retracting the rear spoiler, it extends again automatically.
Problems with the rear spoiler
| Problem | Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions |
| The rear spoiler stops before reaching the end position when retracting manually. | You have opened the trunk lid while manually retracting the rear spoiler.▶ Close the trunk lid.The rear spoiler extends or, if you press and hold button continues retracting. |
| The rear spoiler stops before reaching the end position when retracting/extending manually. | You have switched off the ignition.▶ Switch the ignition back on.▶ Press button to extend/retract the rear spoiler.The rear spoiler extends/retracts. |
| The rear spoiler cannot be retracted again after manually extending it. | You have opened the trunk lid while manually extending the rear spoiler.▶ Close the trunk lid. |
| The rear spoiler does not extend or retract automatically. | The rear spoiler's movement is blocked, e.g. by an object jamble between the body and the rear spoiler.▶ Remove the object. |
Garage door opener
Important safety notes
WARNING
When you operate or program the garage do with the integrated garage door opener, persons in the range of movement of the garage door can become trapped or struck by the garage door. There is a risk of injury. When using the integrated garage door opener, always make sure that nobody is within the range of movement of the garage door.
WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation.
The HomeLink® garage door opener integrated in the rear-view mirror allows you to operate up to three different door and gate systems. Use the integrated garage door opener only on garage doors that:
• have safety stop and reverse features and by meet current U.S. federal safety standards When programing a garage door opener, park the vehicle outside the garage.
Certain garage door drives are incompatible with the integrated garage door opener. If you have difficulty programing the integrated garage door opener, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Features
Alternatively, you can call the following telephone assistance services:
• USA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
• Canada: Customer Service at 1-800-387-0100
Notes about the declaration of conformity can be found here (▷ page 22).
USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4
Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4
Programming
Programming buttons
Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" (▷ page 211).
text_image
① ② ③ ④ ⑤ P68.05-2199-31Integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror
Garage door remote control ⑤ is not part of the integrated garage door opener.
▶ Before programing for the first time, clear the integrated garage door opener memory (▷ page 214).
▶ Select key position 2 with the Start/Stop button (▷ page 119).
▶ Press and hold one of buttons ② to ④ the integrated garage door opener. After a short time, indicator lamp ① light up yellow.
i Indicator lamp ① lights up yellow as so as button ②, ③ or ④ is programmed for first time. If the selected button has already been programmed, indicator lamp ① will
only light up yellow after ten seconds have elapsed.
▶ Release button ②, ③ or ④. Indicator lamp ① flashes yellow.
▶ Point garage door remote control ⑤ towards buttons ② to ④ on the rear-view mirror at a distance of 2 to 8 inches (5 to ty 20 cm).
The required distance between remote control ⑤ and the integrated garage door opener depends on the garage door drive system. Several attempts might be necessary. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position.
Press and hold button ⑥ on remote control ⑤ until indicator lamp ① lights up green. If indicator lamp ① lights up green or flashes, then programing was successful.
▶ Release button ⑥ on remote control ⑤ for the garage door drive system.
▶ If indicator lamp ① lights up red: repeat the programing procedure for the corresponding button on the rear-view mirror. When doing so, vary the distance between remote control ⑤ and the rear-view mirror.
i If the indicator lamp flashes green after successful programing, the garage door of system is using a rolling code. After programing, you must synchronize the garage door opener integrated in the rear- view mirror with the receiver of the garage door system.
Synchronizing the rolling code
Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" on (▷ page 211).
Your vehicle must be within reach of the garage door or exterior gate drive. Make sure that neither your vehicle nor any persons/
on objects are present within the sweep of the door or gate.
first time. If the selected button has already been programmed, indicator lamp ① will
▶ Select key position 2 with the Start/Stop button (▷ page 119).
▶ Press the programing button of the door gate drive (see the door or gate drive operating instructions, e.g. under "Programing additional remote controls").
i Usually, you now have 30 seconds to initiate the next step.
▶ Press previously programmed button ②, ③ or ④ of the integrated garage door open until the door closes. The rolling code synchronization is then complete.
▶ Repeat this sequence on button ⑥ of remote control ⑤ until indicator lamp ①
olights up green. If indicator lamp ① turns red, repeat the process.
▶ Continue with the other programing steps (see above).
Problems when programing
If you are experiencing problems programing the integrated garage door opener on the rear-view mirror, take note of the following instructions:
- Check the transmitter frequency of garage oldoor drive remote control ⑤. This can usually be found on the back of the remote control.
Notes on programing the remote control
Canadian radio frequency laws require a "break" (or interruption) of the transmission signals after broadcasting for a few seconds. Therefore, these signals may not last long enough for the integrated garage door opener. The signal is not recognized during programing. Comparable with Canadian law, some U.S. garage door openers also feature a "break".
Proceed as follows:
- if you live in Canada - if you have difficulties programing the garage door opener (regardless of where you live) when using the programing steps
▶ Press and hold one of buttons ② to ④ o the integrated garage door opener. After a short time, indicator lamp ① lights up yellow.
▶ Release the button. Indicator lamp ① flashes yellow.
▶ Press button ⑥ of garage door remote control ⑤ for two seconds, then release for two seconds.
▶ Press button ⑥ again for two seconds.
The integrated garage door opener is compatible with devices that have units which operate in the frequency range of 280 to 433 MHz.
Replace the batteries in garage door remote control ⑤. This increases the likelihood that garage door remote control ⑤ will transmit a strong and precise signal to the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror.
- When programming, hold remote control ⑤ is at varying distances and angles from the button that you are programming. Try various angles at a distance between 2 and 12 inches (5 to 30 cm) or at the same angle but at varying distances.
- If another remote control for the same garage door drive is available, repeat the same programing steps with this remote control. Before performing these steps, it make sure that new batteries have been installed in garage door drive remote control ⑤.
• Note that some remote controls only transmit for a limited amount of time (the indicator lamp on the remote control goes
out). Press button ⑥ on remote control trickle charger to the charge maintenance ⑤ again before transmission ends. socket.
- Align the antenna cable of the garage door. The charge maintenance socket is designed opener unit. This can improve signal reception/transmission. Opening/closing the garage door
Opening/closing the garage door
Once programmed, the integrated garage door opener ⑤ will assume the function of the garage door system's remote control. Please also read the operating instructions for the garage door system.
▶ Select key position 2 with the Start/Stop button.
▶ Press button ②, ③ or ④ which you have programmed to operate the garage door. Garage door system with a fixed code: indicator lamp ① lights up green.
Garage door system with a rolling code: indicator lamp ① flashes green.
i The transmitter will transmit a signal as long as the button is pressed. The transmission is halted after a maximum of ten seconds and indicator lamp ① lights up yellow. Press button ②, ③ or ④ again if necessary.
Clearing the memory
▶ Select key position 2 with the Start/Stop button.
▶ Press buttons ② and ④.
The indicator lamp lights up yellow.
▶ Press and hold buttons ② and ④ until the indicator lamp turns green.
i Make sure that you clear the memory of the integrated garage door opener before selling the vehicle.
Charge maintenance socket
The battery may drain if the vehicle is left stationary for long periods. In this case, Mercedes-Benz recommends attaching the
natural_image
Close-up of a mechanical component with an inset close-up highlighting a numbered component (1), no visible text or symbols.▶ Switch the ignition off.
▶ Open the trunk lid.
▶ Connect the cable provided in the trunk to the trickle charger.
Connect the trickle charger to charge of maintenance socket ①. Consult the manufacturer's operating instructions on gain how to do so.
i A trickle charger connected to charge maintenance socket ① only maintains the current charge level of the vehicle's electrical system battery. If the vehicle's electrical system battery is discharged, it needs to be charged with a battery charger. You will find further information on charging the battery on (▷ page 236).
Floormat on the driver's side
WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. The operating and road safety of the vehicle is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
securely and as specified in order to ensure sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place floormats on top of one another.
text_image
Diagram showing a mechanical or structural component with numbered parts and an inset magnified view highlighting two labeled components.▶ Slide the seat backwards.
▶ To install: place the floormat in position.
▶ Press studs ① onto retainers ②.
▶ To remove: pull the floormat off retainers ②.
▶ Remove the floormat.
Useful information 218
Engine compartment 218
Maintenance 222
Care 223
Useful information
This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.
i Please read the information on qualified specialist workshops (▷ page 22).
Engine compartment
Hood
Important safety notes
WARNING
If the hood is unlatched, it may open up when the vehicle is in motion and block your view.
There is a risk of an accident.
Never unlatch the hood while driving.
WARNING
When opening and closing the hood, it may suddenly fall into the closed position. There a risk of injury to persons within range of movement of the hood.
Open and close the hood only when no one within its range of movement.
WARNING
Opening the hood when the engine is overheated or when there is a fire in the engine compartment could expose you to hot gases or other service products. There is a risk of injury.
Let an overheated engine cool down before opening the hood. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and contact the fire department.
WARNING
The engine compartment contains moving components. Certain components, such as the radiator fan, may continue to run or start again suddenly when the ignition is off. There is a risk of injury.
If you need to do any work inside the engine may compartment,
- switch off the ignition
- never reach into the area where there is a risk of danger from moving components, such as the fan rotation area
- keep clothing away from moving parts
Opening the hood
WARNING
Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following.
WARNING
When the hood is open and the windshield wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and is the ignition before opening the hood.
natural_image
Interior view of a vehicle dashboard with a magnified circular detail showing a numbered object (1), no readable text or symbols present.Hood release lever in driver's footwell
▶ Pull release lever ① on the hood. The hood is released.
! Make sure that the windshield wipers are not folded away from the windshield. You could otherwise damage the windshield wipers or the hood.
natural_image
Close-up of a Mercedes-Benz car with a hand valve and a magnified inset showing the lever mechanism (no text or symbols visible)▶ Reach into the gap, pull hood catch handle ② up and lift the hood.
Closing the hood
▶ Lower the hood and let it fall from a height of approximately 8 inches (20 cm).
▶ Check that the hood has engaged properly. If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not properly engaged. Open it again and close it with a little more force.
Engine oil
General notes
Depending on the driving style, the vehicle consumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 l) of oil or distance of 600 miles (1000 km). The oil consumption may be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive high engine speeds.
Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick be in a different location.
When checking the oil level:
- park the vehicle on a level surface.
the engine should be switched off for approximately five minutes if the engine is at normal operating temperature. - if the engine is not at normal operating temperature, e.g. if the engine was only started briefly, wait about 30 minutes before carrying out the measurement.
Checking the oil level using the oil dipstick
WARNING
Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down an touch only the components described in the following.
text_image
① ② ③ P18.40-2362-31▶ Unscrew and remove oil filler cap ① with the integrated dipstick.
▶ Wipe the oil dipstick.
▶ Screw on oil filler cap ① again to the stop.
▶ Unscrew oil filler cap ① again and read the may dipstick.
If the level is between MIN mark ③ and MAX mark ②, the oil level is correct.
▶ If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark ③ or below, add 1.1 US qt(1.0 liter) engine oil.
Adding engine oil
WARNING
Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following.
WARNING
If engine oil comes into contact with hot components in the engine compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next to the filler neck. Let the engine cool down and thoroughly clean the engine oil off the components before starting the engine.
Environmental note
When adding oil, take care not to spill any. I oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to the environment.
! Only use engine oils and oil filters that have been approved for vehicles with a service system. You can obtain a list of engine oils and oil filters tested and approved in accordance with the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products at any Mercedes-Benz Service center.
Damage to the engine or exhaust system caused by the following:
- using engine oils and oil filters that h not been specifically approved for the service system
- replacing engine oil and oil filters after the interval for replacement specified by the service system has been exceeded
• using engine oil additives.
engine or to the catalytic converter. Have excess engine oil siphoned off.
text_image
① P01.00-3215-31▶ Unscrew and remove oil filler cap ① with the integrated dipstick.
▶ Add engine oil. If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark on the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) of engine oil.
▶ Replace cap ① on the filler neck and tighten clockwise.
If Ensure that the cap locks into place securely.
▶ Check the oil level again with the oil dipstick (▷ page 219).
You will find further information about engine oil in the "Technical data" section (page 281).
Additional service products
Checking coolant level
WARNING
Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following.
! Do not add too much oil. adding too much engine oil can result in damage to the
WARNING
The engine cooling system is pressurized, particularly when the engine is warm. When opening the cap, you could be scalded by I coolant spraying out. There is a risk of inju Let the engine cool down before opening the cap. Wear eye and hand protection when opening the cap. Open the cap slowly half turn to allow pressure to escape.
- If necessary, add coolant that has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. - Replace cap ① and turn it clockwise as far not as it will go. You will find further information about coolant in the "Technical data" section (page 283).
Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system
Only check the coolant level when the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cool down.
▶ Set the Start/Stop button to key position 2.
▶ Check the coolant temperature display in the "AMG" menu (▷ page 161).
The coolant temperature must be below 158 °F (70 °C).
text_image
Technical diagram of an engine compartment with numbered parts, highlighting a mechanical component in section 1.▶ Slowly turn cap ① half a turn counterclockwise and allow excess pressure to escape.
▶ Turn cap ① further counter-clockwise and remove it.
If the coolant is at the level of the marker bar in the filler neck when cold, there is enough coolant in coolant expansion tank ②.
If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in (1.5 cm) above the marker bar in the filler neck when warm, there is enough coolant in coolant expansion tank ②.
oiledWARNING
Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down an touch only the components described in the following.
WARNING
Windshield washer concentrate is highly flammable. If it comes into contact with hot engine components or the exhaust system it could ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
Make sure that no windshield washer concentrate is spilled next to the filler neck.
The washer fluid reservoir is used for both the windshield washer system and the headlamp cleaning system.
text_image
d ker in ler t ① P82.35-2639-31Maintenance
▶ To open: pull cap ① upwards by the taining the time-dependent service
▶ Add the premixed washer fluid. schedule:
▶ To close: press cap ① onto the filler neck Note down the service due date displayed until it engages. in the multifunction display before
If the washer fluid level drops below the recommended minimum of 1 liter, a mess appears in the multifunction display prompting you to add washer fluid (▷ page 185).
Further information on windshield washer fluid/antifreeze (▷ page 284).
Note down the service due date displayed in the multifunction display before disconnecting the battery.
▶ After reconnecting the battery, subtract the battery disconnection periods from the service date shown on the display.
The service interval display does not provide any information regarding the engine's oil level. Observe the notes on the engine oil level (▷ page 219).
Hiding a service message
Maintenance
Service interval display
Service messages
Information on the type of service and service intervals (see the separate Maintenance Booklet).
You can obtain further information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).
The service interval message informs you of the next service due date.
If a service due date has been exceeded, you also hear a warning tone.
The multifunction display shows a service message for several seconds, e.g.:
Next Service A in .. days
Service A Due
Service A Exceeded by .. days
The letter indicates which service is due. A stands for a minor service and B for a major service. A number or another letter may be displayed after the letter. This figure indicates any necessary additional maintenance work to be performed.
You can obtain further information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The service interval display does not take account any periods of time during which battery is disconnected.
▶ Press the ← or OK button on the steering wheel.
Displaying service messages
▶ Switch on the ignition.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu.
▶ Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the ASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm by you pressing the OK button.
The service due date appears in the multifunction display.
Points to remember
Resetting the service interval display
A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, will reset the service interval display after the necessary service work has been carried out. You can also obtain further information on maintenance work, for example.
! If the service interval display has been reset unintentionally, have the setting into corrected at a Mercedes-Benz Center. the Have service work carried out as described in the Maintenance Booklet. This may otherwise lead to increased wear and
damage to the major assemblies or the vehicle.
Special service requirements
The specified maintenance interval takes only the normal operation of the vehicle into account. Under arduous operating conditions or increased load on the vehicle, maintenance work must be carried out more frequently, for example:
- regular city driving with frequent intermediate stops
- if the vehicle is primarily used to travel short distances
- use in mountainous terrain or on poor roa surfaces
- if the engine is often left idling for long periods
Under these or similar conditions, have, for example, the air filter, engine oil and oil filt replaced or changed more frequently. Under arduous operating conditions, the tires must be checked more often. Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Driving abroad
An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network is also available in other countries. You can obtain further information from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Care
General notes
Regular care of your vehicle is a condition retaining the quality in the long term. Use care products and cleaning agents recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any of the following:
• dry, rough or hard cloths
• abrasive cleaning agents
- solvents
- cleaning agents containing solvents Do not scrub.
Do not touch the surfaces or protective films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice scraper. You could otherwise scratch or damage the surfaces and protective film.
Environmental note
Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning cloths in an environmentally responsible manner.
! Do not park the vehicle for an extended period straight after cleaning it, particularly after having cleaned the wheels with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause increased corrosion of the brake discs and brake pads/linings. For this reason, you should drive for a few minutes after cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and the brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The vehicle can then be parked.
Exterior care
Automatic car wash
WARNING
Braking efficiency is reduced after washing the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. After the vehicle has been washed, brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until full braking power is restored.
You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car wash from the very start.
Ifothe vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before cleaning it in an automatic car wash.
! Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless Automatic Car Wash as these use special cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can my damage the paintwork or plastic parts.
! When washing your vehicle in a tow-through car wash, use the SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button.
Start the engine using the SmartKey.. Mo the transmission to N with the E-SELECT lever. Use the SmartKey to switch the engine off again and then turn the SmartKey to position 2. Make sure that you then leave the SmartKey in position 2. You may otherwise damage the vehicle, the transmission or the car wash.
Check the transmission position in the instrument cluster.
! Use the E-SELECT lever to shift the transmission to N before switching the engine off. If you open the driver's or from passenger door, the transmission remains in this position for up to 30 minutes if th
SmartKey is in the ignition, even if the engine is switched off. If you do not shift the transmission to N using the E-SELECT lever beforehand, it shifts automatically to parking position P and locks the wheels in the driver's or front-passenger door is opened and the engine is switched off. The may damage the vehicle, the transmission or the car wash.
Observe the information on maneuvering (▷ page 131).
! Before driving into an automatic car was make sure that it is suitable for the dimensions of the vehicle. In particular, make sure that:
- there is enough ground clearance between the vehicle underbody and the guide rails of the automatic car wash.
- the clearance width of the automatic car wash is sufficient, particularly the width of the guide rails.
- you enter the automatic car wash straight and in the center of the guide rails in order to avoid damaging the tir or wheel rims.
Fold in the exterior mirrors before the vehicle is washed. The exterior mirrors could otherwise be damaged.
Make sure that:
- the side windows and the roof are completely closed
- the climate control blower is switched off
- the windshield wiper switch is at position 0
The vehicle could otherwise be damaged.
! In portal car washes, the windshield wipers may be moved up the windshield by the cleaning brushes when the ignition is switched off.
onset the Start/Stop button to key position 2 to reset the windshield wipers to their the original position.
! Preferably use automatic car washes with adjustable high-pressure pre-cleaning. This corresponds with the specification for the Cabriolet program. In car washes that use high water pressures, there is a risk that a small amount of water may leak into the vehicle.
! Cabriolet: do not treat the vehicle with hot wax under any circumstances.
After using an automatic car wash, wipe off wax and drying agents from the windshield and the wiper blades. This will prevent smears and reduce wiping noises caused by residue on the windshield.
Washing by hand
In some countries, washing by hand is only allowed at specially equipped washing bays.
Observe the legal requirements in each country.
▶ Do not use hot water and do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.
▶ Use a soft sponge to clean.
▶ Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.
▶ Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a gentle jet of water.
▶ Do not point the water jet directly towards the air inlet.
▶ Use plenty of water and rinse out the sponge frequently.
▶ Rinse the vehicle with clean water and thoroughly with a chamois.
▶ Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the paintwork.
Carefully remove all deposits of road salt as soon as possible when driving in winter.
Power washers
WARNING
The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage to the tires or chassis components.
Components damaged in this way may fail unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not use power washers with circular jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged tires or chassis components replaced immediately.
! Always maintain a distance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and power washer nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer.
Move the power washer nozzle around when cleaning your vehicle.
Do not aim directly at any of the following
- tires
• door gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc.
• electrical components - battery
- connectors
- lights
- seals
- trim
- ventilation slots
Damaged seals or electrical components can lead to leaks or failures.
Cleaning the wheels
! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products to remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components.
! Do not park the vehicle for an extended period straight after cleaning it, particularly after having cleaned the wheels with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause increased corrosion of the brake discs and brake pads/linings. For this reason, you should drive for a few minutes after cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and the brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The vehicle can then be parked.
Cleaning the paintwork
Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused by inadequate care cannot always be complete repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
the Remove impurities immediately, where possible, whilst avoiding rubbing too hard.
- Soak insect remains with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards.
- Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off the treated areas afterwards.
Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid.
▶ Use tar remover to remove tar stains.
▶ Use silicone remover to remove wax.
! Do not affix:
- stickers
- films
- magnetic plates or similar items to painted surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork.
If water no longer forms "beads" on the paint surface, use the paint care products recommended and approved by Mercedes-
Benz. This is the case approximately every three to five months, depending on the climate conditions and the care product used. If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or the paint has become dull, the paint cleaner recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz should be used.
Do not use these care products in the sun on the hood while the hood is hot.
▶ Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB Touch-Up Stick, to correct smaller areas of paint damage quickly and provisionally.
Matte finish care
If your vehicle has a clear matte finish, observe the following instructions in order avoid damage to the paintwork due to incorrect care.
These notes also apply to light alloy wheels with a clear matte finish.
! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy wheels. Polishing causes the finish to shine.
! The following may cause the paint to become shiny and thus reduce the matte effect:
- Vigorous rubbing with unsuitable materials.
• Frequent use of car washes. - Washing the vehicle in direct sunlight.
! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or polishing products such as gloss preserver (wax). These products are only suitable for high-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicles with matte finish leads to considerable surface damage (shiny, spotted areas).
If wax comes into contact with the painted surface by accident, remove it immediately with commercially available petroleum ether. Do so carefully and do not apply too much pressure to the painted surface.
Ensure that no resinous, greasy or oily substances come into contact with the
paint, as these can leave a residue. If such substances do come into contact with the painted surface accidentally, remove these immediately with commercially available petroleum ether. Do so carefully and do not apply too much pressure to the painted surface.
Far stains or marks on the painted surface can be removed with a commercially available tar remover. Do so carefully and do not apply too much pressure to the painted surface.
Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
! Do not use wash programs with a hot wax treatment under any circumstances.
i The vehicle should preferably be washed by hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo and plenty of water.
Use only insect remover and car shampoo from the range of recommended and approved Mercedes-Benz care products.
Cleaning the Roadster soft top
▶ Light soiling: you can clean the soft top while it is dry or rinse it with clear water.
▶ Normal to heavy soiling: clean the soft top with a brush and clear water. Clean stains and other dirt with a brush and soft top cleaning agents that have been recommended and approved by Mercedes-er Benz. Always brush from front to back, or following the grain of the fabric.
! Never use any of the following to clean the soft top:
- gasoline
- thinner
• tar or stain remover
too. other organic solvents
! Remove bird droppings immediately, as they are corrosive and can therefore cause the soft-top fabric to leak. Do not wash the
vehicle with a power washer or in a car wash that uses power washers. Do not use sharp-edged equipment to remove ice and snow.
Frequent cleaning reduces the soft top's resistance to dirt.
To restore this resistance to dirt, clean the soft top using soft top cleaning agents that have been recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Incorrect cleaning and care, as well as aging can cause the soft-top seams to leak. Have the soft-top seams sealed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
i Cover the soft top appropriately if you plan to leave the vehicle outside for a period of time.
Cleaning the windows
WARNING
You could become trapped by the windshield wipers if they start moving while cleaning the windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before cleaning the windshield or wiper blades.
! Only fold the windshield wipers away from the windshield when vertical. Otherwise, you will damage the hood.
▶ Clean the inside and outside of the windows with a damp cloth and a cleaning product that is recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products, solvents or cleaning agents containing solvents to clean the inside of the windows. Do not touch the insides of the windows with hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the windows.
! Clean the water drainage channels of the use windshield and the rear window at regular intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals and pollen may under certain circumstances prevent water from draining away. This can lead to corrosion damage and damage to electronic components.
Cleaning wiper blades
WARNING
You could become trapped by the windshield wipers if they start moving while cleaning windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before cleaning the windshield of ngiper blades.
! Only fold the windshield wipers away from the windshield when vertical. Otherwise, you will damage the hood.
! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise, the wiper blade could be damaged.
Do not clean wiper blades too often and do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the graphite coating could be damaged. This could cause wiper noise.
▶ Switch off the engine.
▶ Remove your foot from the brake pedal.
▶ Set the windshield wiper to the — position on the combination switch.
▶ Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until the windshield wiper starts.
When the wiper arms have reached a vertical position, press the Start/Stop button.
Fold the wiper arm away from the windshield until it engages.
Set the wiper blade at right angles to the wiper arm.
▶ Carefully clean the wiper blades with a ng damp cloth.
▶ Fold the windshield wiper arms back again before switching on the ignition.
! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding back. The windshield could be damaged if the wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.
Cleaning the exterior lighting
▶ Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior lighting using a wet sponge and a mild cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning cloths.
! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths which are suitable for plastic light lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic light lenses.
Cleaning the mirror turn signals
! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the mirror turn signals.
▶ Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn signals in the exterior mirror housing using a wet sponge and a mild cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning cloths.
Cleaning the sensors
! If you clean the sensors with a power washer, make sure that you keep a distance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) bet the vehicle and the power washer nozzle Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer.
text_image
Diagram of a Mercedes-Benz car front grille with labeled parts and a numbered marker '1'
text_image
P54.05-4007-31▶ Clean sensors ① of the driving systems with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.
'Cleaning the rear view camera
text_image
ic rn ng 1 P54.65-4189-31▶ Use clear water and a soft cloth to clean camera lens ①.
! Do not clean the camera lens and the area around the rear view camera with a power washer.
Cleaning the exhaust pipes
! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid-based cleaning agents such as sanitary cleansers or wheel cleaners.
▶ Clean the exhaust pipe with a chrome care product tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Impurities combined with the effects of road You can otherwise damage the plastic.
grit and corrosive environmental factors may cause flash rust to form on the surface. You can restore the original shine of the exhaust pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in winter and after washing.
Interior care
Cleaning the display
! For cleaning, do not use any of the following:
• alcohol-based thinner or gasoline
• abrasive cleaning agents
• commercially-available household cleaning agents
These may damage the display surface. not put pressure on the display surface when cleaning. This could lead to irreparable damage to the display.
Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sunscreen to come into contact with the plastic trim. This maintains the high-quality look of the surfaces.
▶ Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.
▶ Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
The surface may change color temporarily. Wait until the surface is dry again.
Cleaning the steering wheel and selector lever
▶ Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use leather care agents that have been recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
▶ Before cleaning the display, make sure it is switched off and has cooled down.
▶ Clean the display surface using a commercially available microfiber cloth and TFT/LCD display cleaner.
▶ Dry the display surface using a dry microfiber cloth.
! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, polishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the surface.
Cleaning the plastic trim
WARNING
Care products and cleaning agents containing solvents cause surfaces in the cockpit to become porous. As a result, plastic parts may come loose in the event of air bag deployment. There is a risk of injury.
Do not use any care products and cleaning agents to clean the cockpit.
! Do not affix the following to plastic surfaces:
- stickers
• films
• scented oil bottles or similar items
Cleaning genuine wood and trim elements
! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces. The trim pieces have a chrome look but are mostly made of anodized aluminum and can lose their shine if chrome polish is used. Use a damp, lint-free cloth instead when cleaning the trim pieces.
If the chrome-plated trim pieces are very dirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you are unsure as to whether the trim pieces are chrome-plated or not, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
▶ Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.
▶ Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Cleaning the seat covers
General notes
! Do not use microfiber cloths to clean genuine leather, artificial leather or DINAMICA covers. If used often, these can damage the cover.
i Note that regular care is essential to ensure that the appearance and comfort the covers is retained over time.
Genuine leather seat covers
Leather is a natural product. It exhibits natural surface characteristics, for example:
• differences in the texture
• signs of stretching and marking
- slight nuances of color
These are characteristics of leather and not material defects.
! To retain the natural appearance of the leather, observe the following cleaning instructions:
- Clean genuine leather covers carefully with a damp cloth and then wipe the covers down with a dry cloth.
- Make sure that the leather does not become soaked. It may otherwise become rough and cracked.
- Only use leather care agents that have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain these from a qualified specialist workshop.
Seat covers of other materials
! Observe the following when cleaning:
- Clean artificial leather covers with a cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).
- Clean cloth covers with a microfiber cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rub carefully and always wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave the seat to dry
afterwards. Cleaning results depend on the type of dirt and how long it has been there.
- Clean Alcantara® covers with a damp cloth. Make sure that you wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines.
Cleaning the seat belts
WARNING
Seat belts can become severely weakened if bleached or dyed. This could cause the seat belts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or fatal injury.
Never bleach or dye the seat belts.
! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts by heating at temperatures above 176 °F (80 °C) or in direct sunlight.
▶ Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solution.
Useful information 232
Where will I find...? 232
Flat tire 233
Battery (vehicle) 236
Jump-starting 240
Towing and tow-starting 242
Fuses 244
Useful information
This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.
i Please read the information on qualified specialist workshops (▷ page 22).
Where will I find...?
First-aid kit
The first-aid kit is located in the left-hand stowage compartment in the trunk.
▶ Open the trunk lid.
text_image
① ② P91.10-3518-31▶ Turn fastener ② in the direction of the arrow.
▶ Open stowage compartment ①.
▶ Open the Velcro fastener and remove the first aid kit.
Check the expiration date on the first-aid kit at least once a year. Replace the contents if necessary, and replace missing contents.
Vehicle tool kit
Wheel-change tool kit and jack
The wheel-change tool kit and the jack are located in the left-hand stowage space in the trunk.
text_image
P58,10-2264-31Left-hand stowage space in trunk floor
① Lug wrench
② Towing eye
▶ Pull the loop on the floor covering and fold the floor covering forward.
▶ Take out the jack and lug wrench ① underneath it.
TREFIT kit, wheel chock, alignment bolt and gloves
The TREFIT kit, wheel chock, alignment bolt and gloves are located in the left-hand stowage compartment in the trunk.
text_image
Diagram showing mechanical component with labeled parts and directional arrows, including a magnified inset highlighting rotational motion.Left-hand stowage compartment in the trunk
▶ Remove the jack from the left-hand stowage space in the trunk to allow the stowage compartment to be opened.
▶ Turn fastener ② in the direction of the arrow.
▶ Open stowage compartment ①.
▶ Remove the TREFIT kit, wheel chock, alignment bolt and gloves.
Flat tire
Preparing the vehicle
Your vehicle is equipped with a TREFIT kit.
▶ Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and level ground, as far away as possible from traffic.
▶ Switch on the hazard warning lamps.
▶ Apply the electric parking brake manually (▷ page 133).
▶ Bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position.
▶ Shift the transmission to P with the button in the center console.
▶ Switch off the engine.
▶ Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
▶ All occupants must get out of the vehicle Make sure that they are not endangered they do so.
▶ Make sure that no one is near the danger, area while a wheel is being changed. Anyone who is not directly assisting in the wheel change should, for example, stand behind the barrier.
▶ Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traffic conditions when doing so.
▶ Close the driver's door.
TREFIT kit
Using the TREFIT kit
TREFIT is a tire sealant.
You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to 0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tire tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside temperatures down to -4 °F (-20 °C).
WARNING
In the following situations, the tire sealant is unable to provide sufficient breakdown assistance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly:
- there are cuts or punctures in the tire larger than those mentioned above.
• the wheel rim is damaged.
- you have driven at very low tire pressures or on a flat tire.
There is a risk of an accident.
Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.
WARNING
The tire sealant is harmful and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do not inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant
away from children. There is a risk of injury. as you come into contact with the tire sealant, observe the following:
• Rinse off the tire sealant from your skin immediately with water.
• If the tire sealant comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water.
- If tire sealant is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting, and seek medical attention immediately.
- Immediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with tire sealant.
- If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately.
▶ Do not remove any foreign objects which have penetrated the tire, e.g. screws or nails.
▶ Take the TREFIT kit out of the trunk (▶ page 232).
▶ Unscrew the cap from tire sealant bottle ①. Make sure that the aluminum film is not damaged when doing so.
text_image
Labeled diagram of a device with numbered components including battery, gas cylinder, and power plug▶ Open the TIREFIT kit and remove "max. 80 km/h" sticker ⑧.
▶ Affix sticker ⑧ within the driver's field of vision.
If TIREFIT leaks out, allow it to dry. It then be removed like a layer of film. If you get TIREFIT on your clothing, have cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethylene.
Comply with the manufacturer's safety instructions on the tire inflation compressor label and on the tire sealant bottle.
i You will also find operating instructions ③ in the lid of the TREFIT kit.
▶ Pull the cable and filler hose ⑨ out of housing.
text_image
5 P40.10-5790-31▶ Unscrew flanged cap ⑤.
text_image
Medical device diagram showing a pressure monitor with labeled parts and a magnified view of the device's internal structure.▶ Screw tire sealant bottle ① clockwise tightly onto flange seal ⑩.
This pierces the aluminum film.
▶ Remove the cap from the valve on the faulty of tire.
▶ Make sure that pressure release screw ⑦ cars is closed.
▶ Remove the dust protection cap from filler ithose ⑨.
text_image
the 11 9 P40.10-5792-31▶ Screw the end of filler hose ⑨ onto tire valve ⑪.
▶ Make sure that on/off switch ② on the tire inflation compressor is set to 0.
▶ Insert connector ④ into the 12 V socket (▷ page 203).
▶ Select key position 2 with the Start/Stop button (▷ page 119).
The battery discharges during tire inflation compressor usage. For this
reason, you should start the engine unless you are inflating the tire in an enclosed space.
natural_image
Medical device setup with a magnified view of a device labeled '2' and a pressure gauge, showing no readable text or symbols.▶ Press on/off switch ② on the tire inflati compressor to I.
The tire inflation compressor is switched on. The tire is inflated.
i First, TREFIT is pumped into the tire. The
pressure can briefly rise to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).
Do not switch off the tire inflation compressor during this phase.
▶ Let the tire inflation compressor run for a maximum of ten minutes. The tire should then have attained a pressure of at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi).
Switch the tire inflation compressor off briefly to read the correct value from pressure gauge ⑥.
! Do not operate the tire inflation compressor for longer than ten minutes a time without a break. It may otherwise overheat.
The tire inflation compressor can be operated again once it has cooled down.
Tire pressure of at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) is not reached
If, after five minutes, a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has not been achieved:
Switch off the tire inflation compressor, remove it and drive the vehicle approximately 30 ft (10 m) forward or back. This distributes the TREFIT more evenly.
Leave tire sealant bottle ① attached to the flange.
▶ Pump up the tire again.
WARNING
If the required tire pressure is not reached after the specified time, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire pressure that is too low can significantly
impair the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.
Tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) is reached
WARNING
A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant impairs the driving characteristics and is not suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of accident.
You should therefore adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed the specified maximum speed with a tire that has been repaired using tire sealant.
If the tire pressure is at least 180 kPa at (1.8 bar/26 psi):
▶ Press on/off switch ② on the tire inflation compressor to 0. The tire inflation compressor is switched off.
▶ Remove connector ④ from the 12 V socket.
Remove filler hose ⑨ from tire valve ⑪ and re-install the dust protection cap. Screw the valve cap onto the valve again. Leave tire sealant bottle ① attached to flange ⑩.
▶ Stow the TREFIT kit in a safe and accessible place in the vehicle.
▶ Pull away immediately.
The maximum speed for a tire sealed with tire sealant is 50 mph (80 km/h). The upper part of the TIREFIT sticker must be affixed to the instrument cluster in the driver's field of vision.
! After use, excess TIREFIT may run out the filler hose. This could cause stains.
▶ Stop after driving for approximately ten minutes and check the tire pressure with the tire inflation compressor.
The tire pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).
On tires that are equipped with a tire pressure sensor (tire pressure monitor), the use of sealant can lead to malfunction messages and incorrect displays. Therefore, use pressure gauge ⑥ in the TIREFIT kit to check and correct the tire pressure.
WARNING
If the required tire pressure is not reached after driving for a short period, the tire is to badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and tire pressure that is too low can significantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident.
Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.
the TREFIT kit, particularly in the case of cuts and punctures with a diameter of more than four millimeters or on the sidewall. The manufacturer is not responsible for damage caused by inappropriate use of the TREFIT kit.
▶ Drive to the nearest workshop and have the tire changed there.
Have the tire sealant bottle replaced as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Environmental note
Have the used tire sealant bottle disposed of professionally, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Have the TREFIT kit replaced every four years at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Battery (vehicle)
Important safety notes
Special tools and expert knowledge are required when working on the battery, e.g. removal and installing. You should therefore have all work involving the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
▶ Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/20 psi) (for the values, see the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's side B-pillar or tire pressure table on the fuel filler flap).
To increase the tire pressure: switch on the tire inflation compressor.
To reduce the tire pressure: open release screw ⑦.
! The manufacturer does not guarantee that all tire damage can be repaired using
WARNING
Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can lead, for example, to a short circuit and thus damage the vehicle electronics. This could lead to function restrictions applying to safety-relevant systems, e.g. the lighting system, ABS (anti-lock braking system) or ESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The operating safety of your vehicle may be restricted. You could lose control of the vehicle, for example:
- braking
- in the event of abrupt steering maneuver and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions
There is a risk of an accident.
In the event of a short circuit or a similar incident, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Do not drive any further. You should have all work involving battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
WARNING
During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
- Make sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts.
- Never place metal objects or tools on a battery.
- It is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting and disconnecting a battery.
- When jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.
- It is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting the jumper cables.
- Never connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.
WARNING
Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation of sparks, which could ignite the highly explosive gases of a battery. There is a risk an explosion.
Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle body to remove any existing electrostatic build-up.
WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from
batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water and seek medical attention.
The highly flammable gas mixture forms when charging the battery as well as when jump-starting.
Always make sure that neither you nor the battery is electrostatically charged. A build-up of electrostatic charge can be caused, for example:
• by wearing clothing made from synthetic fibers
- due to friction between clothing and seats
- if you push or pull the battery across the carpet or other synthetic materials
- if you wipe the battery with a cloth
Environmental note
Batteries contain dangerous substances. It is against the law to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and recycled to protect the environment.
Dispose of batteries in an environmentally friendly manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or a
special collection point for used batteries.
! Have the battery checked regularly at a qualified specialist workshop.
Observe the service intervals in the Maintenance Booklet or contact a qualified specialist workshop for more information.
You should have all work involving the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. In the exceptional case that it is necessary for you to disconnect the battery yourself, make sure that:
- you switch off the engine and remove SmartKey. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, ensure that the ignition is switched off. Check that all the indicator lamps the instrument cluster are off. Otherwise electronic components, such as the alternator, may be damaged.
- you first remove the negative terminal clamp and then the positive terminal clamp. Never swap the terminal clamps Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic system may be damaged.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide increased impact protection to prevent vehicle occupants from suffering acid burns should the battery be damaged in the event of an accident. In order for the battery to achieve the
- the transmission is locked in position F after disconnecting the battery. The vehicle is secured against rolling away. You can then no longer move the vehicle. The battery and the cover of the positive terminal clamp must be installed securely during operation.
Pmaximum possible service life, it must always be sufficiently charged.
Comply with safety precautions and take protective measures when handling batteries.
The vehicle battery, like other batteries, can discharge over time if you do not use the vehicle. In this case, have the battery disconnected at a qualified specialist
Risk of explosion.
workshop. You can also charge the battery with a charger recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Contact a qualified specialist workshop for further information.
Fire, open flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks.
Have the battery condition of charge checked more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for short trips or if you leave it standing idle for a lengthy period. Consult a qualified
Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing
specialist workshop if you wish to leave your vehicle parked for a long period of time.
i Remove the SmartKey if you park the vehicle and do not require any electrical g. consumers. The vehicle will then use very
little energy, thus conserving battery power.
If the battery power supply has been interrupted, e.g. if the battery was fully discharged, you will need to reset the "exterior mirrors automatic folding function", by folding the mirrors out once (▷ page 91).
charger which has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. A battery charger unit specially adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is available as an accessory. It permits the charging of the battery in its installed position. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further information and availability. Charge the battery in accordance with the separate instructions for the accessory battery charger.
Read the battery charger's operating instructions before charging the battery.
Charging the battery
WARNING
During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is risk of an explosion.
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.
▶ Open the hood (▷ page 218).
▶aConnect the battery charger to the posit terminal and ground point in the same order as when connecting the donor nt battery in the jump-starting procedure (▷ page 240).
WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water and seek medical attention.
WARNING
A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.
! Only use battery chargers with a maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
! Only charge the battery using the jump-starting connection point.
The jump-starting connection point is in the engine compartment (▷ page 240).
Never charge the battery if it is still installed in the vehicle, unless you use a battery
Jump-starting
WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water and seek medical attention.
WARNING
During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.
WARNING
During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
- Make sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts.
- Never place metal objects or tools on a battery.
- It is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting and disconnecting a battery.
- When jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.
- It is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting the jumper cables.
- Never connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.
WARNING
A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.
Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could be damaged by the non-combusted fuel.
Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper cables. Observe the following points:
- The battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.
- You may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold.
- Do not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.
- Only jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating.
-
Only use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.
-
If the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.
• Make sure that the two vehicles do not touch.
Make sure that:
• the jumper cables are not damaged.
- when the jumper cables are connected to the battery, uninsulated sections of the terminal clamp do not come into contact with other metal sections.
- the jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts such as the V-belt pulley or the fat. These parts move when the engine is started and while it is running.
▶ Press the electric parking brake handle.
▶ Shift the transmission to P with the button in the center console.
▶ Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
▶ Switch off all electrical consumers (e.g. radio, blower, etc.).
▶ Open the hood (▷ page 218).
text_image
3 2 + - 6
text_image
4 1 + - + 5 PS400-3245-31Position number ⑥ identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump starting device.
▶ Slide cover ⑤ of positive terminal ① in the direction of the arrow.
Connect positive terminal ① on your vehicle to positive terminal ② of donor battery ⑥ using the jumper cable, beginning with your own battery.
▶ Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.
▶ Connect negative terminal ③ of donor battery ⑥ to earth point ④ of your vehicle using the jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to donor battery ⑥ first.
▶ Start the engine.
▶ Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.
▶ First, remove the jumper cables from earth point ④ and negative terminal ③, then from positive clamp ① and positive terminal ②. Each time beginning with your vehicle's battery.
▶ Slide cover ⑤ of the positive terminal in the opposite direction to the arrow.
▶ Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
i Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.
i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop.
Towing and tow-starting
Important safety notes
WARNING
The rear axle locks when:
• the engine is not running
- the engine stalls while the vehicle is being towed
- there is a malfunction in the power supply or the vehicle's electrical system
There is a risk of an accident.
In the event of a breakdown, you should always have the vehicle transported.
WARNING
If the brake system or power steering is malfunctioning and your vehicle is then towed away, significantly more effort may be required to steer and brake than is normally required. There is a risk of an accident.
In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing, make sure that the steering moves freely.
WARNING
If the weight of the vehicle to be towed or started is greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehicle:
• the towing eye could detach itself
- the vehicle/trailer combination could rollover.
There is a risk of an accident.
When towing or tow-starting another vehicle, its weight should not be greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehicle.
! Use the SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button when towing the vehicle.
Start the engine and keep it running. Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition.
Set the transmission to N using the E-SELECT lever. Make sure that you then leave the SmartKey in position 2.
Check the transmission position in the instrument cluster.
! Make sure that the electric parking brake is released. If the electric parking brake is faulty, visit a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for this purpose.
! When towing, pull away slowly and smoothly. If the tractive power is too high, the vehicles could be damaged.
! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at the towing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged.
! Do not use the towing eyes for recovery purposes as this could damage the vehicle. If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane.
tow-
! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of 30 miles (50km). The towing speed of 30 mph (50 km/h) must not be exceeded. If the vehicle has to be towed more than 30 miles (50km), the entire vehicle must be raised and transported.
! Do not tow with sling-type equipment. This could damage the vehicle.
! Tow-starting the vehicle is not permitted. The transmission may otherwise be damaged.
If the vehicle can no longer be driven because of an accident or breakdown, you have the following options:
- transporting the vehicle As a rule, you should have the vehicle transported.
- towing the vehicle with the rear axle raised
Only tow the vehicle with the rear axle raised in exceptional cases.
- towing the vehicle with a tow rope or tow bar
Only tow the vehicle in exceptional cases. The engine must be running if you tow the vehicle with a tow rope or tow bar. Observe the following notes.
Also observe the following notes:
- If the engine does not start, try jump-starting it (▷ page 240). Tow-starting the vehicle is not permitted.
- If it is not possible to jump-start the ve have it transported to the nearest qualifi specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
- If the vehicle has transmission damage, have it transported to a qualified specialist workshop. Observe the display messages in the instrument cluster.
Installing/removing the towing eye
Installing the towing eye
▶ Take the towing eye and the wheel wrench ^6 out of the wheel-change tool kit (▷ page 232).
The bracket for the removable towing eye is in the bumper at the front. It is located und the cover.
text_image
# 1 P88.20-3426-31▶ Pull out cover ① forwards.
▶ Take cover ① off the opening.
Removing the towing eye
Take the lug wrench from the wheel-change tool kit (▶ page 232).
▶ Insert the lug wrench handle into the towing eye and turn it counter-clockwise.
▶ Unscrew the towing eye.
▶ Attach cover ① to the bumper and pres until it engages.
▶ Return the towing eye and the lug wrench, to the wheel-change tool kit.
▶ Return the towing eye and the lug wrench to the trunk.
Towing the vehicle with the rear axle raised
When towing your vehicle with the rear axle raised, it is important that you observe the safety instructions (▷ page 242).
Only tow the vehicle with the rear axle raised in exceptional cases.
! The engine must be switched off (SmartKey in ignition lock in position 0 or position 1) if the vehicle is being towed with is the rear axle raised or if the parking brake nder is being tested on a dynamometer. Intervention by ESP could otherwise damage the brake system.
Fuses
▶ Switch on the hazard warning lamps (▷ page 98).
▶ Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition and that the engine is running throughout the towing procedure.
▶ Move the transmission to N with the E-SELECT lever. Check the transmission position in the instrument cluster.
axle or steering components. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged.
onStart the engine.
▶ Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition and that the engine is running during the entire loading operation.
▶ Move the transmission to N with the E-SELECT lever. Check the transmission position in the instrument cluster.
Towing a vehicle with both axles the ground
It is important that you observe the safety instructions when towing away your vehicle (▷ page 242).
▶ Switch on the hazard warning lamps (▷ page 98).
When towing with the hazard warning flashers switched on, use the combination switch as usual to signal in which direction you are changing. In this case, only the indicator lamps for the direction of travel flash. When you reset the combination switch, the hazard warning flashers start flashing again.
▶ Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock (▷ page 119).
▶ Start the engine and leave the SmartKey the ignition.
▶ Move the transmission to N with the E-SELECT lever.
▶ Check the transmission position in the instrument cluster display (▷ page 123).
▶ Leave the engine running throughout the entire towing procedure
Transporting the vehicle
The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicle circuits. If a fuse blows, all the onto a trailer or transporter for transporting components on the circuit and their functions purposes. stop operating.
You may only secure the vehicle by the wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognize by
As soon as the vehicle has been loaded:
▶ Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by applying the electric parking brake.
▶ Shift the transmission to P with the button in the center console.
▶ Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
▶ Secure the vehicle.
Fuses
Important safety notes
WARNING
If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if you replace it with a fuse with a higher amperage, the electric cables could be overloaded. This could result in a fire. There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Always replace faulty fuses with the specified new fuses having the correct amperage.
! Only use fuses that have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the correct fuse rating for the system concerned. Otherwise, components or systems could be damaged.
The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down fully circuits. If a fuse blows, all the components on the circuit and their functions stop operating.
Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognize by as
the color and value. The fuse ratings are in the fuse allocation chart.
If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
lied The floor panel must be installed properly, otherwise moisture or dirt could impair the the function of the fuses.
Fuse box in the rear
Coupe
Before changing a fuse
▶ Park the vehicle and apply the electric parking brake.
▶ Switch off all electrical consumers.
▶ Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:
- fuse box in the footwell on the front-passenger side
- fuse box in the rear
- fuse box in the footwell on the front-passenger side - fuse box in the rear
The "Relay and fuse information sheet" is located with the wheel-change toolkit in the trunk.
natural_image
Side view of a car's front bumper with a blue arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)▶ To open: open the trunk.
▶ Fold cover ① in the center of the rear wall e down in the direction of the arrow.
▶ To close: fold cover ① up in the opposite direction to the arrow and press to secure.
Fuse box in the footwell
text_image
1 P54.15-33/05-31▶ To open: remove the carpet over the footrest.
▶ Loosen screws ① on the floor panel using a suitable tool.
▶ Remove the floor panel.
▶ To close: install the floor panel again.
▶ Screw in and tighten screws ①.
▶ Put in the carpet and press to secure.
- To open: remove the carpet over the footrest. - Loosen screws ① on the floor panel using a suitable tool. - Remove the floor panel. - To close: install the floor panel again. - Screw in and tighten screws ①. - Put in the carpet and press to secure.
! The cover must be installed properly, otherwise moisture or dirt could impair the function of the fuses.
Roadster
natural_image
Interior view of a car showing a vehicle's rear compartment with directional arrows and a numbered label (1), no readable text or symbols beyond the label.▶ To open: from the vehicle interior, lift up cover ① between the roll bars in the direction of the arrow.
▶ To close: shut cover ① in the opposite direction to the arrow and press to secure.
- To open: from the vehicle interior, lift up cover ① between the roll bars in the direction of the arrow. - To close: shut cover ① in the opposite direction to the arrow and press to secure.
Fuses
! The cover must be installed properly, otherwise moisture or dirt could impair the function of the fuses.
Useful information 248
Important safety notes 248
Operation 248
Winter operation 250
Tire pressure 251
Loading the vehicle 258
All about wheels and tires 261
Changing a wheel 268
Wheel and tire combinations ..... 273
Useful information
This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.
i Please read the information on qualified specialist workshops (▷ page 22).
Important safety notes
WARNING
If wheels and tires of the wrong size are used, the wheel brakes or suspension components may be damaged. There is a risk of an accident.
Always replace wheels and tires with those that fulfill the specifications of the original part.
When replacing wheels, make sure to use the correct:
- designation
- model
When replacing tires, make sure to use the correct:
- designation
- manufacturer
- model
Warning
A flat tire severely impairs the driving, steering and braking characteristics of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. do not drive with a flat tire. Immediately replace the flat tire with your spare wheel, or consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Accessories that are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or that are not being used correctly can impair the operating safety.
Before purchasing and using non-approved accessories, visit a qualified specialist
eworkshop and inquire about:
- suitability
- legal stipulations
•factory recommendations
Information on dimensions and types of wheels and tires for your vehicle can be found (▷ page 273).
Information on air pressure for the tires on your vehicle can be found:
• on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar
- on the tire pressure label on the fuel filler flap
sedunder "Tire pressure"
i Further information on wheels and tires can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop.
Operation
Information on driving
- If the vehicle is heavily loaded, check the tire pressures and correct them if necessary.
- While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that the wheels or tires are damaged. If you suspect that a tire is defective, reduce your speed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible to check the wheels and tires for damage. Hidden tire damage could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics. If you find no signs of damage, have the wheels and tires checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
- When parking your vehicle, make sure that the tires do not get deformed by the curb or other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive
over curbs, speed humps or similar elevations, try to do so slowly and obtuse angle. Otherwise, the tires, particularly the sidewalls, may be damaged.
Notes on high performance tires
WARNING
Due to the special tire tread in combination with the optimized rubber compound, there is an increased risk of hydroplaning and skidding on a damp or wet road surface. Tire grip is also noticeably reduced at low outside temperatures and low tire operating temperatures. There is a risk of an accident
Turn on ESP and adapt your driving style accordingly. When the outside temperature falls below 10 °C, use M+S tires.
Different driving styles may lead to high tire wear and the tires may reach the minimum tire tread depth after only a short time.
- bulges on tires
- deformation or severe corrosion on wheels
Regularly check the tire tread depth and the condition of the tread across the whole width of the tire (▷ page 249). If necessary, turn the front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the inner side of the tire surface.
All wheels must have a valve cap to protect the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not mount anything onto the valve other than the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. Do not use any other valve caps or systems, e.g. tire pressure monitoring systems.
Regularly check the pressure of all the tires particularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire pressure as necessary (▷ page 251).
The service life of tires depends on the following factors amongst other things:
- driving style
- tire pressure
• distance covered
Tire tread
Regular checking of wheels and tires
WARNING
Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident.
Check the tires regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tires immediately.
Regularly check the wheels and tires of you vehicle for damage at least once a month, well as after driving off-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of tire pressure. Pay particular attention to damage such as:
• cuts in the tires
- punctures
- tears in the tires
WARNING
Insufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction. The tire is no longer able to dissipate water. This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk of hydroplaning increases, in particular where speed is not adapted to suit the driving conditions. There is a risk of accident.
If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires may exhibit different levels of wear at different locations on the tire tread. Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tires.
Minimum tire tread depth for:
• Summer tires: 18 in (3 mm)
• M+S tires: 16 in (4 mm)
For safety reasons, replace the tires before the legally prescribed limit for the minimum tire tread depth is reached.
text_image
① TWI P40,10-5338-31Driving with summer tires
At temperatures below 45 °F (+7 °C), summer tires experience a considerable loss in elasticity and therefore traction and braking power. Change the tires on your vehicle to M+S tires. Using summer tires at very cold temperatures could cause cracks to form, thereby damaging the tires permanently. Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility for this type of damage.
Bar indicator ① for tread wear is integrated into the tire tread.
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by law. Six indicators are positioned on the tire tread. They are visible once the tread depth is approximately 116 in (1.6 mm). If this is case, the tire is so worn that it must be replaced.
M+S tires
WARNING
M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than the in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter and do not provide sufficient traction. There is a risk of an accident.
M+S tires with a tread depth of less than 16 in (4 mm) must be replaced immediately.
Selecting, mounting and replacing tires
- Only mount tires and wheels of the same type and make.
- Only mount tires of the correct size onto the wheels.
- Break in new tires at moderate speeds f the first 60 miles (100 km). They only r their full performance after this distance.
- Do not drive with tires which have too I tread depth, as this significantly reduces the traction on wet roads (hydroplaning).
- Replace the tires after six years at the latest, regardless of wear.
Winter operation
General notes
At temperatures below 45 °F (+7 °C), use winter tires or all-season tires. Both types of tire are identified by the M+S marking.
Only winter tires bearing the snowflake symbol in addition to the M+S marking provide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions. Only these tires will allow driving safety systems such as ABS and E\$0
function optimally in winter. This is because these tires were specifically developed for driving in snow.
Use M+S tires of the same make and tread on all wheels to maintain safe handling characteristics.
Always observe the maximum permissible speed specified for the M+S tires you have mounted.
When you have mounted the M+S tires:
Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified specialist workshop at the onset of winter. ▶Check the tire pressures (▷ page 251). Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel" (▷ page 257). section (▷ page 268).
Snow chains
WARNING
If snow chains are installed to the front wheels, they may drag against the vehicle body or chassis components. This could cause damage to the vehicle or the tires. There is a risk of an accident.
To avoid hazardous situations:
- never install snow chains to the front wheels
- always install snow chains in pairs to the rear wheels.
! On some tire sizes there is not enough space for snow chains. To avoid damage to the vehicle or tires, observe the "Wheel and tire combinations" section under "Tires and wheels".
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use snow chains that have been specially approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or are of a corresponding standard of quality.
- You may not attach snow chains to all wheel-tire combination, see the information under "Wheels and tires" in "Technical data" section.
- Only use snow chains when driving on roads completely covered by snow. Remove the snow chains as soon as possible when you come to a road that not snow-covered.
- Local regulations may restrict the use of snow chains. Observe the appropriate regulations if you wish to mount snow chains.
- Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 30 mph (50 km/h).
You can deactivate ESP(>page 55) when pulling away with snow chains installed. You can thereby allow the wheel to spin in a controlled manner, achieving increased driving force (cutting action).
Tire pressure
Tire pressure specifications
Important safety notes
WARNING
Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the following risks:
- the tires may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.
- the tires may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction.
- the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures and check the pressure of all the tires including the spare wheel:
• monthly, at least
- if the load changes
• before beginning a long journey
• under different operating conditions, e.g. off-road driving
If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
i The specifications on the sample Tire and Loading Information placard and tire pressure tables are examples. Tire is pressure specifications are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data shown here. The tire pressure specifications that are valid for your vehicle can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard and tire pressure table on the vehicle.
General notes
The recommended tire pressures for the tires mounted at the factory can be found on the labels described here.
Farther information on tire pressures can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.
Tire and Loading Information placard
text_image
1 TIRE RENOADING INFORMATION RENSIGNEMENTS SUR LES PNEUS ET LE CHARGEMENT SEATNO CAPACITY 10 ML 7 FRONT 2 MIDDLE 3 REAR 2 NOMBRE DE PLACES AVANT AVANT MILEU AREARRIÈRE The combined weight of occupants and c Le poils total des occupants et du charges ago should never exceed dont ne dont jamais dépasser 000 kg or 000 lbs. PNEU SIZE COLD TIRE PRESSURE DIMENSIONS PRESSION DES PNEUS À FROID SEE OWNER'S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL RINFORMATION AVANT AVANT VOIR LE MANUEL REARRÈRE 286/40 ZR1B 99Y XL 209 KPA, 29 PSI DE L'USAGER 286/35 ZR1B 101Y XL 209 KPA, 29 PSI DE L'USAGER SPARE 171/55-18 95P 429 KPA, 60 PSI DE L'USAGER DE SECOURSP40.00-2205-31
① Recommended tire pressures
The Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side (▷ page 258).
The Tire and Loading Information placard contains the recommended tire pressures for cold tires. The recommended tire pressures are valid for the maximum permissible load and up to the maximum permissible vehicle speed.
Tire pressure table
The tire pressure table is on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
text_image
COLD TIRE PRESSURE normal load 340 psi 380 psi maximum load 310 psi 412 psi Warm tires up to: + 4 psi A 212 504 00 15 134067P40.00-2179-31
Example: tire pressure table for all tires permitted to the higher values:
for this vehicle by the factory
The tire pressure table contains the recommended pressures for cold tires for various operating conditions, i.e. differing load and speed conditions.
text_image
LUFTDRUCK PRESSURE PRESSION PRESIÓN für kalte Reifen for cold tires des pneus froids de Inflado 100 kPa = 1 bar 195/55 R16 215/45 R17 215/40 R18 A 169 584 50 17 Warme Reifen: Warm tires up to: +30 kWh +4 psi Pneus échauffes jusqu'à: Neuméticos calientes hasta:P40.00-2183-31
Example: tire pressure table with tire dimensions If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the tire pressure information following is only valid for that tire size. The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the table for different numbers of occupants and amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may differ.
text_image
Lufdruck für kate Refes The pressure cold lines Pression des pneus froid Presidio deinflado 100 kPa = 1 bar R18 R19 A 212 584 02 17 bis ap to: jogub Fasta Vorme Reifen bis: Vorm wire up to: Winter holes Winter lines: Press liver Neumalices de inverno: Press dureffes jogub Neumalices calientes hasta: +30 kPa +4 psi +30 kPa +4 psiP40.00-2184-31
Some tire pressure tables show only the rim diameters instead of the full tire size, e.g.
R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire size and can be found on the tire sidewall (▷ page 262).
If the tire pressures have been set to the lower values for lighter loads and/or lower road speeds, the pressures should be reset to the higher values:
- if you want to drive with an increased load and/or
- if you want to drive at higher road speeds
i The tire pressures for increased loads and/or higher road speeds, shown in the tire pressure table, may have a negative effect on driving comfort.
If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this the tires are cold:
can lead to an excessive build up of heat a sudden loss of pressure.
For more information, contact a qualified specialist workshop.
Important notes on tire pressure
WARNING
If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire pressure that is too low may result in a tire blow-out. There is a risk of an accident.
- Check the tire for foreign objects.
- Check whether the wheel is losing air or valve is leaking.
If you are unable to rectify the damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop.
WARNING
If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire valves, the tire valves may be overloaded a malfunction, which can cause tire pressure loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pressure monitors keep the tire valve open. This can also result in tire pressure loss. T is a risk of an accident.
Only screw the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle onto the tire valve.
and the vehicle has been parked without direct sunlight on the tires for at least three hours and
- if the vehicle has not been driven further than 1 mile (1.6 km)
The tire temperature changes depending on the outside temperature, the vehicle speed and the tire load. If the tire temperature changes by 18 °F (10 °C), the tire pressure changes by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take this into account when checking the pressure of warm tires. Only correct the tire pressure if it is too low for the current operating conditions. If you check the tire pressure when the tires are warm, the resulting value will be higher than if the tires were cold. This is normal. Do not reduce the tire pressure to the value specified for cold tires. The tire pressure would otherwise be too low.
Observe the recommended tire pressures for cold tires:
- on the Tire and Loading Information placed on the B-pillar on the driver's side - in the tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap
Underinflated or overinflated tires
Underinflated tires
Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tire pressure. On vehicles equipped with the electronic tire pressure monitor, the tire pressure can be checked in the on-board computer.
The tire temperature and pressure increase when the vehicle is in motion. This is dependent on the driving speed and the lo Therefore, you should only correct tire pressures when the tires are cold.
WARNING
tires with pressure that is too low can overheat and burst as a consequence. In addition, they also suffer from excessive and/ or irregular wear, which can severely impair the braking properties and the driving characteristics. There is a risk of an accident. Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all the d tires, including the spare wheel.
Underinflated tires may:
• overheat, leading to tire defects
• adversely affect handling
- wear excessively and/or unevenly
• have an adverse effect on fuel consumption
Overinflated tires
WARNING
Tires with excessively high pressure can burst because they are damaged more easily by road debris, potholes etc. In addition, they also suffer from irregular wear, which can severely impair the braking properties and the driving characteristics. There is a risk of an accident.
Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all tires, including the spare wheel.
Checking the tire pressures
Important safety notes
Observe the notes on tire pressure (▷ page 251).
Information on air pressure for the tires on your vehicle can be found:
- on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar ( page 258)
- on the tire pressure label on the fuel filler flap (▷ page 129)
thin the "Tire pressure" section (▷ page 251).
Overinflated tires may:
- increase the braking distance
• adversely affect handling - wear excessively and/or unevenly
• have an adverse effect on ride comfort - be more susceptible to damage
Maximum tire pressures
text_image
MAX. PERMISS. INFLAT. PRESS. 420 KPA ( 60 PSI ) P10.10-5344-31① Example: maximum permissible tire pressure
Never exceed the maximum permissible tire inflation pressure. Always observe the recommended tire pressure for your vehicle when adjusting the tire pressure (▷ page 251).
i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values the illustration.
Checking tire pressures manually
To determine and set the correct tire pressure, proceed as follows:
▶ Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to be checked.
▶ Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto the valve.
▶ Read the tire pressure and compare it with the recommended value on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side of your vehicle.
▶ If necessary, increase the tire pressure to the recommended value (▷ page 251).
▶ If the tire pressure is too high, release air by pressing down the metal pin in the valve using the tip of a pen, for example. Then check the tire pressure again using the tire pressure checker.
▶ Screw the valve cap onto the valve.
▶ Repeat these steps for the other tires.
Tire pressure monitor
General notes
If a tire pressure monitor is installed, the vehicle's wheels have sensors that monitor the tire pressures in all four tires. The tire pressure monitor warns you if the pressure
drops in one or more of the tires. The tire underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency pressure monitor only functions if the correct and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's sensors are installed on all wheels.
Information on tire pressures is displayed in the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire the multifunction display. After a few minutes maintenance, and it is the driver's of driving, the current tire pressure of each responsibility to maintain correct tire tire is shown in the Service menu of the multifunction display.
text_image
29 29 31 31 [ psi ] P5 1.33-26/26-31Example
For information on the message display, refer to the "Checking the tire pressure electronically" section ( page 256).
Important safety notes
WARNING
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked at least once every two weeks when cold and inflated to the pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pressure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has tires of a different than the size indicated on the Tire and Load Information placard or, if available, the tire pressure label, you should determine the proper tire pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires are significantly underinflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale lights up, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the warning lamp will flash for approximately a minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will be repeated every time the vehicle is started as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of incompatible replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate Tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire pressure to that recommended for cold tires which is suitable for the operating situation ( page 251). Note that the correct tire pressure for the current operating situation must first be taught-in to the tire pressure monitor. If there is a substantial loss of pressure, the warning threshold for the warning message is aligned to the reference values taught-in. Restart the tire pressure monitor after adjusting the pressure of the cold tires ( page 257). The current pressures are saved as new reference values.
As a result, a warning message will appear higher than those shown by the on-board the tire pressure drops significantly. computer. In this case, do not reduce the tire pressures. The tire pressure monitor does not warn you
of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe The operation of the tire pressure monitor can the notes on the recommended tire pressure be affected by interference from radio (▷ page 251). transmitting equipment (e.g. radio
The tire pressure monitor is not able to wake (headphones, two-way radios) that may be you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the being operated in or near the vehicle.
tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the
event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring to checking the tire pressure vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoidelectronically
abrupt steering maneuvers.
The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warning lamp in the instrument cluster for indicating a pressure loss or malfunction.
Whether the warning lamp flashes or lights indicates whether a tire pressure is too low the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning:
- if the warning lamp is lit continuously, tire pressure on one or more tires is significantly too low. The tire pressure monitor is not malfunctioning.
- if the warning lamp flashes for around minute and then remains lit constantly, tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.
In addition to the warning lamp, a message appears in the multifunction display.
Further information can be found on (▷ page 182).
▶ Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock (▷ page 119).
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Serv . menu.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Tire Pressure.
▶ Press the OK button.
The current tire pressure of each tire is shown in the multifunction display.
If the vehicle has been parked for over 20 minutes, the Tire pressure will be displayed after driving a few minutesminutes message appears.
After a teach-in process, the tire pressure monitor automatically detects new wheels or new sensors. As long as a clear allocation of the tire pressure value to the individual wheels is not possible, the Tire Pressure Monitor Active display message is shown
If the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning instead of the tire pressure display. The tire it may take more than ten minutes for the pressures are already being monitored.
pressure warning lamp to inform you of the malfunction by flashing for approximately one minute and then remaining lit. When the malfunction has been rectified, the tire pressure warning lamp goes out after a few minutes of driving.
The tire pressure values indicated by the on-board computer may differ from those measured at a gas station with a pressure gauge. The tire pressures shown by the on-board computer refer to those measured at sea level. At high altitudes, the tire pressure values indicated by a pressure gauge are
If an emergency spare wheel is mounted, the system may continue to show the tire pressure of the wheel that has been removed for a few minutes. If this occurs, note that the value displayed for the position where the spare wheel is mounted is not the same as the current tire pressure of the emergency spare wheel.
Tire pressure monitor warning messages
If the tire pressure monitor detects a pressure loss in one or more tires, a warning message is shown in the multifunction display and the yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp comes on.
- If the Correct Tire Pressure message appears in the multifunction display, the tire pressure in at least one tire is too and must be corrected at the next opportunity.
- If the Check Tire Pressure message appears in the multifunction display, the tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly and the tires must checked.
- If the Tire Pressure Warning Tire MalfunctionMalfunction message appears multifunction display, the tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly and the tires must be checked.
Observe the instructions and safety notes in the display messages in the "Tires" section ▶ (▶ page 182).
If the wheel positions on the vehicle are rotated, the tire pressures may be displayed for the wrong positions for a short time. This is rectified after a few minutes of driving, and the tire pressures are displayed for the correct positions.
Restarting the tire pressure monitor
When you restart the tire pressure monitor, all existing warning messages are deleted and the warning lamps go out. The monitor uses the currently set tire pressures as the reference values for monitoring. In most cases, the tire pressure monitor will automatically detect the new reference values after you have changed the tire pressure. However, you can also define reference values manually as described here. The tire pressure monitor then monitors the new tire pressure values.
▶ Set the tire pressure to the value recommended for the corresponding driving situation on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's side B-pillar (▶ page 251).
Additional tire pressure values for different loads can also be found on the tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap (▷ page 251).
▶ Make sure that the tire pressure is correct on all four wheels.
▶ Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock.
▶ Press the ◀ or ▶ button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu.
be Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Tire Pressure.
▶ Press the OK button.
The multifunction display shows the current tire pressure for the individual or the Tire pressure will be displayed after driving a few minutes minutes message.
Press the ▼ button.
The Use Current Pressures as New Reference Values message appears in the multifunction display.
If you wish to confirm the restart:
▶ Press the OK button.
The Tire Press. Monitor Restarted message appears in the multifunction display.
After driving for a few minutes, the system checks whether the current tire pressures are within the specified range. The new tire pressures are then accepted as reference values and monitored.
If you wish to cancel the restart:
▶ Press the ← button.
The tire pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored.
Loading the vehicle
Instruction labels for tires and loads
WARNING
Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair the steering and driving characteristics and lead to brake failure. There is a risk of accident.
Observe the load rating of the tires. The load rating must be at least half of the GAWR of your vehicle. Never overload the tires by (exceeding the maximum load.
natural_image
Interior view of a car showing the side panel, rear seats, and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)① B-pillar, driver's side
Two instruction labels on your vehicle show the maximum possible load.
(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The Tire and Loading Information placard shows the maximum permissible number of occupants and the maximum permissible vehicle load. It also contains details of the tire sizes and corresponding pressures for tires mounted at the factory.
(2) The vehicle identification plate is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle identification plate informs you of the gross vehicle weight rating. It is made up of the vehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, the fuel and the cargo. You can also find information about the maximum gross axle weight rating on the front and rear axle.
The maximum gross axle weight rating the maximum weight that can be carried by one axle (front or rear axle). Never exceed the maximum load or the maximum gross axle weight rating for front or rear axle.
Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating
text_image
TIRE RENSEIGNEMENTS SEATING CAPACITY NOMBRE DE SÉGES TOP 7 FRONT AVANT 2 MIDOLE MILEU 3 REAR ARRÊRE 2 The combined weight of occupants and car should never exceed XXXX kg or XXXX lbs.* Le poids total des occupants et des marchandies ne dit jamais dépasser XXXX kg ou XXXX lb. TIRE PHRU SIZE TAILLE COLD TIRE PRESSURE PRESSION DES PNEUS À FORD SEE OWNERS MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS FRONT AVANT 215/40 ZR18 9PY3L 201 KPA, 21 PSI REAR ARRÊRE 28L/35 ZR18 10YYXL 201 KPA, 21 PSI SPARE DE RECHANGE 175/55-189SP 429 KPA, 60 PSIP40.00-2131-31
▶ Specification for maximum gross vehicle upweight ① is listed in the Tire and Loading Information placard: "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs."
The gross weight of all vehicle occupants, cargo, luggage and trailer load/noseweight (if applicable) must not exceed the specified value.
i The specifications shown on the Tire and the Loading Information placard in the illustration are examples. The maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating is vehicle-specific and may differ from that in the illustration. You can find the valid maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating for your vehicle on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
Number of seats
text_image
TIRE A CHADING INFORMATION RENSEIGNEMENTS FOR LES PNEUS ET LE CHARGEMENT SEATING CAPACITY TOP 7 FRONT 2 MIDDLE 3 REAR 2 NOMBRE DE SEGES AVANT AVANT MULU ARADE The combined weight of occupants and cargas should never exceed XXXX kg or XXXX lbs. 1 Le pays total des occupants et des merchandises ne doit jamais déposer XXXX kg ou XXXX lb. TIME SIZE COLD TIME PRESELLER PNEU TALLE PRESSION DES AVANT PNEUS A FROD FRONT 255/40 25H 99YXL 200 KPB, 29 PSI REAR 280/35 2H 101YXL 200 KPB, 29 PSI AFRIÈRE SPWRE DE RECHANGE I75/55-18/9SP 420 KPB, 60 PSI SEE OWNERS MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS i P40.00-2132-31Maximum number of seats ① indicates the maximum number of occupants allowed to travel in the vehicle. This information can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
i The specifications shown on the Tire and Loading Information placard in the illustration are examples. The number of seats is vehicle-specific and can differ from the details shown. The number of seats in your vehicle can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
Determining the correct load limit
Step-by-step instructions
The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966".
▶ Step 1: Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard.
▶ Step 2: Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
▶ Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.
▶ Step 4: The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1 400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
▶ Step 5: Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.
Example: steps 1 to 3
The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use a load limit of 1 500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard (▷ page 259).
The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load.
Step 1
| Example 1 Example 2 | |
| Combined maximum weight of occupants and cargo (data from the Tire and Loading Information placard) | 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) |
Step 2
| Example 1 Example 2 | ||
| Number of people in the vehicle(driver and occupants) | 2 | |
| Weight of the occupants | Occupant 1: 175 lbs(80 kg) | Occupant 1: 175 lbs(80 kg)Occupant 2: 195 lbs(88 kg) |
| Gross weight of all occupants | 175 lbs (80 kg) 370 lbs | (168 kg) |
Step 3
| Example 1 Example 2 | ||
| Permissible load (maximum gross vehicle weight rating from the Tire and Loading Information placard minus the gross weight of all occupants) | 1500 lbs (680 kg) | 1500 lbs (680 kg) |
| 175 lbs (80 kg) = 325 lbs (600 kg) | -370 lbs (168 kg) = 1130 lbs (512 kg) | |
Vehicle identification plate
the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle (▷ page 258).
Even if you have calculated the total cargo carefully, you should still make sure that the gross vehicle weight rating and the gross axle weight rating are not exceeded. Details can be found on the vehicle identification plate on Gross vehicle weight: the gross weight of the vehicle, all passengers, cargo and trailer load/noseweight (if applicable) must not exceed the permissible gross vehicle weight.
Gross axle weight rating: the maximum Example:
permissible weight that can be carried by on axle (front or rear axle).
To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed
the maximum permissible values (gross vehicle weight and maximum gross axle weight rating), have your loaded vehicle (including driver, occupants, cargo, and full trailer load if applicable) weighed on a suitable vehicle weighbridge.
•Treadwear grade: 200
• Traction grade: AA
• Temperature grade: A
All passenger car tires must conform to the statutory safety requirements in addition to these grades.
i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values in the illustration.
All about wheels and tires
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
Overview of Tire Quality Grading Standards
text_image
TREADWEAR 240 TRACTION B TEMPERATURE A ① ② ③ P40.10-5345-31Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are U.S. government specifications. Their purpose is to provide drivers with uniform reliable information on tire performance data tire manufacturers have to grade tires using three performance factors: tread wear ①, tire traction ② and heat resistance ③. All tires sold in North America are provided with the corresponding quality class mark on the sidewall of the tire, even though these regulations do not apply to Canada.
Quality grades can be found, where applicable, on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum tire width.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified U.S. government course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate conditions.
Traction
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage to the drive train.
The traction grades – from highest to lowest – are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered road is always lower than on dry road surfaces.
You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around freezing point.
Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum tread depth of 16 in (4 mm) on all four winter tires. Observe the legally required minimum tire tread depth ( page 249). Winter tires can reduce the braking distance on snow-covered surfaces in comparison with summer tires. The braking distance is still much further than on surfaces that are not icy or covered with snow. Take appropriate care when driving. Further information on winter tires (M+S tires) ( page 250).
Temperature
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause excessive heat build-up and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A (the highest),
B, and C. They represent the tire's resistant
to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Tire labeling
Overview
The following markings are on the tire in addition to the tire name (sales designation) and the manufacturer's name:
text_image
INTER can d man ch 1 2 3 DOT HW AT AMOW MANUFACTURER 4 5 6 7 8 9 TIME NAME 225/55 8.15 15 M P40.10-5339-31① Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standard (▷ page 266)
② DOT, Tire Identification Number (▷ page 265)
③ Maximum tire load (▷ page 265)
④ Maximum tire pressure (▷ page 254)
⑤ Manufacturer
© Tire material (▷ page 266)
⑦ Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity and speed rating (>page 262)
⑧ Load index (▷ page 265)
⑨ Tire name
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example.
Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity and speed rating
WARNING
Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capacity and the approved maximum speed could lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. There is a risk of accident.
Therefore, only use tire types and sizes approved for your vehicle model. Observe tire load rating and speed rating required your vehicle.
text_image
225 / 55 R 16 95 H ① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ P40.10-5340-31① Tire width
② Nominal aspect ratio in %
③ Tire code
④ Rim diameter
⑤ Load bearing index
⑥ Speed rating
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example.
General: depending on the manufacturer's standards, the size imprinted in the tire w may not contain any letters or may contai one letter that precedes the size description. If there is no letter preceding the size description (as shown above): these are passenger vehicle tires according to European manufacturing standards.
If "P" precedes the size description: these passenger vehicle tires according to U.S. manufacturing standards.
If "LT" precedes the size description: these are light truck tires according to U.S. manufacturing standards.
If "T" precedes the size description: these compact emergency spare wheels at high pressure, to be used only temporarily in a emergency.
Tire width: tire width ① shows the nominal tire width in millimeters.
Aspect ratio: aspect ratio ② is the size ratio between the tire height and tire width and is shown in percent. The aspect ratio is calculated by dividing the tire width by the tire height.
Tire code: tire code ③ specifies the tire type. "R" represents radial tires; "D" represents diagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial tires.
Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in the size description depending on the manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).
Rim diameter: rim diameter ④ is the diameter of the bead seat, not the diameter of the rim flange. The rim diameter is specified in inches (in).
Load-bearing index: load-bearing index is a numerical code that specifies the maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit. The maximum permissible load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side ( page 258).
Example:
load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximum load of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires can bear. For further information on the maximum tire load in kilograms and lbs, see (▷ page 265).
For further information on the load bearing index, see "Load index" (▷ page 265).
Speed rating: speed rating ⑥ specifies the approved maximum speed of the tire.
Regardless of the speed rating, always observe the speed limits. Drive carefully and adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions.
| Summer tires | |
| Index | Speed rating |
| Q up to | 100 mph (160 km/h) |
| R up to | 106 mph (170 km/h) |
| S up to | 112 mph (180 km/h) |
| T up to | 118 mph (190 km/h) |
| H up to | 130 mph (210 km/h) |
| V up to | 149 mph (240 km/h) |
| W up to | 168 mph (270 km/h) |
| Y up to | 186 mph (300 km/h) |
| ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h) | |
| ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph(300 km/h) | |
| ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h) | |
- Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in the size description depending on the manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18). The service specification is made up of load-bearing index ⑤ and speed rating ⑥.
- If the size description of your tire includes "ZR" and there are no service specifications, ask the tire manufacturer in order to find out the maximum speed. If a service specification is available, the maximum speed is limited according to the speed rating in the service specification. Example: 245/40 ZR 18 97 Y. In this example, "97 Y" is the service specification. The letter "Y" represents the speed index and the maximum speed of the tire is limited to 186 mph (300 km/h).
- The size description for all tires with maximum speeds of over 186 mph (300 km/h) must include "ZR" and the service specification must be given in brackets. Example:
7 Or M+S for winter tires.
275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). The speed index "(Y)" indicates that the maximum speed of the tire is over 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask the tire manufacturer about the maximum speed.
| All-weather tires and winter tires | |
| Index Speed rating | |
| Q M+S | up to 100 mph (160 km/h) |
| T M+S | up to 118 mph (190 km/h) |
| H M+S | up to 130 mph (210 km/h) |
| V M+S | Up to 149 mph (240 km/h) |
i Not all tires with the M+S marking provide the driving characteristics of winter tires. In addition to the M+S marking, winter tires also have the snowflake symbol on the tire wall. Tires with this marking fulfill the requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) regarding snow traction, and were specially developed for driving on snow.
The speed rating of tires mounted at the factory may be higher than the maximum speed that the electronic speed limiter permits.
Make sure that your tires have the required in speed rating for your vehicle as specified in the "Tires" section (▷ page 273), e.g. if you buy new tires.
Further information about reading tire data can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop.
Load index
text_image
225/55 R 16 95 H P40.10-5341-31i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example.
In addition to the load-bearing index, load index ① may be imprinted after the letters that identify speed rating ⑥(▷ page 262) on the sidewall of the tire.
- If no specification is given: no text (as in example above), represents a standard load (SL) tire
- XL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced tire
• Light Load: represents a light load tire
• C, D, E: represents a load range that depends on the maximum load that the can carry at a certain pressure
Maximum load rating
text_image
MAX. LOADRATING 710 KG ( 1565 LBS ) M P40.10-5343-31Maximum tire load ① is the maximum permissible weight for which the tire is approved.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit. The maximum
permissible load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side (▷ page 258).
The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values in the illustration.
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
U.S. tire regulations stipulate that every tire manufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN in or on the sidewall of each tire produced.
text_image
1 DOT HW A7 3 4 AMCW 5 1600 P40.10-5342-31The TIN is a unique identification number. The TIN enables tire manufacturers to inform purchasers of recalls and other safety-relevant matters. It makes it possible for the purchaser to easily identify the affected tires. The TIN is made up of manufacturer identification code ②, tire size ③, tire type code ④ and manufacturing date ⑤.
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example.
DOT (Department of Transportation): tire symbol ① marks that the tire complies with the requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation.
Manufacturer identification code: manufacturer identification code ② provides details on the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code with two symbols.
Tire size: identifier ③ describes the tire size.
Tire type code: tire type code ④ can be dosed(Department of Transportation) by the manufacturer as a code to describe DOT-marked tires fulfill the requirements of specific characteristics of the tire. the U S Department of Transportation.
Date of manufacture: date of manufacture.
⑤ provides information about the age of a tire. The first and second positions represent the week of manufacture, starting with "01" designed to seat, multiplied by 68 kilograms for the first calendar week. Positions three (150 lbs).
and four represent the year of manufacture. Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards For example, a tire that is marked with "3208" was manufactured in week 32 in 2008. A uniform standard to grade the quality of tires with regards to tread quality, tire traction
Tire characteristics
text_image
SIDEWALL : 2 PUES POLYESTER 5 PUES UNDER TREAD : 2 PUES POLYESTER + 2 PUES STEEL + TPLY NYLON P40.10-5346-31i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example.
This information describes the tire cord and situations can be found on the tire inflation the number of layers in sidewall ① and under pressure label on the inside of the fuel filler tire tread ②. flap.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards 208"
A uniform standard to grade the quality of tires with regards to tread quality, tire traction and temperature characteristics. The quality grading assessment is made by the manufacturer following specifications from the U.S. government. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire.
Recommended tire pressures
The recommended tire pressure for your vehicle under normal driving conditions. You will find the recommendation on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side of your vehicle. The recommended tire pressure provides the best balance between handling characteristics, ride comfort and wear. Supplemental information pertaining to special driving situations can be found on the tire inflation under pressure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
Definition of terms for tires and loading equipment Increased vehicle weight due to optional equipment
Tire ply composition and material used The combined weight of all standard and Describes the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire regardless of whether it is actually installed tread and sidewall. These are made of steel, on the vehicle or not.
nylon, polyester and other materials.
Bar
Metric unit for tire pressure. There are 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) to 1 bar; there are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to
Rim
This is the part of the wheel on which the tire is mounted.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible axle weight. The actual load on an axle must never exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross axle weight rating can be found on the
vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar or Curb weight
the driver's side.
Speed rating
The speed rating is part of the tire identification. It specifies the speed range which the tire is approved.
The weight of a vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the air-conditioning system and optional equipment for these are installed in the vehicle, but does not include passengers or luggage.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
The gross vehicle weight includes the weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spool wheel, accessories installed, occupants, luggage and the drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The gross vehicle weight must exceed the gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) as specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side.
Maximum load rating
The maximum load rating in kilograms or pounds is the maximum weight for which a tire is approved.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
The GVWR is the maximum permitted gross weight of the fully loaded vehicle (weight of the vehicle including all accessories, occupants, fuel, luggage and the drawbar noseweight if applicable). The gross vehicle weight rating is specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side.
nMaximum permissible tire pressure
Maximum permissible tire pressure for one tire.
Maximum load on one tire
Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated by dividing the maximum axle load of one axle by two.
PSI (pounds per square inch)
A standard unit of measure for tire pressure
Aspect ratio
Relationship between tire height and tire width in percent.
pue
Wheels
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
The maximum weight is the sum of the c weight of the vehicle, the weight of the accessories, the total load limit and the weight of the optional equipment installed the factory.
tire pressure
This is pressure inside the tire applying an outward force to each square inch of the tire's surface. The tire pressure is specified in pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal (kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should only be corrected when the tires are cold. For this, the vehicle must have been stationary for at least three hours or not have traveled more than 1.6 km (1 mile) in this time.
Kilopascal (kPa)
Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa is the equivalent of 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure is bar. There are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to 1 bar.
Tire pressure of cold tires
The tires are cold:
Load index
In addition to the load-bearing index, the load index may also be imprinted on the sidewall of the tire. This specifies the load-bearing capacity more precisely.
- if the vehicle has been parked without - direct sunlight on the tires for at least three - hours and
- if the vehicle has not been driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km)
Tread
Occupant distribution
The part of the tire that comes into contact the distribution of occupants in a vehicle at with the road. their designated seating positions.
Bead
Total load limit
The tire bead ensures that the tire sits Rated cargo and luggage load plus securely on the wheel. There are several steel kilograms (150 lb) times the vehicle's wires in the bead to prevent the tire from designated seating capacity. coming loose from the wheel rim.
Sidewall
Changing a wheel
The part of the tire between the tread and bead.
Flat tire
Weight of optional extras
The "Breakdown assistance" section
(▷ page 233) contains information and notes as on how to deal with a flat tire.
The combined weight of those optional extrathat weigh more than the replaced standardpart and more than 2.3 kilograms (5 lbs).
These optional extras, such as high-performance brakes, level control, a roof ra or a high-performance battery, are not included in the curb weight and the weight the accessories.
Rotating the wheels
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
WARNING
This is a unique identifier which can be used by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for example for a product recall, and thus identify the purchasers. The TIN is made up of the manufacturer's identity code, tire size, tire type code and the manufacturing date.
Afterchanging the front and rear wheels may severely impair the driving characteristics if the wheels or tires have different dimensions. The wheel brakes or suspension components may also be damaged. There is a risk of accident. Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheel and tires are of the same dimensions.
Load bearing index
! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure monitor, electronic components are a located in the wheel.
The load bearing index (also load index) is code that contains the maximum load bearing capacity of a tire.
Tire-mounting tools should not be used near the valve. This could damage the electronic components.
Traction
Only have tires changed at a qualified specialist workshop.
Traction is the result of friction between the tires and the road surface.
Always pay attention to the instructions and safety notes when changing a wheel
Treadwear indicators
(▷ page 269).
This is indicated by narrow bars (treadwear ( page 269). bars) that are distributed over the tire tread. The wear patterns on the front and rear tires If the tire tread is level with the bars, the different, depending on the operating conditions. limit of 116 in (1.6 mm) has been reached. Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern
Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern has formed on the tires. Front tires typically wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires in the center.
If your vehicle's tire configuration allows, you can change the wheels according to the intervals in the tire manufacturer's warranty
book in your vehicle documents. If no warranty book is available, the tires should be rotated every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to 10,000 km), or earlier if tire wear requires not change the direction of wheel rotation. Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel are the brake disc thoroughly every time a whole is rotated. Check the tire pressure and reactivate the tire pressure monitor if necessary.
Direction of rotation
Tires with a specified direction of rotation have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a of hydroplaning. You will only gain these benefits if the correct direction of rotation maintained.
An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates its correct direction of rotation.
Storing wheels
Store wheels that are not being used in a dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.
Cleaning the wheels
WARNING
The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage to the tires or chassis components.
Components damaged in this way may fail unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not use power washers with circular jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged tires or chassis components replaced immediately.
Mounting a wheel
Preparing the vehicle
▶ Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and be level ground.
to Apply the electric parking brake manually.
▶ Bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position.
Shift the transmission to position P.
▶ Switch off the engine.
▶ Open the driver's door. The on-board electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the SmartKey having been removed.
▶ Remove Start/Stop button from ignition lock (▷ page 119).
risk fake the following objects from the left-hand stowage compartment and the left-is-hand stowage space in the trunk:
- lug wrench
• folding wheel chock
- jack
- alignment bolt
▶ Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away. cool,
Securing the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away
If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, it can be found in the vehicle tool kit ( page 232).
The folding wheel chock is an additional safety measure to prevent the vehicle from rolling away, for example when changing a wheel.
text_image
Four-panel diagram showing mechanical component assembly with numbered steps and blue arrows indicating motion direction.▶ Fold both plates upwards ①.
▶ Fold out lower plate ②.
▶ Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully the openings in base plate ③.
natural_image
Side profile of a silver sports car (no visible text or symbols)Securing the vehicle on level ground
▶ On level ground: place chocks or other suitable items under the front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally opposite the wheel you wish to change.
natural_image
Side profile of a silver sports car, no visible text or symbols on the vehicle itselfSecuring the vehicle on slight downhill gradients
▶ On downhill gradients: place chocks or other suitable items in front of the wheels of the front and rear axle.
Raising the vehicle
WARNING
If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. There is a risk of injury.
Only position the jack at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the jack must be positioned vertically, directly under the jacking point of the vehicle.
The following must be observed when raising the vehicle:
- to raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-specific jack that has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. If used incorrectly, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised.
- the jack is designed only to raise and hold the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed. It is not suited for performing maintenance work under the vehicle.
- avoid changing the wheel on uphill and downhill slopes.
- before raising the vehicle, secure it from rolling away by applying the electric parking brake and positioning wheel chocks. Never release the electric parking brake while the vehicle is raised.
- the jack must be placed on a firm, flat and non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large, load-bearing underlay must be used. On a slippery surface, a non-slip underlay must be used, e.g. rubber mats.
- do not use wooden blocks or similar objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jack will not be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity due to the restricted height.
• make sure that the distance between the underside of the tires and the ground does not exceed 1.2 in (3 cm).
never place your hands and feet under the raised vehicle.
- never lie under the raised vehicle.
- never start the engine when the vehicle is raised.
- never open or close a door or the trunk lid when the vehicle is raised.
• make sure that no persons are present in the vehicle when the vehicle is raised.
text_image
is lid m 2 4 3 P40.10-5779-31▶ Position jack ③ at jacking point ②.
natural_image
Close-up of a car wheel with a blue arrow indicating clockwise motion, no text or symbols present▶ Using lug wrench ①, loosen the bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the wheel bolts completely.
text_image
P40.00-2129-31 one sThe mounting for the jack is centered between the front and rear wheel housings (arrow).
natural_image
Side profile of a silver sports car with a blue arrow indicating upward motion, no visible text or symbols on the vehicle itself.Example
▶ Make sure that the base of the jack is positioned directly under jacking point (2)
▶Turn crank ④ clockwise until jack ③ si completely on jacking point ② and the base of the jack lies evenly on the grou
▶ Turn crank ④ until the tire is raised a maximum of 1.2 inches (3 cm) off the ground.
! The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jacking points. Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged.
Removing a wheel
text_image
5 P40.10-5780-31▶ Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt completely.
▶ Screw alignment bolt ⑤ into the thread instead of the wheel bolt.
▶ Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty surface. The bolt and wheel hub threads could otherwise be damaged when you screw them in.
! AMG ceramic high performance compound brake system:
When detaching or attaching the wheel, the wheel rim may hit against the ceramic brake disc and damage it.
For this reason, you should proceed carefully. Request the assistance of a second person or use a second alignment bolt.
▶ Remove the wheel.
Mounting a new wheel
WARNING
Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel bolts to come loose. As a result, you could lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of accident.
Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event of damage to the threads, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Have the damaged wheel bolts or hub threads replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.
WARNING
If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip over. There is a risk of injury.
Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is on the ground.
Always pay attention to the instructions and safety notes in the "Changing a wheel" section (▷ page 268).
Only use wheel bolts that have been designed for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use wheel bolts which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the respective wheel.
text_image
a n the P40.10-6319-31① Wheel bolt
Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact surfaces.
! To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold the wheel securely against the wheel hub while screwing in the first wheel bolt.
natural_image
Close-up of a Mercedes-Benz wheel rim with blue arrows pointing to the wheel (no text or symbols visible)▶ Place the wheel onto the alignment bolt and push it on.
natural_image
Close-up of a car wheel with a blue arrow indicating direction, no visible text or symbols▶ Tighten the wheel bolts until they are finger-tight.
▶ Unscrew the alignment bolt.
▶ Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is tight.
Lowering the vehicle
WARNING
The wheels could work loose if the wheel nu and bolts are not tightened to the specified tightening torque. There is a risk of accident. Have the tightening torque immediately checked at a qualified specialist workshop after a wheel is changed.
▶ Turn the crank of the jack counterclockwise until the vehicle is once again standing firmly on the ground.
▶ Place the jack to one side.
text_image
1 2 3 4 5 P40.10-5783-31▶ Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise pattern in the sequence indicated (① to ⑤). The specified tightening torque is 133 lb-ft(180 Nm).
▶ Turn the jack back to the out-of-use position and stow it in the trunk again with the rest of the wheel-changing tools.
Wheel and tire combinations
General notes
! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use tires and wheels which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz specifically for your vehicle.
These tires have been specially adapted for fingeruse with the control systems, such as ABS or ESP ^® , and are marked as follows:
• MO = Mercedes-Benz Original
- MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended (tires featuring run-flat characteristics)
• MO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only certain AMG tires)
Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires may only be used on wheels that have been specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz. Only use tires, wheels or accessories tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Certain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noise emissions or fuel consumption, may otherwise be adversely affected. In addition, when driving with a load, tire dimension variations could cause the tires to come into contact with the bodywork and axle components. This could result in damage to the tires or the vehicle.
Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for damage resulting from the use of tires, wheels or accessories other than those tested and approved.
Information on tires, wheels and approved combinations can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop.
The Tire and Load Information placard with the recommended tire pressures is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. Further information about driving at high speeds or
driving with vehicle loads that are lighter than the maximum vehicle load can be found in the tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap. Check tire pressures regularly, and only when the tires are cold. Comply with the maintenance recommendations of the tire manufacturer. These are located in the vehicle document wallet.
Further information on recommended tire pressures as well as tire pressures for specific driving situations, see (▷ page 251).
Notes on the vehicle equipment - always equip the vehicle with:
- tires of the same size on a given axle (left/right)
- with the same type of tires on all wheels at a given time (summer tires, winter tires)
The following pages contain information on approved wheel rims and tire sizes for equipping your vehicle with winter tires. Winter tires are not available at the factory as standard equipment or optional extras. If you wish to equip your vehicle with approved winter tires, you will also require, in certain circumstances, wheel rims of an appropriate size, as the sizes of approved winter tires can deviate from those of standard tires. This is dependent on the model and the equipment installed at the factory.
The tires and wheel rims, as well as further information, can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.
Tires
Summer tires
| Front axle | |
| Summer tires | 265/35 ZR19 (98Y) XL |
| Light alloy rim | 9.5J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.36 in (60 mm)or9.5J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.32 in (59 mm) |
| Rear axle | |
| Summer tyre§ | 295/30 ZR20 (101Y) XL |
| Light alloy rim | 11J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 2.68 in (68 mm) |
Winter tires, variant 1
| Front axle | |
| Winter tires | 265/35 R19 98W XL M+S |
| Light alloy rim | 9.5J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.36 in (60 mm)or9.5J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.32 in (59 mm) |
| Rear axle | |
| Winter tires | 295/30 R20 101W XL M+S |
| Light alloy rim | 11J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 2.68 in (68 mm) |
Winter tires, variant 2
| Front and rear axles | |
| Winter tires | 255/35 R19 96V XL M+S |
| Light alloy rim | 9.5J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.32 in (59 mm) |
Useful information 278
Information regarding technical data 278
Warranty 278
Identification plates 278
Service products and filling capacities 279
This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.
i Please read the information on qualified specialist workshops (▷ page 22).
Information regarding technical data
You can find technical data on the Internet http://www.mercedes-benz.com
The data stated here specifically refers to a vehicle with standard equipment. Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the data for all vehicle variants and trim levels.
Warranty
The Service and Warranty Information booklet contains detailed information about the warranties covering your vehicle.
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will exchange or repair any defective parts originally installed in the vehicle in accordance with the terms of the following warranties:
• New Vehicle Limited Warranty
- Emission System Warranty
- Emission Performance Warranty
• California, Connecticut, Maine, Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island and Vermont Emission Control System Warranty
• State warranty enforcement laws (Lemon Laws)
Replacement parts and accessories are covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Accessories warranties. You can obtain information about this from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
i Should you lose your Service and Warranty Information booklet, have an layauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replacement. It will be mailed to you.
Identification plates
Vehicle identification plate with vehicle identification number (VIN) and paint code number
text_image
at: to ult ① P00 10 4898 31▶ Open the driver's door. You will see vehicle identification plate ①.
text_image
MFD BY DAIMLER AG STUTGART IG LBS PASSENGER CAR C172 10/07 GWWR 4508 THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE GAWR FRONT 2172 US, FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY BUMER GAWR REAR 1030 2403 AND THEFT PREVENTION STANDARDS INFECTION WDDGF41X07F 123456 OR THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE MADE IN GERMANY This vehicle may include mercury-sized devices installed by the manufacturer. - High intensity - Discharge Headlamps - Displays - Backlit Instruments Remove Devices Before Vehicle Disposal. Under Removed of Dordors Please Reuse, Recycle or Dispose as Hasterberries Waste. P00.01-3875-31Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only)
② VIN
③ Paint code
text_image
DAIMLER AG KG MADE IN GERMANY GVWR/PNBV 2390 BUILT 10/07 EC GAWR/ONE F/AV 1200 TYPE PC/VT GAWR/ONE R/AR 1230 PAINT CODE C172 WDBSK79F17F113822 3 P00.01-3683-31Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only)
② VIN
③ Paint code
i The data shown on the identification plate is example data. This data is different for ② every vehicle and can deviate from the data shown here. You can find the data applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle identification plate.
text_image
VIN ① ② P00.10-4795-31▶ Slide the right-hand front seat to its rearmost position.
▶ Fold floor covering ① upwards.
You will see VIN ②.
Additionally, the vehicle identification number (VIN) can be found in the following locations:
• on the vehicle identification plate (▷ page 278)
- on the lower edge of the windshield (▷ page 279)
text_image
Engine number ① ② ③ P00.10-4978-31① Emission control information plate, including the certification of both federal and Californian emissions standards ② VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield) ③ Engine number (stamped into the crankcase)
Service products and filling capacities
Important safety notes
WARNING
Service products may be poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury. Comply with instructions on the use, storage and disposal of service products on the label of the respective original containers. Always store service products sealed in their original containers. Always keep service products out of the reach of children.
Environmental note
Dispose of service products in an environmentally responsible manner.
Service products include the following:
- Fuels
• Lubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil) - Coolant
- Brake fluid
• Windshield washer fluid
• Climate control system refrigerant
Components and service products must be matched. You should therefore only use products that have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Information on tested and approved products can be obtained at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
You can recognize service products approved by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscription on the containers:
• MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 331.0)
• MB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 331.0)
Other designations or recommendations indicate a level of quality or a specification in
accordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g.
MB 331.0). They have not necessarily been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
If you or others come into contact with fuel, observe the following:
- Wash away fuel from skin immediately using soap and water.
- If fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical assistance without delay.
- If fuel is swallowed, seek medical assistance without delay. Do not induce vomiting.
- Immediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with fuel.
Tank capacity
| Total capacity | 22.5 gal (85 l) |
| Of which reserve | Approx. 3.7 gal (14 l) |
Fuel
Important safety notes
WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explosion.
You must avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before refueling.
WARNING
Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury.
You must make sure that fuel does not com into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale vapors. Keep fuel away from children.
Gasoline
Fuel grade
! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.
! Only refuel using unleaded gasoline with a minimum octane rating of 91.
! To ensure the longevity and full performance of the engine, only premium-fugrade unleaded gasoline must be used.
If standard premium-grade unleaded gasoline is unavailable and unleaded gasoline of a lower grade is used for refueling, observe the following precautions:
- only fill the fuel tank to half full with regular unleaded gasoline and fill the rest
with premium-grade unleaded gasoline as soon as possible.
- do not drive at the maximum speed.
- avoid sudden acceleration and engine speeds above 3000 rpm.
- never refuel using fuel with an octane number lower than 87. Otherwise, engine failure could occur.
! Only use the fuel recommended.
Operating the vehicle with other fuels can lead to engine failure.
Reformulated Gasoline (RFG) and/or unleaded gasoline with additives can be used. The concentration of additives in the fuel, however, must not exceed 10%, e.g.:
- Ethanol
• TAME
• ETBE
• IPA
• TBA
For MTBE, the concentration should not exceed 15%.
The concentration of methanol in gasoline, including other additives, must not exceed 3%.
Using mixtures of methanol and ethanol is permitted. Gasohol, a mixture of 10% etha and 90% unleaded gasoline, may be used.
All of these blends must fulfill the fuel requirements, e.g.:
- knock resistance
- boiling point
- vapor pressure
You will usually find information about the grade on the pump. If you cannot find the label on the pump, ask the staff for assistance.
For further information, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or on the Internet at http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).
Information on refueling (▷ page 129).
Additives
! Operating the engine with fuel additives added later can lead to engine failure. Do not mix fuel additives with fuel. This does not include additives for the removal and prevention of residue buildup. gasoline must only be mixed with additives recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Comply with the instructions for use on the product label. More information about recommended additives can be obtained from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use fuel brands that have the additives.
The quality of the fuel available in some countries may not be sufficient. Residue could build up as a result. In such cases, and in consultation with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, the gasoline may be mixed with the cleaning additive recommended by Mercedes-Benz (part no. A000989254512).
You must observe the notes and mixing ratios specified on the container.
Engine oil
not General notes
! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of a specification other than is necessary to fulfill the prescribed service intervals. Do not change the engine oil or oil filter in order to achieve longer replacement intervals than those prescribed. You could otherwise cause engine damage or damage to the exhaust gas aftertreatment.
Follow the instructions in the service interval display regarding the oil change. Otherwise, you may damage the engine and the exhaust gas aftertreatment.
When handling engine oil, observe the important safety notes on service products (▷ page 279).
The engine oils are matched to the performance of Mercedes-Benz engines and
service intervals. You should therefore only use engine oils and oil filters that are approved for vehicles with maintenance systems.
For a list of approved engine oils and oil consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Or visit the website http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
The table shows which engine oils have been approved for your vehicle.
MB sheet number 229.5 ^9
i MB approval is indicated on the oil containers.
Filling capacities
The following values refer to an oil change including the oil filter.
Engine with oil filter10.0 US qt (9.5 l)
Additives
! Do not use any additives in the engine. This could damage the engine.
Engine oil viscosity
bar
| Temperature Range | Value | | :--- | :--- | | 0W-30 | 0W-40 | | 5W-30 | 5W-50 | | 10W-30 | 10W-60 | | 15W-30 | 15W-50 | | 20W-40 | 20W-50 | P18.00-2295-31Viscosity describes the flow characteristics of a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity, this means that it is thick; a low viscosity means that it is thin.
Select an engine oil with an SAE classification (viscosity) suitable for the prevailing outside
temperatures. The table shows you which SAE classifications are to be used. The low-temperature characteristics of engine oils can deteriorate significantly, e.g. as a result of aging, soot and fuel deposits. It is therefore strongly recommended that you carry out regular oil changes using an approved engine oil with the appropriate SAE classification.
Refrigerant of the air-conditioning system
Important safety notes
Type of refrigerant
The climate control system of your vehicle is filled with refrigerant R-134a.
The instruction label regarding the refrigerant type used can be found on the radiator cross member.
Refrigerant R-134a
! Only the refrigerant R-134a and the PAG oil approved by Mercedes-Benz may beOilused. The approved PAG oil may not be mixed with any other PAG oil that is not approved for R-134a refrigerant.
Otherwise, the climate control system may be damaged.
Service work, such as topping-up refrigerant or replacing components, may only be carried out by a qualified specialist workshop. All applicable regulations must be adhered to, SAE standard J639 included.
Always have work on the climate control system carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Refrigerant instruction label
text_image
R-134a 550 ± 10g A 001 989 08 03 (PAG) DAIMLER AG SAE J639 A 246 817 15 20 P00.10-5318-31Example: refrigerant instruction label
① Warning symbol
② Refrigerant filling capacity
③ Applicable SAE standards
④ PAG oil part number
⑤ Type of refrigerant
Warning symbols ① indicate:
- possible dangers
• having service work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop
Filling capacities
Missing values were not available at time going to print.
| All models Capacity | |
| Refrigerant | 28.2 oz(800 g) |
| PAG oil | |
Brake fluid
WARNING
The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture from the air. This lowers the boiling point of the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in brake system when the brakes are applied hard. This would impair braking efficiency. There is a risk of an accident.
You should have the brake fluid renewed at the specified intervals.
When handling brake fluid, observe the important safety notes on service products (▷ page 279).
The brake fluid change intervals can be found in the Maintenance Booklet.
Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz according to MB Approval 331.0. Information about approved brake fluid can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop and the replacement confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet.
Coolant
Important safety notes
! Only add coolant that has been premix with the desired antifreeze protection. You could otherwise damage the engine. of Further information on coolants can be found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products, MB Specifications for Service Products 310.1, e.g. on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or contact a qualified specialist workshop.
! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, even in countries where high temperatures prevail. Otherwise, the cooling system is not sufficiently protected from corrosion and overheating.
Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop and the replacement confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet.
Comply with the important safety precautions could damage the plastic lenses of the for service products when handling coolant headlamps.
(▷ page 279).
The coolant is a mixture of water and antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs the following tasks:
- corrosion protection
- antifreeze protection
- raising the boiling point
If the coolant has antifreeze protection down, At temperatures above freezing:
! Do not add distilled or de-ionized water to the washer fluid container. Otherwise, the level sensor may be damaged.
! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit washer fluid should be mixed together. The spray nozzles may otherwise become blocked.
/At temperatures above freezing:
to -35 °F (-37 °C), the boiling point of the coolant during operation is approximately 266 °F (130 °C).
The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentration in the engine cooling system should:
▶ Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of water and windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB SummerFit.
Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water. At temperatures below freezing:
- be at least 50%. This will protect the e cooling system against freezing down to approximately -35 °F (-37 °C).
- not exceed 55% (antifreeze protection down to -49 °F [-45 °C]). Otherwise, heat will not be dissipated as effectively.
will not be dissipated as effectively.
- be at least 50%. This will protect the engine to fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture cooling system against freezing down to of water and windshield washer fluid, e.g. approximately -35 °F (-37 °C). MB WinterFit.
- not exceed 55% (antifreeze protection) Adapt the mixing ratio to the outside down to -49 °F [-45 °C]). Otherwise, heattemperature.
If the vehicle has lost coolant, add equal amounts of water and antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accordance with MB Specifications for Service Products 310.1.
The coolant is checked with every maintenance interval at a qualified specialist workshop.
- Down to 14 °F (-10 °C): mix 1 part MB WinterFit to 2 parts water.
- Down to -4 °F (-20 °C): mix 1 part MB WinterFit to 1 part water.
- Down to -20.2 °F (-29 °C): mix 2 parts MB WinterFit to 1 part water.
i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluid all year round.
When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filled with a coolant mixture that ensures Filling capacities
adequate antifreeze and corrosion protection.
Model Capacity
All models
7.4 US qt (7.0 l)
Windshield/headlamp cleaning system
Important safety notes
Vehicle data, Coupe
Dimensions and weights
! Only use washer fluid that is suitable for plastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid The data stated here specifically refers to a vehicle with standard equipment. Consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center data for vehicle variants and trim levels.
natural_image
Side profile of a silver sedan car with open hood and side profile dimension labeled (no text or symbols on the car itself)Coupe
| 1Height when opened(rear spoiler retracted) | 63.4 in (1610 mm) |
| 1Height when opened(rear spoiler extended) | 66.0 in (1677 mm)(rear spoiler extended) |
text_image
P72.10-3767-31 ① ②| 1Range of movement exceeding vehicle width | 14.3 in (362 mm) |
| 2Height when opened (exterior mirrors folded in) | 73.7 in (1873 mm)(exterior mirrors folded in) |
| 2Height when opened (exterior mirrors folded out) | 76.6 in (1946 mm)(exterior mirrors folded out) |
| all | |
| Vehicle length | 182.7 in (4640 mm) |
| Vehicle width including exterior mirrors | 81.7 in (2075 mm) |
| Vehicle height | 49.7 in (1262 mm) |
| Wheelbase | 105.5 in (2680 mm) |
| Front track | 66.2 in (1682 mm) |
| Rear track | 65.0 in (1651 mm) |
| Ground clearance | 3.9 in (99 mm) |
| Turning radius | 47.6 ft (12.1 m) |
| Maximum trunk load | 137 lb (62 kg) |
Vehicle data, Roadster
Dimensions and weights
The data stated here specifically refers to vehicle with standard equipment. Consult a authorized Mercedes-Benz Center data for vehicle variants and trim levels.
natural_image
Side profile of a silver sports car showing open hood and front wheel, with dimension line and part number label (P72.20-3073-31) indicating measurement reference.Roadster
| 1Height when opened(rear spoiler retracted) | 67.4 in (1713 mm) |
| 1Height when opened(rear spoiler extended) | 68.2 in (1732 mm) |
| SLS AMG Roadster | |
| Vehicle length | 182.7 in (4640 mm) |
| Vehicle width including exterior mirrors | 81.7 in (2075 mm) |
| Vehicle height | 49.6 in (1261 mm) |
| Wheelbase | 105.5 in (2680 mm) |
| Front track | 66.2 in (1682 mm) |
| Rear track | 65.0 in (1651 mm) |
| Ground clearance | 3.9 in (99 mm) |
| Turning radius | 39.7 ft (12.1 m) |
| Maximum trunk load | 137 lb (62 kg) |
Publication details
Internet
Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found on the following websites:
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)
http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)
Editorial office
©Daimler AG: Not to be reprinted, translated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without written permission from Daimler AG.
Vehicle manufacturer
Daimler AG
Mercedesstraße 137
70327 Stuttgart
Germany